Construction Supervision Manual

CONSTRUCTION
SUPERVISION
UAL
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
ABU DHABI MUNICIPALITY
ROAD SECTION
1999 Edition
CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION MANUAL
Table of Contents Page No.
SECTION 100: GENERAL INFORMATION

101 INTRODUCTION 100-1
101.01 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF THE MANUAL 100-1
101.02 GOVERNMENT RESPONSIBILITIES 100-1
101.03 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS 100-1
101.04 CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION STAFF AND RESPONSIBILITIES 100-7
101.04.01 Resident Engineer 100-8
101.04.02 Assistant Resident Engineer 100-9
101.04.03 Secretary 100-9
101.04.04 Utility Engineer 100-10
101.04.05 Quantity Surveyor 100-10
101.04.06 Survey Party Chief 100-10
101.04.07 Surveyor 100-11
101.04.08 Materials Technician 100-11
101.04.09 Inspectors 100-12
101.05 PRE-COMMENCEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION 100-13
101.06 SCOPE OF WORK 100-13
101.06.01 General 100-13
101.06.02 Amendments 100-14
101.07 CONTROL OF WORK 100-15
101.07.01 General 100-15
101.07.02 Site Instructions 100-15
101.07.03 Schedule 100-16
101.07.04 Progress Evaluation and Reports 100-16
101.07.05 Progress Letters and Delay Penalties 100-18
101.07.06 BOQ Recapitulation 100-18
101.08 CONTROL OF MATERIAL 100-18
101.08.01 Approval of Materials 100-19
101.08.02 Testing Requests 100-19
101.08.03 Quality Control Procedures 100-20
101.08.04 Testing Records 100-20
101.09 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO THE PUBLIC 100-21
101.09.01 Laws to be Observed 100-21
101.09.02 Permits 100-21
101.09.03 Restoration of Surfaces Opened by Permit 100-21
101.09.04 Greenery 100-21
101.09.05 Environmental Protection 100-21
101.09.06 Archaeological Features of Abu Dhabi 100-22
101.09.07 Public Convenience and Safety 100-22
101.09.08 Protection and Restoration of Property and Landscape 100-23
101.10 MEETINGS 100-23
101.10.01 Regular Job Meetings 100-23
101.10.02 Preconstruction Meeting 100-23
101.10.03 Utilities Meetings 100-24
101.10.04 Periodic Progress Review Meetings 100-24
101.10.05 Safety Meeting 100-25
101.11 SURVEYS 100-25
101.12 SHOP DRAWINGS 100-26
101.13 UTILITIES 100-28
SECTION 200: EARTHWORK

201 GENERAL 200-1
202 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 200-1
202.01 EXISTING PAVEMENT, CURBS, AND SIDEWALK REMOVAL 200-1
Page -1-
202.02 PRESERVATION OF TREES AND GREENERY 200-1

202.03 CLEARING AND GRUBBING OPERATIONS 200-2
203 REMOVAL OF BUILDINGS AND OBSTRUCTIONS 200-2
204 EXCAVATION 200-3
204.01 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION 200-3
204.02 EXCESSIVE UNDERCUTTING 200-4
204.03 CUT SECTIONS 200-5
204.04 CUT SLOPES 200-5
204.05 SURPLUS MATERIAL 200-5
205 EMBANKMENTS 200-5
205.01 BORROW MATERIAL 200-5
205.01.01 Borrow Material - Load Bearing 200-5
205.01.02 Borrow Material - Non-Load Bearing 200-6
205.02 PLACEMENT OF BORROW MATERIAL 200-6
205.02.01 Uniformity of Material 200-7
205.02.02 Hauling, Spreading, and Shaping 200-7
205.02.03 Layer Thickness 200-7
205.02.04 Mositure Content 200-7
205.02.05 Drainage 200-8
205.02.06 Compaction 200-8
206 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 200-9
206.01 EMBANKMENTS 200-9
206.02 EXCAVATIONS 200-9
206.03 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS 200-9
206.04 LEVELING 200-9
207 RECORDS 200-10
208 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 200-10
SECTION 300: AGGREGATE SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES

301 GENERAL 300-1
302 AGGREGATE SUBBASE COURSES 300-1
302.01 DESCRIPTION 300-1
302.02 MATERIALS 300-1
302.03 TESTING 300-2
302.04 PLACING 300-2
302.05 WATERING 300-4
302.06 COMPACTION 300-4
302.07 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT 300-4
302.08 FINISHING 300-4
302.09 CHECKING GRADE 300-6
302.09.01 Hand Level Method - Grade Check 300-6
302.09.02 String Line Method - Grade Check 300-6
302.09.03 Cross-Section Method - Grade Check 300-6
302.09.04 Straightedge - Evenness Check 300-6
302.10 DEPTH CHECKS 300-6
303 RECORDS 300-7
SECTION 400: ASPHALT WORKS

401 ASPHALT CONCRETE 400-1
401.01 ASPHALT PLANT OPERATIONS 400-1
401.01.01 General 400-1
401.01.02 Batch Plants 400-1
401.01.03 Continuous Mix Plants 400-2
Page -2-
401.01.04 Plant Component Descriptions (Batch and Continuous) 400-3

401.01.05 Establishing Mix Proportions 400-6
401.01.06 Inspection During Mixing Operations 400-6
401.01.07 Records and Reports 400-8
401.02 MATERIALS AND MATERIAL HANDLING 400-8
401.02.01 Stockpiling of Aggregates 400-8
401.02.02 Storage of Asphalt Cement Materials 400-8
401.03 ROAD OPERATIONS 400-9
401.03.01 General 400-9
401.03.02 Traffic Control 400-9
401.03.03 Weather 400-9
401.03.04 Duties before Paving Begins 400-9
401.03.05 Inspection of Paving Equipment 400-10
401.03.06 Mix Delivery 400-11
401.03.07 Spreading and Finishing 400-12
401.03.08 Compaction 400-14
401.04 RECORDS AND REPORTS 400-16
401.05 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 400-17
402 PRIME COAT 400-17
402.01 GENERAL 400-17
402.02 MATERIALS 400-17
402.02.01 Bitumen 400-17
402.02.02 Cover Aggregate 400-17
402.03 EQUIPMENT 400-17
402.03.01 Liquid Asphalt Distributor 400-17
402.03.02 Power Broom 400-19
402.03.03 Water Truck 400-19
402.04.01 Repair of Defects 400-19
402.04.03 Weather Limitations 400-19
402.04.04 Application of Asphalt Material 400-19
403 TACK COAT 400-20
403.01 GENERAL 400-20
403.02 MATERIALS 400-20
403.03 EQUIPMENT 400-20
403.04.01 Surface Cleaning 400-20
403.04.03 Weather Limitations 400-20
403.04.04 Coverage 400-21
403.04.05 Application of Asphalt Material. 400-21
404 COLD MILLING ASPHALT PAVEMENT 400-21
404.01 GENERAL 400-21
404.02 EQUIPMENT 400-22
404.03 ROAD OPERATION 400-22
405 RECYCLING ASPHALT PAVEMENT 400-22
405.01 GENERAL 400-22
405.02 MATERIALS AND MIX DESIGN 400-23
405.02.01 Recycled Material 400-23
Page -3-
405.02.02 New Aggregate 400-23

405.02.03 Asphalt Modifier 400-23
405.02.04 New Asphalt 400-23
405.02.05 Recycled Mixture 400-23
405.03 EQUIPMENT 400-23
405.04 PLANT OPERATIONS 400-24
406 SURFACE RECYCLING 400-24
406.01 GENERAL 400-24
406.02 MATERIALS 400-24
406.03 EQUIPMENT 400-25
406.03.01 Heater-Planer 400-25
406.03.02 Heater Scarifier 400-25
406.03.03 Milling and Grinding Machines 400-25
406.04.01 Heater Planing 400-25
406.04.02 Heater Scarifying 400-25
406.04.03 Surface Milling and Grinding 400-25
406.04.04 Miscellaneous Pavement Repairs 400-25
406.05 RECORDS 400-26
407 ASPHALT CONCRETE REPAIRS 400-26
407.01 GENERAL 400-26
407.02 REMOVAL 400-26
407.03 MATERIALS 400-26
407.04 EQUIPMENT 400-26
407.05 REPAIR METHOD 400-26
408 SAND-ASPHALT COURSES 400-27
408.01 SAND-ASPHALT SUBBASE 400-27
408.02 PLANT MIX SAND-ASPHALT BASE COURSES 400-28
SECTION 500: CONCRETE WORKS

501 GENERAL 500-1
502 MATERIALS 500-1
502.01 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 500-1
502.02 CONCRETE CLASSES 500-2
502.02.01 Concrete Class K140 500-2
502.02.05 Concrete Class K455 and K500 500-2
502.03 MIX DESIGN APPROVAL 500-2
502.04 HANDLING MATERIALS 500-3
502.05 CONCRETE BATCH PLANT INSPECTION 500-3
502.05.01 Inspector’s Diary 500-5
503 CONCRETE ELEMENTS 500-5
503.01 CONCRETE CURBS 500-5
503.01.01 Cast-in-Situ Foundations 500-5
503.01.02 Haunching 500-6
503.01.03 Cast-in-Situ Curbs and Nose 500-6
503.01.04 Precast Curbs 500-7
503.02 CONCRETE BARRIERS 500-8
503.02.01 Constructing Barriers 500-8
503.02.02 Aligning Barriers 500-9
Page -4-
503.03 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 500-9

503.03.01 Joint Sawing 500-10
503.04 BRIDGES 500-10
503.05 PRECAST STRUCTURES 500-11
503.06 SIDEWALK TILES 500-12
503.06.01 Construction 500-12
503.07 INTERLOCKING PAVING BLOCKS 500-14
503.07.01 Materials 500-14
503.07.03 Repairs 500-16
504 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION 500-18
504.01 GENERAL 500-18
504.02 PUMPING CONCRETE 500-19
504.03 VIBRATING CONCRETE 500-20
504.04 WEATHER LIMITATIONS 500-21
504.05 FORMS 500-23
504.05.01 Wood Forms 500-23
504.05.02 Metal Forms 500-24
504.06 FALSEWORK 500-25
504.07 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND FALSEWORK 500-25
504.08 REINFORCEMENT 500-27
504.08.01 Materials 500-27
504.08.02 Placement 500-28
505 CONCRETE FINISHING 500-29
506 CONCRETE REPAIRS 500-30
506.01 MATERIALS 500-30
506.02 CONCRETE PREPARATION 500-30
506.03 CONCRETE BONDING AGENT 500-30
506.04 APPLICATION 500-31
507 CURING 500-31
507.01 DAMP CURING 500-31
507.02 LIQUID MEMBRANE METHOD 500-31
508 WATERPROOFING CONCRETE SURFACES 500-32
508.01 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE, TYPE A 500-32
509 TESTING 500-34
510 RECORDS 500-34
SECTION 600: STORM WATER DRAINAGE

601 GENERAL 600-1
602 MATERIALS 600-1
603 EARTHWORK 600-1
603.01 EXCAVATION, GENERAL 600-1
603.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION 600-2
603.03 FOUNDATION 600-4
604 PIPE LAYING, JOINTING 600-4
604.01 GENERAL 600-4
604.02 CARE IN HANDLING PIPE 600-4
604.03 INSTALLATION AND INSPECTION 600-4
605 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES AND APPURTENANCES 600-7
605.01 PAVEMENT SUBBASE DRAINAGE SYSTEM 600-7
605.02 MANHOLES, INLETS, AND CATCH BASINS 600-7
605.02.01 General 600-7
605.02.02 Excavation 600-9
Page -5-
605.02.03 Mud Slab 600-9

605.02.04 Concrete Base 600-9
605.02.05 Wall Construction 600-9
605.02.06 Pipe Connections 600-9
605.02.07 Frames and Covers 600-10
606 TESTING 600-10
607 RECORDS 600-10
SECTION 700: BRIDGES

701 GENERAL 700-1
701.01 CAST-IN-PLACE POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE BOX GIRDER 700-1
701.02 PRECAST I-GIRDERS(AASHTO GIRDERS) 700-1
701.03 STEEL STRUCTURES 700-1
702 FOUNDATIONS 700-1
702.01 SPREAD FOOTINGS 700-1
702.02 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS 700-1
703 BRIDGE SUBSTRUCTURE 700-2
704 BRIDGE SUPERSTRUCTURE 700-3
704.01 BRIDGE DECK CONSTRUCTION 700-3
704.02 PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE 700-4
704.02.01 Forms and Equipment 700-5
704.02.03 Reinforcement and Details 700-6
704.02.04 Placing Concrete 700-6
704.02.05 Concrete Tests 700-7
704.02.06 Curing 700-7
704.02.07 Stress Release 700-7
704.02.08 Final Inspection 700-7
704.02.09 Inspecting Beams and Girders 700-8
704.02.10 Storing Pre-stressed Concrete Beams 700-8
704.02.11 Handling Pre-stressed Concrete Beams 700-8
704.02.12 Erection of Pre-stressed Concrete Beams 700-8
704.03 POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE 700-8
704.03.01 Stress Acceptance Criteria 700-10
704.03.02 Grouting Tendons 700-11
704.04 STRUCTURAL STEEL 700-12
704.04.01 General 700-12
704.04.02 Shop Drawings 700-12
704.04.03 Shop Inspection 700-13
704.04.04 Storage and Handling 700-13
704.04.05 Straightening Bent Material 700-13
705 BEARINGS 700-13
705.01 GENERAL 700-13
705.02 ALIGNMENT 700-13
705.03 BEARING PADS 700-13
705.04 ASSEMBLY 700-14
705.05 FINAL ALIGNMENT 700-14
705.06 SETTING ANCHOR BOLTS AND MASONRY PLATES 700-14
706 EXPANSION JOINTS 700-15
707 ARCHITECTURAL TREATMENT 700-15
708 RECORDS 700-15
Page -6-
SECTION 800: MAINTENANCE AND STAGING OF TRAFFIC

801 GENERAL 800-1
802 TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES (TCDs) 800-1
803 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 800-2
804 TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIERS 800-2
805 DETOURS 800-2
806 PROCEDURES FOR SHIFTING TRAFFIC 800-3
807 RECORDS 800-4
SECTION 900: RECORDS AND REPORTS

901 GENERAL 900-1
902 RESIDENT ENGINEER'S PROJECT DIARY 900-1
903 INSPECTOR'S DAILY REPORT 900-1
904 FIELD NOTES AND COMPUTATION BOOKS 900-2
904.01 BOUND BOOKS 900-2
904.02 NEATNESS 900-2
904.03 CLARITY 900-2
904.04 COMPLETENESS 900-2
904.05 PERMANENCE 900-2
904.06 HONESTY 900-3
904.07 SELF-CHECKING 900-3
904.08 PRIDE 900-3
904.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND VERIFICATION 900-3
904.10 LUMP SUM PAY ITEMS 900-3
904.11 THEORETICAL COMPUTATIONS 900-3
905 CONTRACTOR REQUEST FORMS 900-3
906 PAYMENT ESTIMATES AND DOCUMENTATION 900-6
906.01 INTERIM AND FINAL PAYMENT PROCEDURES 900-6
906.01.01 Interim Payment 900-6
906.01.02 Final Payment 900-7
906.02 PAYMENT FOR MATERIALS STORED ON SITE 900-8
907 DAYWORKS 900-9
908 SAFETY RELATED REPORTING 900-9
909 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 900-9
910 RETENTION OF RECORDS 900-10
911 CONSTRUCTION REPORT FORMS 900-10
SECTION 1000: CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION

1001 GENERAL 1000-1
1002 CONTRACT FILES 1000-1
1003 COMMUNICATIONS 1000-1
1003.01 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN THE RESIDENT ENGINEER AND MUNICIPALITY 1000-2
1003.02 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN THE RESIDENT ENGINEER AND OTHER
AGENCIES, LOCAL OR NON LOCAL 1000-2
1003.03 CORRESPONDENCE WITH THE CONTRACTOR 1000-2
1003.04 MEMORANDA 1000-2
1003.05 MINUTES OF MEETING 1000-2
1004 PROJECT CLOSING OUT 1000-2
1004.01 SCOPE 1000-3
1004.02 DEFINITIONS 1000-3
1004.03 RESPONSIBILITIES 1000-3
1004.04 PROCEDURE FOR PRELIMINARY HANDING OVER 1000-3
Page -7-
1004.05 CLOSE-OUT CHECKLIST FOR USE PRIOR TO PROCESSING THE FINAL

PAYMENT CERTIFICATE 1000-5
1004.06 DISPOSITION OF DOCUMENTS UPON PRELIMINARY HANDING OVER 1000-5
1004.07 PROCEDURE FOR FINAL HANDING OVER 1000-6
1005 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 1000-6
1005.01 GENERAL 1000-6
1005.02 RECORD DRAWINGS FOR UTILITIES 1000-7
1005.03 FINAL COMPILATION AND SUBMITTAL OF RECORD DRAWINGS 1000-8
APPENDIX
LISTING OF CONSTRUCTION REPORT FORMS A-0
Page -8-
CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION MANUAL Section 100
SECTION 100 101.02 GOVERNMENT

RESPONSIBILITIES
GENERAL INFORMATION
101 INTRODUCTION The Abu Dhabi Municipality Road Section is

organized to oversee the planning, design,
101.01 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF THE construction, and maintenance of roadways and
MANUAL structures within the Emirate.
The purpose of this manual is to guide the 101.03 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS

activities, policies, and procedures for all
Consultants and Abu Dhabi Municipality Road Certain terms and abbreviations are used
Section personnel engaged in construction frequently throughout this manual. Each user
supervision. The guidelines presented will: should become familiar with their use and
meaning as they are also used in the Standard
• Achieve Uniformity of Supervision Methods Specifications. They will be encountered quite
and Results frequently during the life of a construction
project.
• Establish Standard Operational and
Administrative Procedures for Construction
This section contains definitions of terms
Projects
commonly used in this manual or in construction
supervision work.
The Construction Supervision Manual is one of a
series of manuals covering Roadway Design,
Addendum: A revision to the Tender
Consultant Procedures, Standard Specifications,
Documents made available after advertisement
and Standard Drawings prepared for the
for bids and before opening of the tenders.
Government of Abu Dhabi. The starting point
for the manual is the Contract Execution
Aggregate: Inert material such as sand, gravel,
followed by Notice to Proceed issued by the
broken stone, crushed stone, or a combination
Municipality. Tendering and the evaluation of
thereof.
Tenders are not addressed.
Amendment: A written agreement between the
Organization of the manual parallels the
Department and the Contractor covering work
Standard Specifications. The objective is to
not otherwise provided for in the Contract, for
supplement the Standard Specifications by
extensions or reductions of contract time or
presenting an overview of the requirements for
revisions in or amendments to the terms of the
each operation or item of work along with
Contract. An amendment shall become a part of
specific guidance for achieving the intent of the
the contract when signed by the Contractor and
requirements. Documentation of the work in the
the Department.
project records and measurement and payment
guidelines are included at the end of each section.
Approved: Approved in writing, including
subsequent written confirmation of previous
Current policies and established procedures for
verbal approval by the Department or Engineer.
various administrative subjects such as project
files, communications, as-built drawings, and
Approval in Writing: A formal letter from the
project handing over are included in Section
Resident Engineer to the Contractor.
1000.
Authority of the Engineer: The Resident
Engineer will be the Engineer’s designated
representative on the Site and as such he will
100-1
have all the authority and powers vested in the (C) Substructure: All that part of a structure
Engineer under the terms of the Contract. The below the bearings of simple and
Resident Engineer’s duty will be primarily to continuous spans, skewbacks of arches,
ensure that the Works are carried out in strict and top of footings of rigid frames;
accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, including backwalls, wingwalls, and wing
and intent of the Contract. The Resident protection railings.
Engineer will have assistants as required by the
progress and nature of the Works underway and (D) Superstructure: All that part of a structure
he will have the authority to delegate in writing above the bearings of simple and
such powers as he may see fit to such assistants continuous spans, skewbacks of arches,
and will furnish to the Contractor a copy of all and top of footings of rigid frames;
such written delegations. excluding backwalls, wingwalls, and wing
protection railings.
Award: The acceptance by the Executive
Council of a proposal to perform the work. Calendar Day: Any day shown on the calendar,
beginning at midnight, extending for a twenty-
Backfill: Material placed in an excavated space four hour period, and ending at midnight.
to fill such space.
Change Order: Contract amendment to effect
Bank Guarantee (Performance Bond): The minor contract modifications including new BOQ
approved form of security, furnished by the Items, addition or reduction of BOQ quantities,
Contractor and issued unconditionally by an Abu additional works, or other such changes that do
Dhabi bank, guaranteeing the full and complete not require an extension of time or an increase in
performance of the Contract. the total contract value.
Bill of Quantities: The prepared schedule, Channel: A natural or artificial watercourse.

included as a part of the proposal package
containing the estimated quantities of the pay Complete in Place: Complete in place means
items for which unit prices are invited. that payment will be full compensation or all
work necessary to complete that portion of the
Bridge: A structure, including supports, erected contract limits entirely to the satisfaction of the
over a depression or an obstruction, such as Engineer, in accordance with the requirements of
water, a highway, or railway, and having a track the Contract. When the basis of payment states
or passageway for carrying traffic or other the work will be paid for complete in place it
moving loads and having an opening, measured shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to
along the center of the roadway, of more than 6.1 determine the elements necessary to complete the
meters between undercopings of abutments or work. When the basis of payment includes a list
extreme ends of openings for multiple boxes. of elements associated with the complete in place
work, the list shall not be construed to limit the
(A) Bridge Length: The greater dimension of a work to the listed elements.
structure measured along the center of the
roadway between the backs of abutment Conduit: A pipe used for receiving and
backwalls or between ends of the bridge protecting wires or cable.
floor.
Contract: The written agreement between the
(B) Bridge Roadway Width: The clear width Department and the Contractor setting forth the
of the structure measured at right angles to obligations of the parties thereunder, including
the center of the roadway between the the performance of the work, the furnishing of
inner faces of curbs or, if curbs are not labor and materials, and the basis of payment.
used, between the inner faces of parapets The Contract includes the advertisement for
or railings.
100-2
tenders, proposal, bill of quantities, contract Delay: Any event, action, force, or factor that
agreement and contract bonds, certificate of causes the length of time needed to perform the
insurance, Standard Specifications, Particular work to increase.
Specifications, Project Plans, Standard
Drawings, documents incorporated by reference, Delay Penalty: The delay penalty per day is
and any supplemental agreements that are equivalent to ten percent (10%) of the value of
required to complete the construction of the work the Contract divided by twenty five percent
in an acceptable manner, including authorized (25%) of the period of execution. The delay
time extensions, all of which constitute one penalty is imposed on the Contractor if he fails to
instrument. handover the completed work in the specified
period.
Contract Amendment: An increase or decrease
in the contract price or time made by variation Department: The Municipality of Abu Dhabi.
order or change order.
Department Representative: The duly
Contract Price: The sum named in the Contract appointed representative of the Department
subject to such amendments or additions thereto charged with oversight of the Contract.
or deductions therefrom as may be made under
the provisions contained in the Contract Engineer: The use of the word Engineer in this
Documents. document relates to the Resident Engineer or his
authorized representative within the limits of
Contract Time: The number of working days or their authority.
calendar days allowed for completion of the
Contract, including authorized time extensions. Equipment (Plant): All machinery, equipment,
If a completion date is specified in the Contract, tools, and apparatus, together with the necessary
the contract time expires on that date. supplies for upkeep and maintenance necessary
for the proper construction and acceptable
Contractor: The individual, partnership, firm, completion of the work.
corporation, joint venture, or any acceptable
combination thereof, contracting with the Executive Council: The Government’s chief
Department for performance of the work. executive committee comprised of the various
department heads acting under authority of the
Controlling Item: A work activity in which any laws of Abu Dhabi.
delay that limits completion will result in a delay
in the completion of the Contract, e.g., a critical Extra Work: Work to be performed by the
construction activity. Contractor not provided for in the Contract, but
found essential for the satisfactory completion of
Culvert: Any structure not classified as a the project.
bridge, which provides an opening under the
roadway. Highway, Street, or Road: General terms
denoting a public way for purposes of vehicular
Daily Works Schedule: Prices or rates of travel, including the entire area within the
payment for work executed based on the cost of defined corridor.
labor, materials, and plant used in performing the
work plus the percentages for overheads, profit, Holidays: The legal holidays as defined by the
etc., as approved by the Engineer. Government of Abu Dhabi.
Day: Day as used in the Contract means a Independent Approved Laboratory: A testing
calendar day. laboratory which has been approved by the
Engineer to perform testing and which has been
100-3
determined by the Engineer to be free from any placed on a subbase course or a subgrade
conflict of interest. to support a surface course.
Inspector: The Engineer’s authorized (C) Wearing Course: One or more layers of
representative assigned to make detailed specified materials designed to
inspections of contract performance. accommodate the traffic load, the top layer
of which resists skidding, traffic abrasion,
Item (BOQ Item): A detail of work for which and the disintegrating effects of climate.
payment is made under the Contract.
Permanent Works: The Permanent Works to
Laboratory: The testing laboratory of the be executed and maintained in accordance with
Department or any other testing laboratory which the Contract.
is certified or approved by the Department.
Period of Execution of the Contract: (Time for
Lump Sum: The amount bid by a Contractor as Completion) The number of calendar days
a single amount for a complete contract item as allowed by Contract or written agreement for the
defined by the specifications, or a price proposed Contractor to complete the Works in accordance
by a Contractor as a single amount for the with the Contract Documents. The Period of the
performance of extra work. Contract starts on the commencement date when
the Site is handed over to the Contractor as
Materials: Substances used in the construction described in the General Conditions of Contract
of the project and its appurtenances. in the Field of Civil Works, Chapter Two,
Article (2). The Period of Execution of the
Median: The untraveled portion of the highway, Contract ends at the time of the Initial Take Over
street, or road which separates the two traveled described in the General Conditions of Contract
roadways with traffic flowing in opposite in the Field of Civil Works, Chapter Six, Article
directions. (36) and the Special Conditions of the Contract,
Chapter Six, Article (36).
Notice of Award: A written notice by the
Department to the successful Tenderer stating Plans: The project plans, Standard Drawings, or
that his Tender has been accepted and that he is reproductions thereof, approved by the Engineer,
required to execute the Contract and furnish a which show the location, character, dimensions,
Final Guarantee and satisfactory evidence of and details of the work to be performed. All
insurance. such documents are to be considered as a part of
the plans whether or not they are reproduced in
Notice to Proceed: A written notice by the the tender documents.
Department to the Contractor stating the date he
is to commence the Works. (A) Standard Drawings: Drawings approved
for repetitive use, showing details to be
Pavement Structure: The combination of used where appropriate. All Standard
subbase, base course, and/or wearing course Drawings approved by the Department
placed to support the traffic load. plus subsequent revisions and additions are
listed in the tender documents along with
(A) Subbase Course: One or more layers of the latest (current) revision dates.
specified or selected materials, of designed
thickness, placed on the subgrade to (B) Project Plans: Specific details and
support a base course. dimensions peculiar to the work which are
supplemented by the Standard Drawings
(B) Base Course: One or more layers of insofar as they may apply.
specified materials, of designed thickness,
100-4
(C) Shop Drawings and Supplemental Revision: Any change made to the Contract
Drawings: Supplemental design sheets, Drawings by the Engineer.
shop drawings, working drawings, or
similar data which the Contractor is Right-of-Way: A general term denoting land,
required to submit to the Engineer for property, or an interest therein, acquired for or
approval or any other supplementary data devoted to transportation purposes.
required of the Contractor.
Roadbed: The graded portion of a highway
Profile Grade: The trace of a vertical plane within top and side slopes, prepared as a
intersecting the top surface of the proposed foundation for the pavement structure and
wearing surface, usually along the longitudinal shoulders.
center line of the roadbed. Profile grade means
either elevation or gradient of such trace Roadside: A general term denoting the area
according to the context. adjoining the outer edge of the roadway.
Extensive areas between the roadways of a
Project: The specific section of the roadway or divided highway may also be considered
bridge on which construction is to be performed roadside.
as described in the Contract.
Roadside Development: Those items necessary
Project Manager: The Contractor’s authorized to the completed highway which provide for the
representative in responsible charge of the work. preservation of landscape materials and features;
the rehabilitation and protection against erosion
Provisional Item: An Item set out in the Bills of of all areas disturbed by construction through
Quantities to cover work that the Department has seeding, sodding, mulching, and the placing of
the option, after award of the Contract and at other ground covers; and such suitable planting
any time during the life of the Contract and prior and other improvements as may increase the
to commencing work on or for the identified effectiveness and enhance the appearance of the
item, to delete such item as the Department may highway.
specify in writing to the Contractor. Provisional
items of work shall not be executed by the Roadway: That portion of the right-of-way
Contractor until authorized in writing by the required for construction, limited by the outside
Department. edges of slopes, including ditches, channels, and
all structures pertaining to the work.
Provisional Sum: An allowance set out in the
Bills of Quantities to cover work which has not Section (When referring to the Specifications):
been specified in detail in the Contract. A numbered article or group of related articles
forming a part of the specifications and applying
Reasonably Close Conformity: Compliance to or controlling the procedure of an operation or
within reasonable and customary manufacturing regulation.
and construction tolerances where working
tolerances are not specified. Where working Shop Drawings: Those drawings, details, or
tolerances are specified, reasonably close supplemental documentation prepared by the
conformity means compliance within such Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for
working tolerances. review and approval.
Responsible Contractor: A Contractor that has Shoulder: The portion of the roadway
the requisite skill, resources, desire, and integrity contiguous with the traveled way for
to complete the work in conformance with the accommodation of stopped vehicles, for
provisions of the Contract. emergency use, and for lateral support of base
and surface courses.
100-5
Sidewalk: That portion of the roadway prices quoted in accordance with the Contract
constructed primarily for the use of pedestrians. Documents.
Specifications: The compilation of provisions Tender Form: The prescribed form on which
and requirements for the performance of the tenderer’s offer is submitted.
prescribed work including the Standard
Specifications and Particular Specifications. Tenderer: An individual, partnership, firm,
corporation, or any acceptable combination
(A) Standard Specifications: A book of thereof, or joint venture, submitting a tender.
specifications, which is approved for
general application and repetitive use. Tender Documentation: All writings, working
papers, computer printouts, charts, and data
(B) Particular Specifications: Additions and compilations that contain or reflect information,
revisions to the Standard Specifications data, or calculations used by the Tenderer to
covering conditions and requirements determine the Tender Proposal submitted,
peculiar to an individual project. including material relating to the determination
and application of:
Structures: Bridges, culverts, catch basins,
drop inlets, retaining walls, manholes, endwalls, • Equipment rates
buildings, sewers, service pipes, under drains, • Overhead rates
foundation drains, and other features which may • Time schedules
be encountered in the work and not otherwise • Labor rates
classified. • Efficiency or Productivity rates
• Arithmetic extensions
Subcontractor: An individual, partnership, • Subcontractor and Material Supplier
firm, corporation, or any acceptable combination Quotations
thereof, or joint venture, to which the Contractor
sublets a part of the Contract with the approval Any manuals standard to the industry used by
of the Department. the Tender in determining the Tender Proposal
are also considered bid documentation. These
Subgrade: The roadbed materials beneath the manuals may be included in the bid
pavement structure. The top prepared surface of documentation by reference and shall show the
the subgrade is called finished subgrade name and date of the publication and the
elevation. publisher.
Supplier: One who fabricates, or processes an The term “Tender Documentation” does not
item off the project site, and who may or may not include documents provided by the Department
deliver this item to the project. For purposes of for the Tenderers’ use in the preparation of the
this definition, a supplier shall not include one Tender Proposal.
who establishes a fabricating process or facility
expressly for use of the project, whether on or Tender Guaranty (Surety Bid Bond): The
off the project site; or one who performs work on security furnished with a bid to guarantee that
the project site that is incorporated into the the tenderer will enter into the Contract if its
project. proposal is accepted.
Surety: The corporate body bound with and for Traveled Way: The portion of the roadway for
the Contractor, for the full and complete the movement of vehicles, exclusive of shoulders.
performance of the Contract and for payment of
all debts pertaining to the work. Unbalanced Bid, Mathematically: A bid
containing lump sum or unit bid prices that do
Tender: The offer of a tenderer, on the not reflect reasonably anticipated actual costs
prescribed forms, to perform the work at the
100-6
plus a reasonable proportionate share of the Working Time: Daytime hours of operation for
bidder’s anticipated profit, overhead costs, and execution of the works consisting of a single
other indirect costs. eight (8) hour shift, limited to six (6) hours
during the month of Ramadan, exclusive of night
Unit Price: The price offered by the Contractor work, work on officially declared holidays, and
for one unit of work, as defined by the Fridays.
specifications.
101.04 CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION
Variation Order: Contract amendments STAFF AND RESPONSIBILITIES
resulting in an increase of the Total Contract
Value or an extension of time and requiring
Figure 100.01 shows the typical organizational
approval by the Executive Council.
structure for the construction supervision staff
assigned to a roadway or bridge project. The
Work: Work shall mean the furnishing of all
actual staff requirements for a specific project
labor, materials, equipment, and other incidentals may include additional assignments or certain
necessary or convenient to the successful positions may be excluded depending on the size
completion of the project and the carrying out of and complexity of the project.
all the duties and obligations imposed by the
Contract.
Figure 100.01
CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION STAFF
Department
Representative
Resident
Engineer
Support
Secretary
Staff
• Chief Utility Coordinator
• Soils & Materials Engineer
Asst Resident
• Office Engineer (Design Specialists)
Engineer • Structural Engineer
• Chief Quantity Surveyor
• Chief of Surveys
Inspectors Survey Party Materials Quantity Utilities

Chief Technician Surveyor Engineer
• Surveyors • Technicians
100-7
101.04.01 Resident Engineer • Check and certify progress payments to the

Contractor.
The Resident Engineer is responsible for the
activities and efficiency of his staff for the • Check personnel, equipment, and material
satisfactory prosecution of the work under his costs for all Variation Orders and Change
supervision. He has the responsibility to build Orders required under the terms of the
and maintain an organization that can effectively Contract.
provide the necessary staking, testing, and
inspection to ensure the project is constructed • Review requests for additional
according to the plans and specifications. The compensation and time extensions.
Resident Engineer should familiarize himself
rapidly with the plans, specifications, and any • Prepare Change Orders for all ‘Additional’
Contract amendments to effectively administer and ‘New’ works.
the work.
• Preparation of the Monthly Report.
Some of the principal responsibilities of the
• Site Safety Monitoring wherein the
Resident Engineer are:
monitoring activities, meetings, reviews,
• Ensure the Contractor’s compliance with safety violations, rectification measures,
the Contract Documents. and accident reports are included in the
Monthly Progress Report.
• Inspect all workmanship and materials.
• When necessary, determine proper costs of
• Coordinate the supply of vertical and additions or credits due to the Municipality
horizontal controls for the Contractor. and recommend appropriate action.
• Make layout checks on lines and grades. • Inspect safety conditions and inform the
Contractor of construction safety violations
• Coordination with other Contractors. and follow up action to be taken.
• Maintain all file records on designated • Attend all meetings, and prepare written
forms. These records include all reports on minutes for distribution.
work force, equipment, progress, safety, etc.
• Review correspondence and prepare
• Review and approve the Contractor’s shop responses for signature.
drawings.
• Review, update, monitor, and report on the
• Locate, execute, and interpret all soils and Contractor’s work schedules, CPM-chart,
materials testing according to the and Cash Flow Status.
provisions in the Contract Documents and
Standard Specifications. • Monitor and report on progress of
scheduled utility relocation work.
• The Resident Engineer is responsible for
Contract enforcement and is not to relieve • Provide all photographs before, during, and
the Contractor of his responsibilities after construction necessary to provide
without Municipality authorization. adequate documentation of changes in site
and adjacent structures.
• The Resident Engineer is responsible for the
final materials submittals and review, which • Review and approve the Contractor’s plans
shall be forwarded to the Department with for protection of existing buildings and
recommendations for final approval. structures.
100-8
• Review all construction activities regarding • General oversight of Inspectors’ daily

compliance with local traffic ordinances activities including work assignments, on-
and public convenience. site performance, and guidance on the
supervision of the Contractor’s operations.
• Receive and review complaints and claims
of damage and expedite the Contractor’s • Review of the Contractor’s joint
investigation into these complaints and measurement and testing requests and
damage claims. subsequent completed reports.
• Approve all restoration or final clean-up • Review and approval of the Contractor’s
work. Shop Drawings as delegated by the Resident
Engineer.
• Review and make recommendations on the
Contractor’s claims. • Monitoring the performance of the survey
party.
• Coordination with other Contractors,
Departments, and Agencies. • Review and approval of the Contractor’s
proposed materials and methods as
• Provide a “punch list” and final inspection. delegated by the Resident Engineer.
• Check and approve “as-built” drawings • Preparation of Meeting Minutes as

submitted by the Contractor. delegated by the Resident Engineer.
• Check and approve the final quantities • Coordination with the Contractor’s
submitted by the Contractor. supervisory personnel regarding schedule,
sequence, and method of work.
• Check and approve the final payment
certificate submitted by the Contractor. • Monitoring conformance with the
Contractor’s schedule.
The Resident Engineer should select competent
personnel and delegate authority to them. He • Continuous Field Inspections of the work in
should also promote training programs in each progress and consultation with both the
phase of the work to increase the knowledge of Engineer’s and Contractor’s supervisory
the other project personnel. staff.
101.04.02 Assistant Resident Engineer • Preparation of written and oral reports to

the Resident Engineer on contractual and
The Assistant Resident Engineer is responsible procedural matters.
for performing all the administrative and
operational functions necessary for the day to • Review of as-built drawings, in
day operation of the project. In the absence of the coordination with inspectors and surveyors.
Resident Engineer, the Assistant will assume his
duties. The specific duties of the Assistant will 101.04.03 Secretary
be assigned directly by the Resident Engineer
and typically include the following: The individual filling the position of the
Secretary has the responsibility of correlating
• Review of Inspector’s Daily Reports. information relating to project records. The
Secretary should be aware of the various record
• Preparation of Engineer’s Daily Diary. keeping and reporting procedures. It is the
responsibility of the Secretary to type, copy,
distribute, and file the project correspondence
and meeting minutes.
100-9
101.04.04 Utility Engineer He is expected to have a thorough knowledge of

this manual and other procedures and
When this position is assigned to the project, the instructions and efficiently keep current all
Utility Engineer is responsible to the Resident project records related to quantity surveying. He
Engineer and Assistant Resident Engineer for should be able, from these records, to impart any
advice and recommendations on all matters available information to the Resident Engineer
related to utilities. for proper administration of the project.
Principal responsibilities of the Utility Engineer Principal responsibilities of the Quantity
include the following: Surveyor consist of the following:
• Identifying general location of utilities prior
• Prepare a BOQ Recapitulation.
to construction.
• Prepare Monthly Financial Report.
• Providing liaison with Utility Agencies.
• Prepare and maintain Interim and Final
• Service Reservation Shop Drawing
Quantity Books.
approval and coordination with Town
Planning Department.
• Check the Contractor’s interim and final
pay certificates.
• Determining requirements for relocations
and protective devices prior to and during
• Evaluate unit rates for new items of work.
construction.
• Check joint measurements for interim
• Serving as liaison with the Municipality on
payments.
all utility matters.
• Compute final pay quantities.
• Reviewing “as-built” drawings as they
concern utilities. • Maintain current as-built drawings as the
work progresses.
• Assisting in preparation of variation orders.
• Maintain a progress schedule and cash flow
• Monitoring notices of intent.
chart.
• Responsible for assisting the Municipality
• Assist in preparation of Change Orders and
and Utility Agencies in expediting permits,
Variation Orders.
approvals, occupation of utility
reservations, and relocation and utility • Assist in evaluating claims.
protection plans.
101.04.06 Survey Party Chief
• Has the responsibility for detecting,
reporting, and overseeing repairs to
Under the direction of the Resident Engineer, the
damaged utility facilities.
Survey Party Chief has the responsibility of
101.04.05 Quantity Surveyor efficiently and accurately providing the necessary
survey controls. These controls are required to
The Quantity Surveyor is charged with the properly layout the construction and to provide
responsibility of correlating information relating base points for quantity measurements of the
to all financial aspects of the project. He should completed items of work.
be aware of all financial matters and proper
maintaining of quantity books and shall advise The Survey Party Chief should have the
the Resident Engineer regarding all financial necessary technical manuals, texts, and tables at
matters. his disposal.
100-10
Principal responsibilities of the Survey Party the efficiency and quality of work performed by
Chief include the following: the team.
• Perform survey work under the direction Accuracy and efficiency are imperative in
and guidance of the Chief of Surveys. construction surveying operations. Each
surveyor, regardless of assigned duty, should
• Establish primary horizontal and vertical independently check and double-check all rod
control points including reference ties for readings, instrument readings, calculations, and
re-establishing the points in the field. measurements as the work progresses.
• Supervise survey party staff. 101.04.08 Materials Technician
• Rotate staff assignments to develop the The field laboratory technician is assigned to
skills and qualifications of the surveyors. coordinate the work and record keeping of the
materials testing laboratory on the project and is
• Record all measurements, rod readings, responsible to the Resident Engineer. He may
and calculations neatly and accurately in receive additional technical counsel from the
field books as the work progresses. Chief of Soils and Materials where such is
assigned to the project.
• Coordinate with the Contractor’s surveyor
on work priorities and schedules.
Principal responsibilities of the Materials
• Check all work by completing traverse Technician are as follows:
closures and bench circuits.
• Field laboratory set-up, organization,
• Report discrepancies or technical problems maintenance, and operation.
to the Resident Engineer.
• Supervision of staff assistants performing
• With the Contractor, perform joint sampling and testing of materials.
measurements of the completed work for
payment. • Perform sampling, testing, record keeping,
and reporting in accordance with
• Check completed work for conformance to
the line and grade required by the project ⇒ Project Plans and Specifications
plans in coordination with the Inspector
⇒ Municipality Policy and Procedures
assigned to the item of work.
Directives.
• Perform regular checks of the Contractor’s
⇒ Materials Testing Manual
setting out to verify proper execution and
accuracy.
⇒ AASHTO Standard Methods of
Sampling and Testing
• Maintain equipment in proper condition
and perform frequent calibration checks.
⇒ Construction Supervision Manual
101.04.07 Surveyor ⇒ Construction Supervision Directives
The project Surveyors work directly under the ⇒ Sampling Guide and Certifications
supervision of the Survey Party Chief. Surveyors Manual
are assigned duties according to their technical
abilities such as Instrumentman, Rodman, etc. • Copy all test results to the Resident
Ideally, all surveyors should be trained on the job Engineer and Contractor.
to gain experience at each position and improve
100-11
• Report any failing or “borderline” test

results immediately to the Resident • Interface with the public, especially
Engineer. residents and business owners adjacent to
the work, to mitigate the construction
• Coordinate with the Inspector in charge of impacts.
the work to confirm approval of the work
for testing and discuss areas of concern. • Coordinate with the Contractor’s foreman
in charge of the work on a daily basis to
• Coordinate with the Contractor on work check on the proper execution of the work.
priorities and schedules.
• Coordinate with the Materials Technician
• Perform sampling and testing as quickly and arrange for sampling and testing of
and efficiently as possible to avoid undue satisfactorily completed work, and quality
delay to the Contractor’s operations. assurance testing of suspect materials.
• Perform regular checks of material • Coordinate with the Survey Party Chief to
delivered to the project for conformance check the line and grade of completed work
with the approved source or supplier. for conformance with the plans and
specifications.
• Maintain neat accurate records.
• Report questionable methods of operation
• Monitor the frequency and number of tests by the Contractor to the Resident Engineer.
required for every operation.
• Report to the Resident Engineer any failure
101.04.09 Inspectors of the Contractor to conform to plans and
specifications and to provide good
All Inspectors on construction projects are to workmanship.
report to the Resident Engineer unless other lines
of reporting have been indicated by the Resident • Process the joint measurement forms and
Engineer. Inspectors assigned to various phases maintain records of their status.
of the work have an important part in assuring
the quality of work in the finished project. They • Maintain records of completed works for
must be completely familiar with the plans, interim and final payment and as-built
specifications, particular specifications, and plans.
construction methods for the phases of the work
to which they have been assigned. If the • Maintain detailed records of work
Inspector finds that he does not fully understand performed by the contractor on a Day
any of the items that he has been charged with, Works basis.
he should seek a clarification of these items from
the Resident Engineer. • Make special notes and document the
Contractor’s activities that may lead to
Principal responsibilities of the Inspector are as claims.
follows:
• Be fair and firm in dealings with the
Contractor. Consider alternatives and
• Ensure performance of the work in strict
consequences carefully before making
accordance with the plans and
decisions.
specifications.
• Issue instructions to the Foreman in charge
• Maintain a detailed diary of the day’s work
of the work and do not argue with the
activities, issues, work approved or
Contractor or his representatives.
rejected, hours of operation, labor and
equipment used, etc., and sign at the end of
each day.
100-12
• Notify the Resident Engineer of conditions Prior to the actual start of construction the
that render it impractical or unreasonable Consultant and/or the Resident Engineer
to enforce the specifications. assigned to the Contract will be required to
monitor the execution of the Pre-commencement
• Report and document any accident that of Construction Activities. These activities are
occurs on site and notify the Resident described in the following table indicating the
Engineer immediately. interaction between the Department, Engineer,
and the Contractor. It should be emphasized that
• Enforce performance of the work in strict the pre-commencement activities are a
accordance with the approved Safety Plan. cooperative effort between the Department, the
Engineer, and Contractor.
• Check detours and traffic control zones for
proper placement of signs, barricades, and
lights. PRE-COMMENCEMENT ACTIVITIES
INSPECTOR’S AUTHORITY
Municipality Engineer Contractor
• Assigned by the Resident Engineer based on the
Inspector’s knowledge, experience, and ability. Notice of • Conformed • Final
• Limited authority for the rejection of materials Award Contract Guarantee
or portions for the work.
Documents • Execute
• May prohibit methods of work that do not
• Propose Site Contract &
conform to the specifications.
Staff Insurance
• Advise Contractor of methods that are likely to Policies
impair the quality and conformance of the work
Notice to
to specification requirements. Notify the
Proceed • Preconstruc- • Site Office
Resident Engineer immediately.
tion Meeting Facilities
• No authority over the Contractor’s management,
• Site • Service
direction, or scheduling of work.
Handover Reservation/
• No authority to alter or relax any plan or
Existing
specification requirement.
Utility
• No authority to issue instructions contrary to the Records
plans or specifications.
• Preliminary
• May direct stoppage of work where the safety of Program
workmen or the public is threatened. Notify the
• Notice of
Resident Engineer immediately.
Intent
• Direct correction of conditions that are
• Mobilization
hazardous or unsafe.
Start • Review • Manual
Construction Program Excavation
101.05 PRE-COMMENCEMENT OF
CONSTRUCTION
101.06 SCOPE OF WORK
101.06.01 General
Following the consideration of Tenders, the
Department will issue a written notice to the
The Scope of Work is defined by the Contract
successful Tenderer stating that the Tender has
Documents including the Tender Documents,
been accepted and that he is required to execute
Specifications, Bills of Quantities, and Plans.
the Contract and furnish a satisfactory Final
Guarantee. This action advances the project
from the Design and Tender phases to the
Construction Supervision phase.
100-13
101.06.02 Amendments • Additional Time for Completion.
The Contract Documents establish the conditions In directing the Contractor, the Resident
under which alterations to the work may be Engineer will determine the applicability of the
made, quantities increased or decreased, and set existing BOQ Items to the additional (or deleted)
forth limitations that are extremely important in work and advise the Contractor of his
the administration of the Contract. The Resident determination. If the existing BOQ Items are not
Engineer should read these sections carefully. applicable to the amendment, the Contractor will
be requested to propose new unit rates for the
The Municipality may make amendments to the items. The Resident Engineer may determine that
form, quality, quantity, or schedule of the works the work cannot be properly measured and
and issue written orders to the Engineer directing valued and order the work be performed on a
such amendments. The Resident Engineer will in Daily Works basis.
turn direct the Contractor in writing to make the
amendments. The nature of the amendment may The Contractor is required to submit, in writing,
result in one or more of the following: any intention to claim extra payment or an
amended rate and state whether an extension of
• Increase or decrease in quantities for which time will be part of his claim. The nature of the
established BOQ Items are applicable. amended work must be properly considered in
determining the most appropriate procedure for
• New items or different character of work for implementing the change and amending the
which the existing BOQ Items are not Contract. Generally, three courses of action are
applicable. available as follows:
Figure 100.02
FORMALIZATION OF CONTRACT AMENDMENTS
Submit New Proposed New

Rates Rates
Rate Analysis
Resident
Resident Resident Engineer Submits
Municipality Contractor’s Change Order
Engineer’s Engineer ‘s to Municipality
Order Evaluation Representative
Evaluation Evaluation
Will Exceed
Use Existing
Total Contract
BOQ
Value
Variation
Order
Need Time
Extension
Day Work
Day Works
Summary
100-14
1. Daily Works. Work of a minor nature, that Contractor results in faulty work, the Contractor
in the opinion of the Engineer cannot be is to be clearly advised in writing that the
properly measured or valued, will be paid on Resident Engineer is not dictating the means.
a Daily Works basis in accordance with the
BOQ Daily Works Schedule and procedures. When the Engineer or his representative have the
authority to select or prohibit a method of
2. Change Order. A Change Order may be construction, the Resident Engineer shall issue
issued to effect the amendment if: written instructions to the Contractor when this
action is desirable.
• A Time Extension is not required, and
The Resident Engineer shall ensure that the
• The Total Contract Value will not be
project is constructed within construction and
exceeded.
geometric limits shown on the drawings.
The Change Order mechanism may be used Structures are to be built to the neat lines shown
to implement new BOQ Items with unit rates on the drawings. Should changes be required,
developed in accordance with the procedure the Resident Engineer shall ensure that these
described in the Contract Documents. changes are executed within the existing limits of
Change Orders are executed by written construction or that approval for new limits has
approval of the designated Municipality been obtained before the Notice to Proceed is
official. issued to the Contractor. Utilities shall be
constructed in the Service Reservations shown on
3. Variation Order. Amendments resulting in an the drawings or in reservations provided before
increase of the Total Contract Value or an construction.
extension of time will require formal
execution of a Variation Order by higher It is the duty of the Resident Engineer to see that
authorities. the project is constructed according to the plans
and specifications, and in strict compliance with
Figure 100.02 shows the potential steps required the terms of the Contract. He shall not direct that
for formalization of a Contract amendment. the work be stopped, except for reasons relating
to safety. He has the authority to reject both
101.07 CONTROL OF WORK unsatisfactory workmanship and materials.
These rejections must be made in writing to the
101.07.01 General
Contractor immediately upon discovery. The
written rejections are to refer to the appropriate
The Contractor is responsible for the means
plan or specification requirement.
employed to construct the works. When the
Contract specifies the means or methods by
101.07.02 Site Instructions
which the work is to be done, the Resident
Engineer must refuse to accept work done by any
The issuance of a Site Instruction involves a
other means or method not specifically
matter that cannot wait for a formal letter and an
authorized. This is to be done even though the
instruction in writing is imperative. Site
Contractor may contend he can secure the same
Instructions must be given in writing and copied
results by some other method.
to the Department Representative. The Resident
Engineer will issue a formal letter confirming the
When the plans and/or specifications do not
directions stated in the Site Instruction as soon as
specify the means, it is the Contractor’s
possible.
responsibility to select a means by which to
accomplish this work. Should the Resident
Engineer believe that the method selected by the
100-15
101.07.03 Schedule
In order to be effective in these matters, the
The Contractor is required to submit a Program Resident Engineer must be able to measure the
of Works for approval of the Resident Engineer progress of the Contract works.
and the Municipality. The program must be
carefully scrutinized considering: The Resident Engineer shall be fully aware of all
aspects of the progress of his project including:
PROGRAM OF WORKS
CONSIDERATIONS • Status of Work Items With Regard to the
Contractor’s Approved Schedule,
• Conformance to Contract Time for Completion. • Current Overall Status of Completion, and
• Approval for Greenery (trees and grass)
Removal. • the Probable Project Completion Date.
• Availability and Time Required for Approval
and Procurement of Materials. There are numerous methods available to
• Construction Staging Plan. evaluate progress. Figure 100.03 provides an
• Detours and Police Approval. explanation of some of the most common
• Utility Works and Accommodations of Work by methods. The Resident Engineer should examine
Others. the results of each measurement indicator
• Available Labor, Plant, and Equipment
carefully.
Resources.
• Critical Path Time Scheduling.
• Weather and Religious Considerations.
These methods of progress evaluation depend
• Mobilization and Pre-Construction Activities. heavily upon information to be furnished by the
• Clean-up and Final Inspection/Punch List. Contractor. It is extremely important to impress
upon the Contractor that the Resident Engineer
will be using these methods to measure his
Progress will be measured against the progress and that such measurement is going to
Contractor’s program and the schedule should be be based upon the Contractor’s own input. The
realistic and achievable. Monthly Reports input data must be acceptable and, if not, should
showing progress consistent with the program be rejected and resubmittal of the needed data
schedule are in the best interest of the requested.
Contractor, Engineer, and the Municipality. The
Contractor should update the schedule and re- The indicators developed from each of these
submit for approval when the old schedule methods of progress evaluation should be
becomes invalid due to actual progress being explored and any needed remedies discussed and
delayed. The revised schedules can support (or agreed. The Resident Engineer shall be
invalidate) Contractor’s claims and show the new thoroughly aware of the findings indicated by
revised completion date or what resources and each of these methods before meeting with the
action must be provided to meet the original Contractor. The Resident Engineer’s role in this
completion dates. situation is to provide responsible directions to
the Contractor on behalf of the Municipality for
101.07.04 Progress Evaluation and Reports controlling and expediting the work. The
Resident Engineer must formally inform the
The Resident Engineer shall evaluate of the Contractor in writing when falling behind
Contractor’s progress. An important function of schedule, documenting the apparent reasons and
the Resident Engineer is to assure the time delays. Letters should be sent on a bi-
Contractor’s timely performance of the work. weekly basis until the Contractor has regained
Verification of the work done for progress control of his schedule.
payments, anticipation of the Contractor’s
problems, and early corrective actions are all
significant responsibilities of the Resident
Engineer.
100-16
Figure 100.03
PROGRESS EVALUATION METHODS
The Contractor’s approved CPM will be annotated to show work

CPM Monitoring units or tasks completed or the portion completed expressed in units
of time. This graphic display is backed up with a computer analysis
and output to show the effect on the critical path and float time.
Work Units Accomplished The Contractor’s progress toward partial or substantial completion
of key work items, areas, or phases in comparison to schedule
milestones is monitored.
The rate of progress is initially established from the approved

Cash Flow schedule where work units or progress earnings are converted to
monthly billing projections that define an ‘S’ curve to show the rate
of actual versus expected progress on a cumulative basis.
/ The Contractor’s approved schedule will show the procurement

Equipment/Material Delivery schedule for the supply of critical materials. This is a key factor
and procurement delays are an early warning sign to project delays
as materials supplies are often on the critical path.
The Contractor is required to report the amount of labor and

Contractor’s Resources
equipment used on the project monthly, and this must be confirmed
by the Resident Engineer. Under-utilization, late mobilization, or
large fluctuations are indicative of potential problems in adhering to
the required progress schedule.
100-17
The Contractor’s proposed work program determined from the approved Program of
(schedule) will be reviewed and approved by the Works. This letter will be drafted by the Resident
Engineer in coordination with the Municipality. Engineer for transmittal to the Contractor.
During the course of the work, events may
transpire modifying activities shown on or The proper assessment of delay penalties will be
affecting the schedule. In this event, the Resident made by the Municipality based on progress
Engineer will take action to immediately have the reports initiated by the Resident Engineer. Such
Contractor revise and resubmit the schedule for assessment will not be made before the
approval. It is emphasized that maintaining a authorized Contract period expires.
current, valid schedule is vital to the control of
the work and progress. 101.07.06 BOQ Recapitulation
Monthly Progress Reports shall be submitted to The Resident Engineer must also be aware of the
the Municipality using the following format: quantities that are expected to be used in
construction of the project in accordance with the
MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORT plans and specifications. Frequently the BOQ
FORMAT quantities include a contingency allowance
beyond what is actually required. Conversely,
certain BOQ quantities may be less than actually
• Letter of Transmittal with brief summary, required.
highlights, time expended, and percentage
completed. In order to determine these variances, the
• Table of Statistics including Contract Resident Engineer’s staff should perform a BOQ
number, date of Contract award, date of recapitulation by taking off the required
notice to proceed, original Contract period, quantities directly from the construction plans or
approved time extensions, revised Contract approved shop drawings. This data should be
period, days elapsed, percentage of time compared to the BOQ quantities to establish the
elapsed, percentage of anticipated completion projected underruns and overruns. Recapitulation
(from progress schedule), percentage of actual quantities should be updated at least quarterly
completion (measured on the same basis as (four times a year) during the course of the
percentage of anticipated completion), Contract to reflect additional works and revised
Contract completion date, original Contract quantities. This information is vital to the
amount, approved Variation Orders, revised Resident Engineer in assessing progress,
Contract amount, and value of completed schedules, estimated final cost, and potential
work. quantity changes due to extra work, variation
• Narrative description of Construction orders, or field modifications. A Statement of
Activities. Overrun Quantities and a Statement of Underrun
• Narrative of the Engineer’s Activities. Quantities are included with the Interim Payment
• Pertinent Progress Photos. Certificates.
• General Location Map.
• Narrative report of Progress Problems, their 101.08 CONTROL OF MATERIAL
cause, and proposed solutions. An adequate and effective system for control of
• Safety Issues. materials used in the project is essential to ensure
• Progress Chart showing scheduled progress that the materials furnished and the final product
and actual progress. conform to the Contract requirements. Regular
inspections of field work by the Resident
101.07.05 Progress Letters and Delay Engineer are performed to:
Penalties
• Ensure compliance with Contract require-
The Contractor should be notified by letter when ments.
actual progress falls behind projected progress as
100-18
• Permit prompt appropriate corrective action, • SM-29 form duly completed with all
should unacceptable material or workmanship relevant details.
be detected.
• Material Approval forms duly completed
• Provide regular documentation of for use of the Department and the
construction progress or lack of progress. Consultant.
To ensure strict Contract compliance, it is • Sufficient samples for testing or

mandatory that all personnel charged with inspection.
inspection responsibilities properly prepare
themselves in advance through detailed study and • Current inspection report by an
understanding of the plans and specifications. acceptable Independent Laboratory
stating that the materials comply with
Personnel experienced in judging compliance the requirements of the Contract
with the plans and specifications will be charged Documents.
with the inspection of the work on site. The
2. Upon satisfaction with the Contractor’s
Resident Engineer will assign individuals based
submittal, the Consultant shall recommend
on their experience and may engage the use of
the Contractor’s submittal to the concerned
specialists on unusual items of work.
Agency for approval.
If the nature of field inspection work requires 3. Upon receipt of the Agency approval, the
technical knowledge on a short term basis and a Consultant shall recommend the above and
full-time field assignment is not justified, the other materials (not requiring an Agency
Resident Engineer will arrange for the temporary approval) for approval of the Department.
assignment of qualified personnel.
4. Upon receipt of the Department’s approval,
When material or workmanship does not comply the Consultant shall notify the Contractor of
with the plans and specifications, the Resident the basis for the approval.
Engineer must immediately notify the Contractor
in writing of each unsatisfactory condition. This 101.08.02 Testing Requests
notification must not direct stoppage of work,
but should indicate that the work will not be The recommended procedure for submitting
accepted if unsuitable material or workmanship samples for testing is as follows:
is not corrected. Any such quantities shall be
excluded from payment to the Contractor. 1. Any sample submitted to the laboratory shall
be accompanied by a Request for Testing
101.08.01 Approval of Materials document.
The following procedure should be followed for 2. A sample tag shall be attached to each
approval of materials to be incorporated in the sample.
Permanent Works.
3. All samples shall be entered into the Sample
1. The Contractor shall submit, for the Receipt and Testing Book with all relevant
approval of all concerned parties, a complete details.
description and details of the materials
together with the names of manufacturers/ 4. Concrete cubes shall be numbered
suppliers from whom he proposes to obtain consecutively and entered at the back of the
such items. In addition to the above, the Sample Receipt and Testing Book. The
Contractor’s submittal shall include the columns shall be revised to show 7-day and
following: 28-day testing dates and other appropriate
information.
100-19
5. The applicable standard should be referred workmanship, level, and any other requirements
to for the testing procedure. Copies of these of the Resident Engineer are fulfilled. Results are
standards and the actual testing procedure given on the individual test forms and on the
shall be supplied to each field laboratory and Daily Summary (SM-26) to enable work to
to the central laboratory. proceed. These forms are completed and signed
by the Soils and Materials Engineer on a weekly
6. The tests shall be carried out promptly based basis.
on priorities established by the Soils and
Materials Engineer. SM.24: (A) (C) & (G) - Asphalt, Concrete,
and Soils, Aggregates Testing Books
7. The test results shall be issued and signed by These books give in a condensed form the
the Soils and Materials Engineer. relevant results of tests carried out on the various
samples tested in the site laboratory.
8. Municipality Materials Engineer will review
test results. SM.25: Asphalt Core Testing
This form gives all the data related to the taking,
9. Finally the test results are forwarded to the
the thickness, and the relative density of asphalt
Resident Engineer with comments.
cores.
101.08.03 Quality Control Procedures
SM.26: Daily Summary of Laboratory Test
Results
Sampling and testing to ensure compliance with
The field laboratory technician completes this
the specifications is often a joint cooperative
form when all the results of the previous day’s
effort between the Department, Resident
testing are known and presents it to the Resident
Engineer, Contractor, Manufacturer or Supplier,
Engineer on a daily basis. The form contains
and the Materials Engineer. The Department or
condensed results of all tests carried out, with the
Resident Engineer can order additional testing as
type and location of such tests, and comments
felt necessary, at any time. General quality
where necessary.
control procedures are described for the basic
components used in local highway and bridge
SM.27: Materials Approval Book
construction.
Use of this book and completion of the relevant
entries ensures close control of the processing
101.08.04 Testing Records
and status of materials approvals.
Testing forms are used in the laboratory to
SM.28: Materials Record Book
calculate the results of the tests indicated on the
Use of this book ensures that site checks of
individual forms. Results, where specific, are
deliveries and storage of approved items are
normally given at the bottom of or on the
carried out and that cross reference is made to
extreme right hand side of the forms. A sample
the Materials Approval Book.
of the various testing forms in current use may
be obtained from the Municipality’s Central
SM.29: Materials Approval Submittal
Laboratory.
All materials to be incorporated into the
permanent works should be supported by
Relevant forms of specific use to the Resident
acceptable documentation and a recommendation
Engineer are as follows:
for approval from the Soils and Materials
Engineer. Final materials approval is the
SM.23: Request for Testing of Construction
responsibility of the Resident Engineer. Also,
The first part of this form is filled out by the
copies of all correspondence related to materials
Contractor on completion of a section of work
and materials approvals shall be sent to the Soils
considered ready for testing. Approval to carry
and Materials Engineer. To assist in ensuring
out such testing, as requested, is given by the
that materials submittals are supported by all the
Resident Engineer after checks for acceptable
pertinent correspondence, etc., Form SM-29,
100-20
Materials Approval Submittal, should be used. 101.09.03 Restoration of Surfaces Opened

The completed form is transmitted to the by Permit
Municipality for final review and approval by
the Department under cover of the Municipality No access to the right-of-way should be allowed
Approval of Materials Form. without permission. The permit will require
restoration of any disturbed areas to near original
This procedure ensures that the Central condition or will specify other treatment.
Laboratory has all the necessary correspondence Restoration of pits and other areas designated for
and documentation on file and that a uniformity use during the Contract will be done according to
of acceptable materials is achieved for all the specifications.
construction projects.
Areas not designated, but used in conjunction
101.09 LEGAL RELATIONS AND with the project, shall be restored to the
RESPONSIBILITY TO THE satisfaction of the Engineer regardless of
PUBLIC ownership. Final written acceptance of the area
by the owner should be obtained from the
101.09.01 Laws to be Observed
Contractor.
During construction, it is the responsibility of the
101.09.04 Greenery
Contractor to be fully informed of all
Government laws and directives that may affect
The preservation of existing greenery including
the conduct of the work. The Contractor is also
trees, shrubs, and flower beds is strictly
responsible for those who are engaged or
regulated by the Department. This includes
employed on the work. He shall operate within
green areas that are regularly maintained and
the limits of these laws and directives.
naturally occurring vegetation. The procedure
for obtaining approval for removal of greenery in
101.09.02 Permits
conflict with the works is described in Section
200. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to
The Contractor shall make arrangements and pay
preserve and protect existing greenery within the
any associated costs for use of borrow or
project limits and obtain specific approval for
aggregate pits unless they have been designated
removals.
for use by the Department. This includes
permits for access roads which he desires to use.
101.09.05 Environmental Protection
The Contractor shall also obtain approval of the
The Contractor is responsible for any action that
Department and other relevant Government
may have a harmful effect on the environment,
Agencies for the use of:
both within the project limits and any areas
outside the project limits that are affected by his
• Plant sites
operations. This includes, but is not limited to,
• Camp sites the following:
• Stockpile areas • Dust Control
• Staging areas • Dewatering Discharge
• Waste areas • Disposal of Waste Materials
• Borrow sites • Fuel Spillage
• Emission Controls
100-21
• Noise Abatement approved safety program should be strictly

implemented throughout the Contract period.
• Erosion Control
• Assure that the Contractor maintains
The Municipality Environmental Department adequate and safe access for local residents
will establish the conditions and requirements for and businesses. Try to minimize disturbance
permits and approvals. The Contractor is to residents by keeping the work area clean
responsible for obtaining all necessary permits and tidy. Do not allow the Contractor to
and approvals. operate at night or on public holidays where
noise is disturbing to residents. Encourage
101.09.06 Archaeological Features of Abu the Contractor to control dust and noise.
Dhabi
• Conduct a formal safety inspection at least
Recent years have seen an ever increasing once each week for each construction site. A
interest by private and public parties in the Safety Inspection Report will be included in
preservation and salvage of historic and the Resident Engineer’s diary. Instructions
prehistoric artifacts. The project personnel to the Contractor will be noted as well as
should be especially alert during early clearing action taken by the Contractor.
and stripping operations to detect any signs of
artifacts. • Maintain the appropriate reports and
records. Construction accidents involving
When archaeological sites are exposed, the the Contractor’s employees or the general
Contractor should be ordered to stop work in the public will be reported by the Contractor.
area until the proper authorities can be notified The Resident Engineer will obtain a copy of
and the site materials are preserved or salvaged. this report for the project file and for
Discovery of fossil remains of any kind should transmittal to the Municipality.
be treated in the same manner.
• Construction personnel engaged in the
control of traffic should be competent and
101.09.07 Public Convenience and Safety
courteous and should perform their jobs in a
manner that will reflect credit on the
Matters concerning roadway locations, limits of
Contractor and the Municipality. This is a
construction, construction, and maintenance of
sensitive problem area since the workers
the Municipality transportation system involve
employed as flagmen by the Contractor are
innumerable contacts with the public. If the
not fully trained or instructed in flagging or
public confidence in the Municipality is to be
public relations before their assignment.
maintained on a high plane, it is important that
all transportation personnel be courteous,
• The surface of the road or detour should be
patient, and attentive to reasonable requests and
maintained in such condition that motorists
inquires from the public. Transportation needs
can travel safely through or around the work
can be met when there is strong public sentiment
at speeds that are consistent with the
to promote the objectives of the Municipality,
conditions.
and good public relations go far in obtaining that
result. • The Resident Engineer should give attention
to the speed of the Contractor’s vehicles and
The following list of the responsibilities and the Municipality vehicles that are operating
tasks of the Resident Engineer or his appointed on the project. Poor public relations can
representative will aid in dealing with Public result when construction vehicles are
Convenience and Safety: permitted to travel on the project at speeds
greater than those posted and greater than
• The Resident Engineer should instruct the the speed limit that the motorists are required
Contractor to submit, for his approval, a to abide by.
safety program for the project. The
100-22
• Conduct periodic safety briefings for all field satisfied with the cleanup and restoration of his
personnel under his direction. The briefing property. Unless the owner specifically requests
will include discussions of accidents that otherwise, private property will be cleaned and
have occurred, safety considerations on restored in the same manner as government
proposed work for the immediate work property.
month, and the type of construction or the
use of special equipment. 101.10 MEETINGS
101.10.01 Regular Job Meetings
• Record, in his daily diary, the time of each
safety inspection, safety briefing, or other
For meetings arranged and conducted by the
safety-related activity and include a brief
construction supervision staff, an agenda will be
description of the event.
proposed and distributed before the date of the
• If agreeable with the Contractor, the meeting, when possible, to the named attendees.
Resident Engineer and Inspectors should In particular, prior notice for all meetings is to be
attend the Contractor’s safety meetings. given to the Department to enable the
Attendance is to observe the coverage of the Representative to attend.
meetings and communicate expectations
regarding future safety problems. A complete summary of conference notes of the
meeting must be recorded to avoid any
• The Resident Engineer will be authorized to misunderstanding regarding agreements and
suspend the work due to failure of the conclusions reached during the meeting. The
Contractor to correct conditions that are Resident Engineer in charge of the meeting will
unsafe for the workers or to the general appoint another staff member or record the notes
public. As a procedure, any work having himself and prepare the official meeting minutes
conditions that the Engineer finds unsafe for even though others may also be taking such
the workers or to the general public will be notes.
suspended immediately and continuously
until the unsafe conditions have been After the meeting minutes are prepared in final
corrected. form, copies will be transmitted to each person
attending the meeting. All meeting minutes are
In the event unsafe conditions are observed, these to be copied to the Department for information.
conditions should immediately be brought to the When necessary and appropriate, the recipient
attention of the responsible party. During the will be asked to acknowledge receipt of the
construction progress, the entire field staff must minutes.
be alert to ensure that the Contractor complies
with the Municipality safety requirements and all 101.10.02 Preconstruction Meeting
other applicable laws, codes, and ordinances.
Immediately after the Notice to Proceed is
101.09.08 Protection and Restoration of issued, the Consultant in cooperation with the
Property and Landscape Department Representative will arrange a
preconstruction meeting with the Contractor
Work outside the roadway limits of construction (including a responsible Officer and the Project
whether on public or private land that is related Manager) and the Resident Engineer. This
to the project must have the approval of the meeting is to discuss items of mutual interest
Engineer. concerning the start, operation, and completion
of Contract work.
The Contractor must furnish evidence at the
completion of the project that the owner is
100-23
101.10.03 Utilities Meetings

PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING AGENDA
The Resident Engineer will arrange a pre-
construction utility meeting between the
• Construction supervision personnel, Contractor and each of the various public
organization, responsibilities, and authority. agencies involved in the project. The intent of
• Contractor personnel and organization these meetings is to establish a spirit of
(including subcontractors). Authority of cooperation between all parties and to coordinate
Contractor’s representative on the work. activities and schedules.
• Contractor’s construction methods,
equipment, and manpower. During the meeting, the interested parties may be
• Contractor’s schedule and plan for work encouraged to contact each other directly for
unit accomplishment. day-by-day general planning and implementation.
• Coordination with utility departments, It is the Resident Engineer’s responsibility to
Agencies, and their Consultants. keep in regular contact with each of the
• Coordination of Contract work with concerned parties to be aware of progress and
adjacent projects. future plans. The meeting is to be documented
• Maintenance and staging of traffic. and minutes distributed to all concerned parties.
• Processing of Contractor’s shop and
working drawings. 101.10.04 Periodic Progress Review
• Processing of Material samples. Meetings
• Contractor’s Safety and Accident
Prevention Program (including emergency Proper understanding of the project status can
action). best be maintained by periodic progress review
• Insurance. meetings.
• Strict compliance with laws, codes, and
regulations of the Municipality. The importance of adequate and proper
• Extra work, time extensions, Change monitoring of the Contractor’s progress cannot
Orders, Variation Order procedures, and be over emphasized. The Contractor’s
lines of communication. performance on the project will normally have a
• Primary Survey Control and monument bearing in the disposition of claims. The
preservation. Resident Engineer will need to document the
• Materials Testing and Acceptance. performance of the Contractor by a monitoring
• Interim and final payment procedures program that periodically compares the
including monthly estimate cut-off dates, Contractor’s actual progress with his own
materials delivered but not yet incorporated approved current schedule.
into the work (Materials on-site),
breakdown of lump sum items, and the like. The Resident Engineer will establish the
requirements for regular Contractor job site
meetings. These meetings will be scheduled for a
A copy of the agenda will be provided to the time convenient to both the Resident Engineer
Contractor before the meeting. At that time, he and the Contractor.
will be requested to be prepared to furnish
contractual documents or specific information
for discussion at the meeting.
100-24
101.11 SURVEYS
PROGRESS REVIEW MEETINGS
The primary project horizontal and vertical
AGENDA
survey controls should be in place as shown on
the Contract drawings. All necessary auxiliary
A written agenda will be prepared for each
staking and field surveys and measurements to
meeting and sent to the Contractor in advance.
build the project will be performed by the
Its general format should allow for discussions
Contractor. The Resident Engineer will carry
on the following:
out a re-check on the primary controls and a
• Review of the Contractor’s progress
check of the supplementary surveys established
• Review of current problems by the Contractor.
• Review of past problems still unresolved
• Anticipated problems The job site control must be located to remain
undisturbed by construction. The Contractor is
The Resident Engineer will summarize the to be informed that the cost of replacing basic
discussions at the meeting, identifying controls that his forces may disturb will be at his
responsibility for follow-up action, and expense. The Contractor is also responsible for
undertake the following: maintenance of all basic and supplementary
control lines.
• Prepare handwritten Minutes of Meeting
indicating clearly who is responsible for The Resident Engineer will use survey personnel
appropriate action to be taken. for the following:
• Expedite resolution of problems according to • Re-establish primary project horizontal and

determination of action responsibility. vertical control.
• Confirm, by correspondence to the • Check the Contractor’s survey layout

Contractor, any significant statements, controls for line, grade, and dimensions to
understandings, or agreements reached as a ensure conformance with the plans and
result of the meeting. specifications.
• Establish such additional documentation, • Spot check the Contractor’s control points
including correspondence, as may be for detection of movement.
necessary to confirm appropriate or
significant information for the record. • Provide measurements as the basis for
payment of completed work. Partial
101.10.05 Safety Meeting payment for incomplete work does not justify
a survey for each payment, provided
The Resident Engineer or his representative will reasonable checks of quantities can be
meet the Contractor to discuss safety aspects on obtained by other means.
an as-needed basis, with regular formal meetings
held at least on a monthly basis to discuss all • Assist in quantity measurements as required.
instructions, actions, and general items. The
regular meeting is to be documented with copies It is the Contractor’s responsibility to build the
of the minutes distributed to attendees and the project as staked from basic controls. The
Department. Resident Engineer is not responsible for the
Contractor’s auxiliary staking or measurements.
However, if any error in such auxiliary surveying
is observed, detected, or suspected, the possible
error should promptly be brought to the
Contractor’s attention in writing.
100-25
101.12 SHOP DRAWINGS • Identification and signature of designer,

Shop drawings, as defined in the Contract draftsman, and checker;
Documents, shall include plans, details,
• Scale;
fabrication methods, erection layouts, setting
drawings, marking for erection, applied finishes, • Future Revisions section;
and sizes of all prefabricated members and
fittings to be constructed, erected, or installed as • Space for Engineer’s shop drawing
part of the permanent structure. Shop drawings review, receiving date, drawing log
also include manufacturer’s data for materials, number, and reviewer stamps.
equipment, and fixtures, including catalog sheets
showing dimensions, performance character- 2. Convey completed shop drawings to the
istics, and capacities, wiring and control Resident Engineer by letter on the
diagrams, schedules, and other pertinent required Contractor’s stationery or by the Contractor’s
information. This scope also includes the review shop drawing transmittal form. The
and approval process of the suppliers of such Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of all
manufactured materials, equipment, and fixtures. documents relating to suppliers or materials
and equipment, and/or manufacturer’s data
Method statements for specific operations may covering materials and/or equipment.
be required by the specifications and/or the
Engineer to fully describe the procedures and 3. All documents and shop drawings prepared
materials. These are to be submitted for review by the supplier, manufacturer, or
and approval along with the shop drawings and subcontractor shall be submitted under the
other supporting documents. Contractor’s name and shall be identified by
affixing the above noted title block
Contractor’s working drawings for temporary requirements. In cases where catalogs are
structures shall be processed in the same manner submitted, a schedule of items proposed shall
specified herein for shop drawings. be attached as well.
The Contractor shall: 4. Shop drawing and document submittals

containing deviations from the specifications
1. Supply one (1) sepia transparency and two and drawings shall be tabulated on or
(2) prints of each shop drawing to the attached to the transmittal letter. Shop
Resident Engineer. The drawings shall be drawings and documents shall be submitted to
the same size (overall and the area within the the Resident Engineer well in advance of the
borders) as the standard Contract drawings. scheduled manufacture or construction date.
The drawing title block shall contain the
following: The Resident Engineer shall:
• Abu Dhabi Municipality and Town 1. Receive shop drawings, transmittals, catalog
Planning Department, United Arab data, manufacturer’s data, etc.
Emirates;
2. Date stamp and affix a project shop drawing
• Consultant’s name;
number to each sheet. The format of the
• Contractor’s name; project shop drawing number shall be X-
YYYY. X shall be the contract number.
• Contract designated name and number; YYYY shall be sequential numbers starting
with 0001 for each Contract.
• Contractor’s drawing title, number, and
date; 3. Enter all pertinent data into a log book,
including the project shop drawing numbers.
100-26
4. Assign drawings to appropriate reviewers,

making two (2) additional prints per 7. If a submission is comprised of catalog or
reviewer and entering all pertinent data in log manufacturer’s data, the Resident Engineer
book. When submission by the Contractor shall reconcile the reviewer’s comments, then
involves manufactured materials and/or include them in a letter to the Contractor,
equipment to be incorporated into the Works, affixing stamps to the catalog, etc., as
the Soils and Materials Engineer shall be appropriate.
consulted to determine testing requirements
to verify conformance with the specification. 8. Maintain a file copy of every drawing or
document processed.
5. Receive reviewed drawings, or catalog data,
etc., with checker’s comments, entering data Note: When the drawing or document is
in the log book. approved, the approval stamp shall be placed on
the sepia, and only the sepia is to be returned to
6. Consolidate all comments received from the Contractor. The Contractor, in turn, returns
various disciplines into one set of comments four (4) prints of the approved shop drawing for
reconciling any discrepancies or contra- the Resident Engineer’s use. When the drawing
dictions through discussions with the is returned to the Contractor without approval,
reviewer. Mark two (2) prints. Affix the appropriate stamp shall be placed on one
appropriate stamps, enter the approval status print only. The sepia is returned without a
in the log, forward one (1) copy to the stamp.
Contractor and one (1) to the appropriate
file.
The stamp to be used will indicate the following disposition:

STAMP SPECIMENS
Project Name Shop Drawing No.

Contract No. Contractor
APPROVED APPROVED AS NOTED
As to general detail and arangement only. This approval does not relieve
the Contractor of responsibility for conformity to specifications and
correct details and fit of parts after assembly.
(CONSULTANT)
Date: By:
100-27
Project Name Shop Drawing No.

Contract No. Contractor
NOT APPROVED ITEM INCORRECT

COMMENTS NOTED DO NOT RESUBMIT
REVISE AND RESUBMIT SUBMIT SPECIFIED ITEM
(CONSULTANT)
Date: By:
101.13 UTILITIES Manual Excavation Manual excavation at

the approved trench locations is initiated by
Nearly all construction projects are affected by
the Contractor in coordination with the
utilities including the preservation of existing
various utility owners. Data information
utilities and/or installation of new or relocated
sheets are prepared for each trench that
utility services. Existing utility locations shown
indicate the location of each utility by station
on the project plans are approximate only. The
and offset from the appropriate survey
exact location of existing utilities is determined
control line. Utility type, diameter, pipe
as follows:
material, and elevation are determined for
each utility. The inspector should ensure
Record Drawings The Contractor is
that the information is complete for each
responsible for obtaining all available as-
trench. He should direct modifications to the
built or record drawings of existing utilities
trench alignment, depth, or length as
within the project limits from the appropriate
necessary to suit field conditions. Additional
government departments, utility agencies,
trenches may be authorized to provide
and designated utility consultants. The
enough data to accurately plot the existing
Contractor should also request assistance in
utilities on drawings.
the field location of the services and discuss
issues relating to safety, protection, and
The Contractor is responsible for the
condition of the facilities.
protection and safety of existing utilities
throughout the project. The requirements for
Shop Drawings The Contractor will prepare
protection, relocation, and new services will
shop drawings showing the existing utility
be determined in coordination with the
locations relative to the proposed works. The
various utility departments using the
first step in this procedure is to develop a
completed existing utility shop drawings
grid or network of proposed hand excavation
developed from the hand excavation as the
trenches as necessary to uncover all existing
basis for decision making.
utilities shown on the record drawings. The
grid will be submitted to the Resident
Engineer for approval.
100-28
Service Reservations The Contract the reservations shown on the Contract

Drawings include identification of Service Drawings is often necessary to effectively
Reservations for accommodation of existing accommodate all service facilities. Revisions
and proposed utilities. The Contractor will must be approved by the Town Planning
prepare Service Reservation Shop Drawings Department and then copies of the approved
following an assessment of the existing shop drawings are distributed to all
utility locations, relocation requirements, and concerned Departments, Utility Agencies,
layout of proposed utilities. Modification to and their Consultants.
UTILITY DUCT CONSTRUCTION
100-29
SECTION 200
EARTHWORK PRELIMINARY FIELD INSPECTION
CHECKLIST
201 GENERAL
The Resident Engineer and his assistants should 9 Identifying individual trees, bushes, shrubs, and
be thoroughly familiar with the plans and plantings for green area removal.
specifications, the site conditions, obstructions, 9 Clearing indicated by plans and clearing
and maintenance of traffic requirements before actually needed
9 Typical sections shown by plans
the Contractor begins the grading operations.
Upon issuance of the Notice-To-Proceed to the
9 Existing soils, major excavations, and
embankments
Contractor, the Resident Engineer and
Department Representative will make a plans-in-
9 Utilities, fences, or other obstructions to be
moved or protected
hand inspection of the project. The Resident 9 Plot lines
Engineer should prepare meeting minutes of the 9 Building construction activities
walk through noting observations and indicating 9 Survey monuments, evidence of archaeological
appropriate action items (See Preliminary Field sites, or other physical features to be protected,
Inspection Checklist). The inspection should preserved, relocated, etc.
note in particular any site obstructions, including 9 Borrow sources and haul roads
greenery, buildings, or other contractors working 9 Unusual soil or moisture conditions such as high
ground water
in the area.
9 Handling of traffic through or around the work
Before the start of any grading operations, the
9 Changed conditions differing from the Contract
Drawings
Resident Engineer should inspect the drainage of 9 Structures to be demolished.
lands next to the roadway. This inspection is to
ensure that all drainage structures, inlets, outlets,
cross culverts, and curbs are properly located. disposed of, be allowed on the site. The materials
In addition, the Resident Engineer should are to be immediately removed as part of the
investigate the need for any additional drainage demolition process and hauled to an approved
or protective facilities. disposal site.
During the course of grading and draining, he Removal limits should be clearly marked prior to
should make certain that the sequence of commencing work. Sawcuts shall be made where
operations is such that damage to any work will the existing pavement or sidewalk is to be joined
be kept to a minimum in the event of heavy rains. with the new work. The Contractor is responsible
for the preservation of areas to remain at the
202 CLEARING AND GRUBBING limits of work and no payment will be made for
restoration or repair of damaged areas beyond
202.01 EXISTING PAVEMENT, CURBS, the established limits. Removal operations should
AND SIDEWALK REMOVAL be conducted in a neat, workman like manner.
Traffic control provisions including pedestrians
This operation is normally the first phase of should be in place prior to commencing work.
construction. The removal of existing pavement
and curbs often requires the use of special 202.02 PRESERVATION OF TREES AND
equipment, such as hydraulic hammers, to break GREENERY
up the materials to facilitate loading and
disposal. This material is generally unsuitable for Trees, shrubs, and planted areas within the
use and the requirements for such disposal are project limits that do not interfere with the
included in the Standard Specifications. In no planned improvements must be left in place
case will the stockpiling of the material, to be undamaged. Precautions must be taken to protect
200-1
these areas from damage during the clearing and

other construction operations. Clearly marking GREEN AREA REMOVAL
these trees will help preserve them. It may be
necessary to remove low-hanging and unsound or
unsightly limbs from trees to remain. This must The Agriculture Section of the Municipality has
be done in a manner that will not damage the jurisdiction over all existing and proposed green
remainder of the tree. Branches of trees areas. Normally, plantings within existing green
extending over the roadbed should be trimmed to areas requiring removal will be removed and
give a clear height of six meters above the salvaged by the Agriculture Section at their
roadbed surface. All trimming should be done by discretion. Otherwise, it is the Contractor’s
skilled workers using approved equipment and obligation to perform the work. Prior to
methods. commencing any work, close coordination is
necessary between the Resident Engineer,
202.03 CLEARING AND GRUBBING Contractor, and Agriculture Section to establish
OPERATIONS the clearing limits, timings, and responsibilities
for performance of the work. This coordination
should be undertaken well in advance of the
Trees, stumps, and large roots should be
planned operations according to the approved
removed from excavation areas for the proposed
schedule. The Contractor is obligated to
works to a depth that will satisfy the
preserve existing green areas until the sequence
specifications. Green area removals come under
of his operations actually require removal of the
the jurisdiction of the Agriculture Section of the
plant material.
Municipality and their cooperation and approval
must be obtained (See Green Area Removal).
The Contractor is also responsible to see that
Removals should be deep enough (usually at public roads and streets used for hauling away
least 1 meter below subgrade) to prevent the material are kept clean. Any material spilled
objectionable material from becoming mixed must be swept up and taken away. All hauling
with the embankment materials. Areas to be must be done so that no danger to traffic results
excavated will normally require scalping to from unsafe or unsecured loads. Dust control
remove small bushes, rubbish, vegetation, and measures should be implemented if the hauling
other objectionable material. presents a safety hazard or public nuisance.
All holes, ruts, and disturbances remaining after 203 REMOVAL OF BUILDINGS AND
clearing and grubbing should be backfilled and OBSTRUCTIONS
compacted as directed by the Resident Engineer
in accordance with the specifications. The Buildings, foundations, structures, fences,
cleared areas may also require grading to allow abandoned pipelines, and other obstructions that
drainage prior to performing subsequent are within the limits of construction and are
operations. designated not to remain will be removed and
disposed of according to the specifications.
The specifications provide that all debris from Generally, the Contractor needs to remove all
the clearing and grubbing operations should be interfering structures from the project site
removed from the project. It is the Contractor’s leaving a clear area for construction that does not
responsibility to locate a disposal site and obtain impact the long term stability of the project.
the necessary permission from the owner of the
land on which the disposal is made. In removal of buildings, unexpected material,
utility connections, or other hazardous conditions
may exist that require special care in its safe
removal. These items should be investigated
200-2
before, during, and after the walk through with have a thorough knowledge of the Contractor’s
the contractor. Development of specific operations. He must be aware of problem areas
procedures for the Contractor to handle which may arise during the excavation operation
unexpected conditions should be given and should have discussed contingency plans for
consideration prior to beginning demolition of resolving the problem.
any structure.
204.01 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION
Foundations will normally be removed to a
designated depth and basement floors will be
The Standard Specifications define the
removed to clear critical project elements. The
excavation requirements within the roadway
remaining portions shall be broken to provide for
prism. It includes all materials encountered
the drainage of water. When backfilled, all voids
regardless of their nature or the manner in which
are to be filled and compacted to provide a firm
they must be removed. The materials may be
base for construction of the project works.
soft, hard, silt, sand, wet or dry and are all
measured and paid for in the same way.
When indicated in the plans or identified by the
Unclassified excavation even includes curbs,
Municipality to be salvaged, material or
sidewalk, asphalt, and rock excavation unless
salvageable items should be removed, stored, and
there is a special item for rock in the Contract.
transported to a previously identified location
without unnecessary damage. The agency that
The Contractor is responsible for removing the
wants the salvaged material must identify the
material using equipment that suits the type of
location where the material is to be transported
soil, distance to be hauled, and the volume
and when that location is available to accept the
involved. The excavation will be marked with
salvaged material. This information is needed
slope stakes in the same manner as for
prior to beginning the demolition process so the
embankments. The Inspector must check the
Contractor can arrange his work around those
levels and slopes periodically as the work
constraints.
progresses. The slopes should be dressed as the
cut area comes down.
Documentation of items removed is sometimes
overlooked. All items listed in the plans and
The Contractor may choose to add water to the
special provisions or encountered during the life
soil in the cut area before hauling. This is an
of the Contract should be documented to show
acceptable practice and is usually left to the
what was removed and when the removal was
Contractor’s option.
accomplished. Obstructions that have specific
pay items for removal shall be carefully
If unstable soils or pockets of rubbish or other
measured prior to the removal. In any case, a
unsuitable materials are met with at subgrade
record of the number of men in the crew, the
level, the Resident Engineer will instruct the
equipment used, and the time required to remove
Contractor to remove this from the project. This
each obstruction should be recorded by the
material will be paid for separately, so it is
inspector.
important that accurate measurements are taken.
204 EXCAVATION Material excavated from the roadway that is
Excavation involves the loosening, digging, identified as unclassified material may be used
loading, hauling, and disposal of the earth for embankment construction provided that it
materials in roadway cut sections. This process meets the specification for borrow material - load
is done as specifically described in the bearing. It must have the required California
specifications and job provisions. Before Bearing Ratio (CBR) value, or better. If the
beginning this operation, the Resident Engineer material does not achieve the required CBR, it is
and the Project Manager shall have discussed the to be hauled away from the project and disposed
removal and disposition of material excavated of.
from specific areas. The Resident Engineer must
200-3
Unclassified excavation is paid for by the cubic Undercutting below subgrade elevation may be
meter measured by cross-sections taken before ordered by the Resident Engineer to correct an
and after in the excavation area. This work is unstable condition, divert water, or to provide a
performed by the Surveyors and the Inspector more gradual change from cut to fill at grade
should be alert to see that no excavation is points. Any undercutting that has been
performed until the cross-sections are taken. authorized by the Resident Engineer should be
measured for payment as roadway excavation.
204.02 EXCESSIVE UNDERCUTTING An exception would be for extenuating
conditions that would warrant performance of
the work as extra or day works. The extenuating
If at anytime, the Contractor excavates outside
purposes should be based on conditions that have
the construction limits or below subgrade
changed or could not have been reasonably
elevation, except as required by the plans, or if
expected by the Contractor. This extra work
he gouges or undercuts the slopes, the Resident
needs prior approval by the Department.
Engineer shall immediately notify the Contractor,
in writing, that the specifications do not permit
Before the work is accepted, the roadway section
payment for such material. When the Contractor
affected by such undercutting shall be true to the
excavates below subgrade, except as required by
grade and section shown on the plans.
the plans or as directed by the Resident Engineer,
he will replace the over-excavated materials with
a material of equal or better quality and compact
it to the required density at his expense.
UNDERCUTTING
200-4
204.03 CUT SECTIONS Samples of existing material will reveal any

areas that do not satisfy construction
requirements.
In cut sections, cut ditches shall be constructed
to such grade that there will be no pooling of
204.05 SURPLUS MATERIAL
water. The outlet ends of these ditches should be
constructed so that the water will be discharged
onto natural ground and not against the With written approval of the Resident Engineer,
embankment slope. Excavations for roadways or acceptable surplus material may be used in
a structure subgrade or foundations should be widening fills, constructing berms, emergency
done in the dry and in such a manner that turnouts, dikes, etc. In the event a large amount
disturbance of the existing soil is not made below of waste appears to be developing, the
subgrade level. This extra work would normally Municipality should be notified at the earliest
be done at the Contractor’s expense. possible time. This is important so that
necessary steps may be taken for proper disposal
Cut ditch sections are staked and excavated in of the surplus material. Unsightly waste piles of
conjunction with the roadway excavation. surplus material will not be allowed.
204.04 CUT SLOPES The contractor shall not place any material to be
wasted without the permission and approval of
the Resident Engineer. Useable surplus material
The Contractor’s selection of equipment for
shall not be wasted when borrow material is
finishing slopes is based upon steepness, access,
being used on the site.
and type of material.
Rounding of slopes at the top and ends of cut 205 EMBANKMENTS

sections is normally done as the excavation 205.01 BORROW MATERIAL
progresses because of more ready access to these
areas. Slopes should also be trimmed and 205.01.01 Borrow Material - Load Bearing
shaped as much as possible during the progress
of the excavation operation. When there is insufficient unclassified
excavation to satisfy filling needs, or when the
Areas where slope rounding is not required are unclassified excavation material does not meet
usually indicated on the plans or described in the the CBR specification, the deficiency in filling
specifications. demand must be made up by using material taken
from somewhere outside of the roadway.
Unsuitable materials are defined as those that are
of such composition that they might adversely Borrow sites must be approved by the
affect the stability of the roadbed. Any soils Municipality. Borrow material is inspected,
which may cause instability of the subgrade or tested, and approved by the Resident Engineer in
embankment, or which may have some other conjunction with the Materials Engineer.
detrimental effect, should not be used unless Acceptable test material is to be submitted to the
adequately treated to make them satisfactory. If Department for formal approval. If approved,
unsuitable materials are encountered, they should the material is excavated, hauled, and placed in
be removed and replaced with acceptable the embankment the same way unclassified
material as described in the specifications. excavation is. The material must be inspected as
Unsuitable material may be processed or placed it arrives at the filling site to ensure that it is
in a manner that will make the material clean and free of debris or rubbish.
acceptable when approved in writing by the
Resident Engineer. Borrow material is paid for by the cubic meter in
place and measured from cross sections of the
filling area taken before the work begins.
200-5
205.01.02 Borrow Material - Non-Load 205.02 PLACEMENT OF BORROW

Bearing MATERIAL
This material, known as “sweet sand”, is used in

The specifications set forth the policies and the
all areas that are to be landscaped or planted
requirements of the Municipality with respect to
with greenery. This includes service reservations,
the placement of borrow materials.
medians, and raised traffic islands.
The Contractor should not begin the delivery and
Sweet sand is taken from sites approved by the
placement of borrow until all roadway
Agriculture Section. It will be tested first in the
excavation, and excavation, installation, and
laboratory to ensure that it is free of salts and
backfill to the foundation level for all surface
suitable for agricultural use. When delivered on
drainage and utility work has been completed,
the site, it must be clean and free of trash, roots,
unless otherwise authorized by the Resident
stones, bush, and noxious weeds.
Engineer.
There is no CBR requirement for non-load
The importance of proper embankment
bearing borrow material. It is generally placed
construction cannot be overemphasized. The key
in a depth of 30 to 40 centimeters in the areas to
components of sound embankment construction
be landscaped. There is no compaction
are as follows:
requirement and the material may be placed
loosely.
• Strength of material (CBR value)
• Uniformity of material
Sweet sand is paid for by the cubic meter and is
measured in its final place in the landscaped • Layer thickness
area. • Moisture content
• Drainage
• Compactive effort
PLACING BORROW MATERIAL
200-6
The amount of inspection needed to secure approximately parallel to the finished grade. As
proper construction will depend primarily on the the earth materials are being dumped and spread,
size of the project, the nature of the soils, the rate large roots and other perishable materials must
at which material is being placed, and the be removed and disposed of outside the limits of
governing specifications. However, compaction the work. Good drainage and/or dewatering
tests in each layer should be taken at a frequency must be maintained throughout the construction
to ensure proper compaction density is being operation. Frequent checks should be made to
achieved. see that the work conforms to the proper cross
section, all drainage or dewatering facilities are
205.02.01 Uniformity of Material operating, and that the embankment site is in the
best condition possible to protect against erosion
The proper blending of materials is very essential from runoff or working in a wet condition.
in obtaining proper embankment consolidation.
The use of graders, or similar equipment, The selection of the equipment used to haul the
ordinarily will accomplish the desired result in embankment materials is usually the
most soils. When it is necessary to place unlike Contractor’s option. The Contractor should not
materials in the same embankment layer, care be allowed to operate the equipment in such a
should be taken to use equipment and methods manner that it will be harmful to any section of
that will provide a satisfactory blend of these the completed roadway. The soil may be spread
materials. The result of the blending should be a with the hauling equipment or with blade
mixture that can be uniformly compacted after graders, bulldozers, or other acceptable
moisture has been applied using a uniform rate equipment.
of application. When feasible, poorer materials
should be used in the lower portion of the 205.02.03 Layer Thickness
embankment. Standard proctor compaction
molds should be made of each material type Good compaction is ordinarily obtained when
blend, for comparison of ideal moisture content earth embankment layers are relatively thin.
vs. compaction density to actual soil density tests Unless otherwise specified, experience indicates
taken during the installation of the compacted that the required density can easily be obtained
layers. by constructing layers 15 to 20 centimeters or
less in loose depth.
205.02.02 Hauling, Spreading, and Shaping
205.02.04 Moisture Content
Before beginning the construction of an
embankment, the location of the construction The success of compaction operations is
should be clearly outlined by construction stakes. dependent to a large extent on proper moisture
Any staking that is done by the Contractor control. If the proper amount of moisture is
should be checked by the Resident Engineer. uniformly distributed throughout the
Stakes that are disturbed or destroyed should be embankment layer, rarely will there be any
reset immediately. The use of this system of difficulty in obtaining satisfactory compaction,
checks will avoid errors discovered in provided the thickness of the layer does not
embankment slopes or widths after construction exceed the capabilities of the equipment being
of the embankment has advanced to the point used. The common tendency to construct earth
where corrective measures are difficult and embankments at moisture contents on the dry
costly. side of optimum makes the task of securing
uniform moisture distribution and satisfactory
Washes, holes, and other low areas in the compaction more difficult. Usually it is better to
embankment foundation should be filled and begin compaction with the moisture content
compacted before beginning the construction of slightly high. In humid areas it may be better to
the first lift of embankment. The first lift should begin with the moisture content at optimum.
begin in the low areas with the intent of
eventually providing an embankment layer
200-7
The mixing and blending of soils and water obtained. This moisture range is indicated by the
should be thorough. Lumps must be broken moisture-density curve.
down to ensure a uniformly moist condition.
When adding water to a layer of material, care Good compaction depends on the moisture
must be taken to avoid overlapping or gapping content of the materials being compacted. Too
between successive passes of the water wet or too dry a material will not compact as
distribution equipment. Wet or dry streaks are required no matter how many passes are made
undesirable and should be avoided. The with the roller. In this event, the Inspector
equipment operator should be instructed to begin should advise the Contractor so that he might
applying water on one side of the embankment take the appropriate action. Succeeding lifts
and work progressively across the fill to the other should not be placed until the moisture-density
side to avoid having wet or dry streaks in the requirement is met. If the embankment is wet,
center of the embankment. The importance of discing and/or drying is necessary before
making several light applications rather than one compacting. The Contractor is required to aerate
heavy application of water should be the material or distribute and incorporate water
emphasized. It is desirable to have the moisture uniformly as necessary to control the moisture
pre-mixed prior to placing and compacting the content. Where the moisture is within limits, but
material in the final course or layer density is not, additional compaction is required.
205.02.05 Drainage Before compacting, samples from the loose

borrow material layer will be taken and tested
Proper drainage should be maintained during according to laboratory testing procedures to
embankment construction. This will help to establish the natural moisture content. Field
obtain a stable roadbed and to minimize delays in testing using a device such as the “Speedy
construction. Typical problem areas that the Moisture Device” may be used for guidance
Inspector should watch for during construction only. Should the moisture content be more than
are as follows. the specified optimum content, the area of the
subgrade represented by this sample shall be
• Large puddles of water standing on the scarified, aerated, and re-tested. Once the
embankment after a heavy rain. As moisture content is within -2 and +4 percent of
embankment construction progresses, a the specified optimum moisture content, then the
crown should be maintained to minimize fill can be primarily leveled to begin the fill
ponding. compaction.
• Water should not pond in the ditches. Once the material has been moisture-conditioned,
Ditches and channels must be constructed the fill layer is graded and leveled uniformly
and maintained in such a manner as to avoid using a motor grader. The grader operator is
damage to the roadway. assisted by a grade checker who communicates
the overfill or deficit areas from the survey grade
• Eroded areas due to storm water runoff stakes to the operator as the work progresses.
should be recompacted to match adjacent Once the layer has been placed satisfactorily the
levels prior to resumption of compacting the rolling operation proceeds.
next layer.
A steel-wheeled vibratory roller will provide the
205.02.06 Compaction required compactive effort in most low plasticity
soils with a minimum number of passes. In
As required by the specifications, each layer higher plasticity soils, a sheeps foot roller may
must be compacted to a density not less than 95 also be used to compact the material. The
percent of the relative maximum density. When selection of equipment is the Contractor’s
95 percent maximum density is required, the prerogative and he will normally use equipment
moisture content of the material must be within that achieves the required compaction
the range of values at which this density can be consistently and with the fewest number of
200-8
passes. Rolling should commence at the outside 206.02 EXCAVATIONS

edge of the embankment and work to the inside
or high side of the embankment overlapping each
In excavated areas, the existing material that is
pass by approximately 1/2 to 1/3 of the roller
exposed at the subgrade level must be tested for
width. A grader normally follows the roller
CBR. If the CBR of the material is not less than
patrolling the roadbed to provide a reasonably
10, it is acceptable and the subgrade can be
level surface to promote uniformity of the
prepared. If the CBR of the material is less than
compactive effort.
10, it will be classified as unsuitable. The
Contractor must then excavate below the
206 SUBGRADE PREPARATION subgrade level and replace this material with
206.01 EMBANKMENTS suitable borrow material according to the
specifications. Subgrade preparation will then
proceed as described in Section 205.02,
Subgrade preparation consists of a fine-tuning of
Placement of Borrow Material.
the final layer placed for the embankment section
to specified subgrade elevation within the
The Contractor will be paid for removing the
allowable tolerance.
extra material as unsuitable excavation and for
replacing it with borrow material. Careful
Immediately prior to placement of upper borrow
measurements and records must be kept of this
materials or subbase layers, the subgrade is
work for payment purposes.
sprinkled with additional water to achieve
optimum moisture content, rolled with a steel
Usually, where existing materials meet the
roller or a pneumatic tire compactor (a
minimum CBR requirements, the material is
pneumatic tire compactor will usually produce a
excavated to subgrade level with minimum
better surface), and tested for compaction
disturbance to the underlying foundational
density. If the required density is not achieved or
material.
the subgrade has been unduly disturbed, then the
following steps must be taken:
206.03 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS
• Scarifying: Depending on the depth of the
deficiency in the subgrade material, either After grading the roadway to formation level, the
the top 15 centimeters of subgrade material Contractor must compact the soil to the density
should be scarified to allow moisture required by the specifications.
conditions to achieve moisture uniformity, or
the top 30 centimeters of subgrade material 206.04 LEVELING
should be removed, remixed to achieve
proper moisture content, and recompacted in It is important that the subgrade elevations be
two 15 centimeter thick layers to the attained as nearly as possible to the planned level
specified density. because all subsequent base and pavement
materials are measured and paid on the basis of
• Moisture Conditioning: Additional water is square meters of specified thickness.
usually required to bring the existing
material up to optimum moisture content The specifications allow the Contractor certain
prior to compaction. This should be tolerances above or below the planned level. The
accomplished as the material is scarified and upper tolerance must be strictly adhered to and if
mixed by the grader. exceeded, the subgrade must be re-graded until it
meets the required tolerance. A larger than
• Reshaping: the prepared subgrade is bladed specified tolerance below the specified level can
to conform to the required cross-section. be accepted since the difference will
subsequently be made up by placing more
stronger material at the Contractor’s expense.
200-9
When finished, the subgrade will be smooth and • A complete record of all the density tests
level in all directions and properly compacted. made to determine the acceptability of
The Resident Engineer will inspect the subgrade embankment, with remarks which explain the
and give the final approval for placing the corrective action taken at locations where
pavement materials on it. The Contractor is failing test results were obtained and reasons
responsible for ensuring that the subgrade will be for not making the required tests at other
protected from traffic damage and moisture loss locations.
until the paving operation starts.
• Complete records of manpower and
207 RECORDS equipment usage needed for analysis of any
time or cost claims. This is important in
The Resident Engineer will ensure that a daily determining the amount of delay should the
record of events on the project is maintained. The Contractor be delayed for any reason.
Inspector’s diary should include the following:
208 MEASUREMENT AND
• The limits of the work accomplished for the
PAYMENT
day.
Project records must be kept by the Resident
• A complete record of equipment, labor, and Engineer in such a manner that all partial
materials used in any operation that is, or progress and final payments can be easily and
may later be determined to be, extra work. clearly supported by recorded data. This data
should include when the work was completed,
• The number and classifications of labor measurements and calculations to support the
used. quantities, and should be initialed or signed as
required by the persons who made the
• Discussions of project prosecution with the calculations and measurements. A continuous
Contractor’s representative that are of an record should be kept via immediately recording
unusual nature. If a discussion of a problem the completion of the work by the appropriate
leads to specific recommendations or BOQ unit such as each, square meter, etc.
instructions being given the Contractor,
record it. The quantities involved in the earthwork shall be
measured and paid for according to the Standard
• Weather conditions and their effect on
Specifications.
quality and workability of earthwork
materials.
Figure 200.01 identifies what documentation is
• Damage to private property or utilities required to support the earthworks operations for
caused by the Contractor’s equipment during measurement and payment and the individuals
the operation should be noted and the action with primary and secondary responsibility to
taken recorded. record it.
• The final disposition of salvageable Interim payments for lump sum items should be
materials should be noted. based on rational methods, such as for building
demolition, where payment could be based on
• Measurements and notes made to actual volume of buildings demolished (floor
substantiate the classification and quantity of area x height) prorated to the total volume to be
the various materials encountered in the demolished.
excavation.
• Measurements of excavation, below the

planned grade, necessary for the removal of
unstable or other undesirable material.
200-10
Figure 200.01
RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX
Responsibility
Materials Technician
Resident Engineer
Quantity Surveyor
Municipality
Contractor
BOQ Unit
Inspector
Surveyor
Item Description Required Documentation
Existing Pavement/ NSP * Site Measurements z
Sidewalk Removal * Quantity Calculations z
Green Area Removal NSP * Municipality Approval z
* Field Notes/Diary z
* Flagging/Staking z
Clearing & Grubbing NSP * Field Notes/Diary z
Buildings & Demolition LS * Field Notes/Diary z
Removal of Obstructions CM * Field Notes/Diary z z
* Existing Condition Measurements z
* Quantity Calculations z z
Unclassified Excavation CM * Existing Condition X-Sections z
* Finished Grade X-Sections z
* Quantity Calculations z
Borrow Material CM * Source Approval z z
* Existing Condition X-Sections z
* Finished Grade X-Sections z
* Quantity Calculations z
Unsuitable Material CM * Diary z
* Removal Measurements z z
* Borrow Material Calculations z
Borrow Placement NSP * Moisture Content z
* Compaction z
* Grading/Placing; Layers, z
Drainage, Uniformity
Subgrade Preparation NSP * Finish Grade Levels z
* CBR Tests- Existing z
* Scarifying z
* Moisture Content z
* Compaction z
* Grading/Placing z
z - Primary Responsibility
- Secondary Responsibility
NSP - No Separate Payment
200-11
SECTION 300 302.02 MATERIALS

AGGREGATE SUBBASE AND
BASE COURSES Typical materials used to construct base courses
are sand, gravel, crushed stone, or a combination
301 GENERAL of these or other readily available granular-type
materials. The Standard Specifications include
Pavement is only as good as its underlying three acceptable types of aggregate subbase and
components. The performance and durability of base courses; Types A, B, and C, with type B
the pavement depends on the ability of each being the most common. The difference between
component to distribute the traffic loads evenly these types of base and subbase courses is
without deformation. The thickness and basically the combined gradation characteristics
composition of the structural pavement section is including fine and coarse aggregates. The final
determined by the soil supporting capabilities, material is based on an approved mix design that
the expected traffic volumes including the usually is well graded, having workability
percentage of truck traffic, the design life of the characteristics that allow for good compaction to
pavement structure, and material economics. support the asphalt equipment working on top of
Generally, the cost and quality of the structural it without deformation or disturbance.
section materials increases with each layer above
subgrade level. The gradation requirements are outlined in the
Standard Specifications, Section III-2,
Subbase and base courses consist of graded Subsection 302.05. The Contractor must supply
granular or aggregated materials that are often samples and test results to the Engineer for
mixed with bitumen to form a strong, durable approval before furnishing and placing any
foundation for the final wearing course. There materials. Aggregate samples will be tested for:
are two types of subbase and one type of base
material normally used for roadway construction • Gradation
within the Municipality:
• Index tests (liquid and plastic limits and
• Aggregate subbase plasticity index)
• Sand-Asphalt subbase • Compaction tests
• Asphalt concrete base • CBR tests
Asphaltic base courses are discussed in Section • Los Angeles abrasion tests
400.
• Sulfate and chloride content
302 AGGREGATE SUBBASE
• Sand equivalent test
COURSES
302.01 DESCRIPTION The Inspector must be assured that all
preliminary tests have been made and that the
proposed material is acceptable when placed.
The aggregate subbase course is placed
Frequent discussions with the Resident Engineer
immediately above a prepared subgrade. This
will no doubt be necessary, particularly when
course usually consists of granular materials
base operations are first started. This is a
such as crushed stone, crushed or uncrushed
crucial period since many trials are sometimes
gravel, and sand that has been obtained from a
necessary before the Contractor can produce
source that has been approved by the Engineer.
consistently acceptable aggregate. Regardless of
the difficulties encountered, no base should be
Aggregate subbase is usually specified where a
accepted which does not meet the requirements.
free-draining material is desirable.
If substandard material is inadvertently placed it
300-1
should be removed and replaced. The Contractor An Inspector shall be present at all times when
should not be allowed to haul substandard material is being deposited on the road to see that
material onto the work site. proper spacing of loads is maintained.
Contractor’s personnel shall see that loads are
302.03 TESTING dumped uniformly and in the proper location and
amount to conform to the required cross-section
after compaction. The loose material should be
Sampling and testing of the proposed aggregates
placed a little more than the specified maximum
should be done according with the Standard
thickness to allow for compaction. The aggregate
Specifications, Section III, Subsection 300.06.
material should not be dumped in piles but
As the basing operations proceed, testing should
should be spread either by traveling truck or by
be done on a continuing basis. Maximum
use of mechanical spreaders.
density and optimum moisture should be
determined according to AASHTO T180. The
Spreading is usually done with loaders and motor
Resident Engineer has the responsibility to have
graders. Hauling over the subgrade should be
materials that do not comply with the
avoided as much as possible. The aggregate
requirements of the Standard Specifications
should be transported to the dumping point over
rejected and removed from the project. Rejected
the aggregate that was previously placed, and
materials that have been corrected and re-tested
then dumped on the end of the preceding
are not to be used until written approval is given
aggregate. Precautions should be taken when
by the Resident Engineer.
spreading the aggregate to avoid segregation;
that is, the large stone separating from the fine
302.04 PLACING
portions. If segregation does occur, the
Contractor should be required to re-mix the
Subbase and base materials are usually more aggregate by blading, rototilling, or by other
expensive than the subgrade material. Each layer acceptable methods.
of material must be finished to the specified
tolerance so that the next, more expensive layer This is especially important when placing
will not be used needlessly. The subgrade surface material over geotextile fabric. In areas of high
upon which the material is to be placed should be ground water, aggregate materials need to be
carefully examined. The subgrade should be clean and free draining which requires geotextile
moist to prevent the loss of moisture from the material to resist the movement of fine material
aggregate during compaction operations. Soft into the base course and compromising the
spots, ruts, and grade deficiencies should have strength of the foundational materials.
been corrected by removing, replacing material,
or regrading where necessary. The top of the The Inspector should be constantly alert during
subbase should be shaped to the required grade placement to detect changes in the appearance of
and cross section and smoothed to provide the aggregates, particularly on pit run material,
drainage. Subbase or base materials shall not be so that tests may be made immediately on the
placed until the subgrade preparation has been changed material. Often, excessive silt, clay, or
completed and approved by the Resident organic matter inadvertently becomes mixed with
Engineer. It is important that subbase installation the base material and should be removed. An
proceeds quickly after completion and approval excess of these materials is very detrimental to
of the subgrade preparation. However, a the base since they reduce the strength of the
sufficient amount of subgrade shall be prepared base when it is saturated with water. Constant
and approved for placement of base materials so vigilance accompanied by testing will help assure
that the construction procedures for either that detrimental materials are not used.
operation are not compromised.
300-2
AGGREGATE SUBBASE OPERATION
When the plan thickness of the base is greater moisture content, as it may easily be for
than 15 centimeters, the base must be granular-type material, water should be added as
constructed in multiple courses. Each course indicated by the specifications.
should be such that its thickness after
compaction does not exceed 15 centimeters. The The water may be introduced by one of the
surface of the first course may require the light following methods:
application of water before the spreading of the
aggregate for the next course. The spreading, • Passing of the materials through a stationary
balancing, and reshaping of the second and plant, mixing in the water thoroughly.
successive courses should be done in the same
manner as they were for the preceding course. • The water may be added to windrows on the
Care should be taken to ensure that the density of road and mixed by blading back and forth or
a given course is not disturbed by the operations rototilling.
of the subsequent course.
• Prewetting of stockpiles.
The moisture content at which compaction can
be most easily obtained, with a stated amount of In any case, thorough and uniform distribution
compaction effort, is referred to as the optimum of the water must be obtained throughout the
moisture content. Laboratory tests will reveal material. Moisture added to the surface aids
the moisture content that constitutes optimum only the material near the surface. The material
moisture content. The in-place density should be at the bottom of the layer does not receive the
determined according to AASHTO T205, or needed moisture and therefore ultimate
other specified density test. If the natural compaction will be less at that level. Water must
moisture content of the available material is be added to the surface to replace that lost by
found to be low, compared to the optimum evaporation during processing.
300-3
302.05 WATERING • Vibratory rollers
• Steel-wheeled rollers
Aggregate base and subbase materials are
moisture tolerant and the moisture density curve • Pan-type vibrating compactors
exhibits a relatively wide range of moisture
values where the specified density can be In most cases, pneumatic rollers and vibratory
achieved. However, watering of aggregate base rollers will be used to compact aggregate base
and subbase courses must be done with care. and subbase courses. Most of the compaction is
Excess watering is wasteful, but more important, achieved by the vibratory or steel-wheeled
it may result in the saturation of the subgrade rollers.
with serious damage resulting. The Engineer and
Inspector should be on the lookout for any soft Typically, compaction starts with rollers from
spots which might develop in the roadway the extreme sides and gradually proceeding
following excessive watering. Most of the water toward the axis of the road. Rolling continues
that falls on granular material penetrates to the until a relative density of not less that 95 percent
subgrade almost immediately. Any “sponginess” of the maximum dry density has been obtained.
or “pumping” and resultant movement under Each layer of the aggregate base and subbase
wheel loads is usually first noticed as excessive courses applied to the roadway must be watered
looseness of base materials. If this condition and compacted to the required density before the
should occur, a thorough investigation shall be placing of successive layers.
made and corrective measures taken before the
prime coat is applied. The most positive means of determining the
adequacy of water and compaction effort is by
302.06 COMPACTION density tests. The amount of compaction that will
be required, is normally expressed as a
Compacting means rolling the aggregate with percentage of the maximum density achieved
equipment in order to obtain the required density with the “Modified Proctor” (AASHTO T180)
in the base course. Strength and durability of the tests. The in-place density should be determined
base course are directly related to the density. according to AASHTO T205.
The first course should be compacted to the
required density. Then, the spreading of the More frequent testing at the beginning of the
second course may take place. The second course work will usually pay off by preventing over-
should then be shaped and compacted to the watering and over-rolling and by providing the
required grade, cross section, and density. The Inspector with a “feel” for the material. It is
same process should be repeated for each stressed again that the Inspector needs to be alert
successive course. to over-watering which can damage the
subgrade.
302.07 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT
Once the required moisture content and
compaction are achieved it must be maintained.
The Contractor is free to determine the types and
This can be accomplished by the continuous
numbers of compaction equipment he will use
addition of small amounts of water to replace
and the patterns they will follow. The main
moisture lost by drying of the surface.
concern of an Inspector is that adequate density
is obtained throughout the base course.
302.08 FINISHING
Machinery most commonly used to apply the
compaction effort may be any one or a Finishing operations include the shaping,
combination of the following: trimming, and rolling necessary to leave the
aggregate base at the proper grade, cross section,
• Pneumatic-tired rollers and surface condition. It should be noted that it
is the Contractor’s responsibility to correct the
300-4
problems met in the finishing of the aggregate

base course. Repairs of contaminated or other • Scabs: Scabs (laminated areas) occur when
defective base course areas must be done without thin surface sections of aggregate do not
additional payment to the Contractor. The bond with the underlying material. These
correcting of defects is part of finishing the areas can loosen and break away. Scabs
aggregate base course to comply with the plans may be detected visually or audibly. They
and specifications. sound hollow when walked on or struck with
a pick or shovel. Scabs can be caused by:
Besides final shaping and repair of defects,
finishing operations include sealing the base ¾ Improper adding of aggregate to areas
course. This is accomplished by pneumatic not up to grade.
¾
rollers. The rubber tires seal the base, prior to
ultimate sealing by the prime coat, leaving a Additional aggregate placed without
smooth hard surface. scarifying the underlying surface.
Finishing equipment used to shape the compacted ¾ Foreign objects in the base.
base course to the proper grade and cross section
In such places, the surface must be first
typically consists of a motor grader. The
scarified, so that the added aggregate will
scarifying attachment on the grader is used to
mix in and bond with the material.
loosen the base surface so that shaping can be
accomplished and a smooth base surface can be • Cracks and Checks: Cracks and checks
provided. appearing in the compacted base course may
be caused by the underlying aggregate being
Some of the most common difficulties found for
too wet or defects in the subgrade such as
proper finishing, their possible cause, and
the material not being properly mixed with
correction are as follows:
an area of segregated fine material on the
• Areas of Failing Density: Insufficient surface. In these areas, the defective
density within certain areas may be due to underlying base needs removal and
the moisture content not being correct or a correction as necessary.
lack of rolling done in those areas.
• Contamination: Contamination of aggregate
Considering the cause, different correction
bases occurs when the subgrade materials
procedures may be needed: wetting and
become mixed with the base material. To
remixing, or drying by scarifying and
correct the situation, the Contractor should
remixing, then the required reshaping and
dig out and remove the mixed materials. He
recompacting.
should then reshape, compact the subgrade,
• Areas not to Eveness and Grade: Areas of and replace the material removed with clean
the base that are too high are generally aggregate.
caused by insufficient spreading and
compacting. Such areas can be trimmed to
CHECKING GRADE
acceptable evenness. Areas that are too low
will need the application of additional
aggregate material. These areas must be
Checking the grade and shape of the finished
scarified, the new material added, then
aggregate surface is done using the following
reshaped and compacted.
methods:
• Wet, Spongy Areas: Wet spongy areas • Hand Levels
• String Lines
usually occur due to over-watering. These
• Cross Sections
areas can be repaired by scarifying, aerating,
• Straightedge
reshaping, and recompacting. In some
instances, more aggregate may have to be
added.
300-5
302.09 CHECKING GRADE difficult because of complicated shapes. These

sections are taken with a transit or level,
recorded in the normal manner: listing station,
The final duty of the Inspector concerning
offset, and rod reading. The cross sections are
inspection of the aggregate base course
plotted and compared with the required shape.
construction is checking the grade and shape of
the finished aggregate surface. All areas higher
302.09.04 Straightedge - Evenness Check
or lower than 1 centimeter from the plan grade of
the finished base must be corrected. In addition,
The finished surface of bases shall be shaped to
the finished surface of the subbase shall be
within reasonable conformity to the design cross
constructed to within 12 mm of the grade levels
section. Straightedge checks are used to find
established on the drawings.
rises or depressions in excess of 1 cm. A five-
meter straightedge is used to check for surface
Grades should be checked every 15 meters on
irregularities and unevenness.
tangents and curves less than 16 degrees and
every 7.5 meters on curves greater than 16
302.10 DEPTH CHECKS
degrees. A complete record of the measurements
shall be made for a minimum of one section in
each 150 meter increment. Depth checks normally are not necessary as the
subgrade levels are recorded prior to placing the
302.09.01 Hand Level Method - Grade subbase and base courses. The final levels of the
Check subbase and base courses are checked, and the
depth is the arithmetic difference. However, in
When using the hand level, the Inspector sights some instances the depth of various subbase and
through the tube at a known grade, usually base courses need to be checked as described
marked on a grade stake, and measures the herein.
distance vertically from the level sight to the
ground elevation. This distance is compared The final depth or thickness of the base can be
with the calculated distance as obtained from determined by measuring through holes made in
typical cross sections and grade elevations for the aggregate. The holes should not be less than
the particular location being checked. Hand 8 centimeters in diameter and they should be
levels should not be used for sights exceeding a placed at various points on the cross section.
distance of 15 meters. Grades placed on stakes
to be used for checking grade should be Areas of the completed base that are deficient in
established with a transit or level and a level rod. thickness by more than 8 mm must be corrected
by scarifying and adding material. Corrected
302.09.02 String Line Method - Grade areas must then be compacted properly and
Check shaped to the required thickness and cross
section.
The string line method is applicable when the
distances are not so great (about 7.5 meters or In certain special cases, deficient areas may be
less) that sag in the string line is excessive. After left in place. The Contractor must then provide
placing level grades on stakes across the road, a additional material in the next course at no
string is stretched between stakes and the vertical additional cost. In no case should the deficiency
distance at various points measured and exceed 25 mm.
compared to the computed dimensions.
The Contractor is required to perform the surface
302.09.03 Cross-Section Method - Grade irregularity and depth checks to ensure that the
Check specification requirements have been met. The
Inspector should observe these checking
The cross-section method is used where operations and record the results in a field book.
comparisons with the required section are
300-6
303 RECORDS • Measurements for final payments, such as

cross sections, or in-place measurements.
Record keeping is a very important part of the
Inspector’s work. Observations, measurements,
and directions are the basis for justifying all DIARY ENTRIES
parts of the work. Because much of he
Inspector’s work is covered by subsequent
construction, the results of the work cannot be
• “Checked grade of aggregate Subbase
readily reviewed later. Written reports and
between Stations 9+600 and 9+800 by
records of the observations and measurements
string line; found it to be not within limits
are usually the only remaining evidence that the
specified; more work needed to improve
work was performed correctly and that the
smoothness and conform to required grade.”
Municipality received the complete benefits of
the Contractor’s work paid for. Emphasis
• “Checked grade of aggregate Subbase
should be placed on recording all portions of the
between Stations 9+800 and 9+950 with
daily work as it is performed.
hand level; found it to be within limits
specified; gave Contractor go ahead.”
Each grade Inspector will make a written
statement, in a bound project field book, each
time a series of grade checks is made. • “Rechecked grade of aggregate Subbase
Statements should reflect both the work and the between Stations 9+600 and 9+800; found
findings and they should be signed and dated. it to be within tolerance permitted by plans
and specs; told Contractor to go ahead.”
All notes and computations are to be retained
and made a part of the project records regardless
of their form or condition. The summary of the 304 MEASUREMENT AND
days work is recorded on the Inspector’s Daily PAYMENT
Report for all of the Contractor’s operations
Payment is made by the unit price per square
observed by the Inspector.
meter per depth of classification (area), or by the
unit price per cubic meter (volume) as described
Other records necessary to document this work
in the measurement and payment descriptions of
include:
the Particular or Standard Specifications.
Measurements should be made according to the
• Gradation test reports to show the quality of
Particular or Standard Specifications.
the material used.
• Compaction tests to show that the required

compaction was achieved. This should also
include tests for moisture content.
300-7
SECTION 400 component part for compliance with

specification and safety requirements. Any
ASPHALT WORKS
deficiencies noted in the mechanical condition or
the specification and safety requirements should
401 ASPHALT CONCRETE be corrected before the beginning of mixing
401.01 ASPHALT PLANT OPERATIONS operations. In accordance with a governmental
decree, all asphalt plants shall have appropriate
emission control equipment. The Resident
401.01.01 General
Engineer shall assure that emission control
equipment is present and functioning. Minimum
The purpose of a hot-mix asphalt plant is to
plant production capacity should be determined
blend aggregate and asphalt cement to produce a
by the plant inspection personnel.
hot, homogeneous asphalt paving mixture. The
aggregate used is a combination of coarse and
A brief description of the flow of materials and
fine aggregates with or without mineral filler.
the operation of batch plants and continuous mix
The binder material used is normally asphalt
plants is provided in the following sections.
cement. Various additives, including liquid and
powdered materials, can also be incorporated
401.01.02 Batch Plants
into the mixture.
The major components of a batch plant are the
There are two basic types of plants: batch plants
cold feed system, asphalt cement supply system,
and continuous mix plants. Each plant type
aggregate dryer, mixing tower, and the emission
fulfills the same ultimate purpose, but the
control system.
operation and flow of the materials through the
plant are different. In a batch plant, asphalt
The plant mixing tower consists of the following
concrete is mixed by placing the right quantities
elements:
of aggregates, fillers, and asphalt cement in a
mixer and mixing one batch at a time.
• Hot elevator
Continuous-mix plants operate without batching
units by keeping constant the flows of • Screen deck
aggregates, fillers, asphalt cement, and mixed • Hot bins
asphaltic concrete. Regardless of the type of • Weigh hopper
plant used to manufacture the asphalt mixture, • Asphalt cement weigh bucket
the product is essentially similar. • Pug mill
Equipment and procedures common to both types The aggregate used in the mix is removed from
of plants are as follows: the stockpiles and placed in individual cold-feed
bins. Each different size aggregate is
• Aggregate stockpiling proportioned out of its bin by the size of the
• Cold-feed systems opening of the gate at the bottom of each bin or
• Asphalt cement supply system by use of a variable-speed belt feeder.
• Surge silos Generally, belt feeders beneath the bins deposit
each aggregate on a gathering conveyor located
• Emission control equipment
under all the cold-feed bins. The gathering
conveyor transports the combined aggregate to
When the plant is set up and ready to operate,
the charging conveyor, which carries it up to the
the Resident Engineer should make a thorough
aggregate dryer.
examination of the equipment. Checking is done
for compliance with the Standard Specifications,
The dryer operates on a counter flow basis. The
Section IV-1, Subsection 401.02. The Resident
aggregate is introduced into the dryer at the
Engineer should become familiar with plant
upper end and moves down the drum both by the
features determining the mechanical condition of
drum rotating (gravity flow) and by the flight
each component part and examine each
400-1
configuration inside the rotating dryer. The slope the weigh bucket is discharged into the pug mill
of the dryer, its speed of rotation, diameter, and the wet-mix time begins. The mixing time
length, and number and design of flights control for the blending of the asphalt cement with the
the time required for the aggregate to pass aggregate should be no more than that needed to
through the dryer. Aggregate passes from the completely coat the aggregate particles with a
dryer to the hot elevator through a discharge thin film of the asphalt cement material. The
chute that is located near the burner end of the total time in the pug mill, made up of dry-mix
dryer. The burner is located at the lower end of time and wet-mix time, can be as short as 28
the dryer, and the exhaust gases from the seconds in most cases.
combustion and drying process move toward the
upper end of the dryer, against the flow (counter When mixing is complete, the gates on the
to the flow) of the aggregate. As the aggregate is bottom of the pug mill are opened and the mix is
tumbled through the exhaust gases, the material discharged into the haul vehicle or into the
is heated and dried. Moisture is removed and conveying device that carries the mix to a silo
carried out of the dryer as part of the exhaust gas and eventually into the truck. For most batch
stream. The hot, dry aggregate is discharged plants, the time needed to open the pug mill gates
from the dryer at the lower end. and discharge the mix is approximately 7
seconds, thus the total mixing time for a batch
The hot aggregate is transported to the top of the would be about 35 seconds (Dry-mix time + wet-
plant mixing tower by a bucket elevator. Upon mix time + mix discharge) in most cases.
discharge from the elevator, the aggregate
normally passes through a set of vibrating The plant is equipped with emission-control
screens. The finest aggregate material goes devices, both primary and secondary systems.
directly through all the screens into the number 1 Either a wet-scrubber system or a dry-fabric
hot bin. The coarser aggregate particles are filter system (bag house) can be used as the
caught by the different size screens and deposited secondary collection system to remove
into one of the other hot bins. The separation of particulate matter from the exhaust gases that
aggregate in each of the hot bins depends on the flow out of the dryer and send clean air to the
size of the openings in the screen that is used in atmosphere through the stack.
the screen deck and the gradation of the
aggregate in the cold feed bins. If recycled asphalt pavement is incorporated into
the mix, the material is placed in a separate cold-
The aggregate is held in the hot bins until it is feed bin from which it is delivered to the plant.
discharged from a gate at the bottom of each bin It can be added to the new aggregate in one of
into a weigh hopper. The correct proportion of three locations: bottom of the elevator, the hot
each aggregate is determined by weight. If bins, or the weigh hopper, with the last location
reclaimed material is used in the mix, it typically being the one most commonly used. Heat
is entered into the weigh hopper as an additional transfer between the superheated new aggregate
aggregate. and the reclaimed material begins when the two
materials come in contact and continues during
At the same time that the aggregate is being the mixing process.
proportioned and weighed, the asphalt cement is
pumped from its storage tank to a separate weigh 401.01.03 Continuous Mix Plants
bucket located on the tower just above the pug
mill. The proper amount of material is weighed The components of this type of plant include the
into the heated bucket and held until it is needed cold-feed system, asphalt cement supply system,
in the pug mill. aggregate dryer, hot bucket elevator, screen unit,
hot bins, mixing unit and holding hopper, and
The aggregate in the weigh hopper is emptied emission control system.
into a twin shaft pug mill, and the different
aggregate fractions are mixed together. After The cold-feed bins are similar to those used on a
this brief dry-mix time, the asphalt cement from batch plant, and typically a constant-speed feeder
400-2
belt is located under each bin. Material is gates, and a tunnel and conveyor system.
proportioned from each bin by the size of the The plant Inspector is responsible to ensure
discharge gate opening and deposited on the that the gates are adjusted so that the
gathering conveyor. The aggregate is transferred aggregates, in the proper quantity and size,
to a charging conveyor for delivery to the dryer. are delivered through the plant to maintain
Inside the dryer, the moisture in the combined uniform production according to the job-mix
aggregate is removed as the material is heated formula without overflowing.
from ambient temperature to the desired mixing
temperature. The dried and heated aggregate is 2. Dryer The component parts of the dryer
then carried up an inclined bucket elevator to the consist of the following:
screen deck, where it is divided into various sizes
and temporarily held in small hot bins. • A rotating cylinder (dryer) usually from
1 to 3 meters in diameter and from 6 to
The aggregate is continuously removed from the +12 meters long.
bins, proportioned according to the desired
• A burner that is either gas or oil fired.
gradation in the mix, and transported to the pug
mill. The asphalt cement is kept in a storage
• A fan that may be considered part of the
tank and then pumped to the mixing tower, where
dust collector system, but its primary
it is sprayed on the aggregate. The asphalt
function is to provide the draft air for
cement, measured by volume instead of weight,
combustion in the drum.
is mixed continuously with the aggregate as the
two materials are moved toward the discharge The sensing element of a thermometric
end of the pug mill by the mixing paddles. instrument should be located in the discharge
Mixing time can be increased or decreased by chute to record or show the temperature of
changing the retention or dwell time of the the aggregate as it passes from the dryer. A
aggregates in the pug mill, usually by altering the pyrometer or other type of instrument is
setting of the pug mill discharge end gate or by used. The aggregates should be heated to a
reversing one or more sets of paddles. temperature between 135º C and 163º C at
the time of mixing. The temperature will
Because the mixing is a continuous process, a vary depending on the characteristics of the
small capacity, temporary holding hopper is asphalt plant. The sensing element also
provided at the discharge end of the mixer to starts the automatic burner controls.
store the material until it can be delivered into a
haul truck. For emission-control purposes, the 3. Dust Collector The fan exhausts the draft air
plant is equipped with a primary dry collector from the upper end of the dryer and other
and a secondary wet collector or a bag house. components of the plant into the dust
collector system. The system may be
If a recycled mix is being produced, the recycled composed of either a bag house, cyclone
asphalt pavement material is placed in a separate collector, wet washer or “scrubber”, or some
cold-feed bin and transported to the pug mill by a combination. This draft air contains dust
charging conveyor. This material is added particles, vapor, and gases that must be
proportionately, by volume, to the new aggregate reduced or controlled before emission into
that has been superheated in the dryer. The heat the atmosphere. As stated in the Standard
transfer and mixing of the two materials is Specifications, collected dust may be
accomplished as they move through the pug mill. reintroduced into the flow of aggregate.
401.01.04 Plant Component Descriptions 4. Screening Unit On most plants the screening
(Batch and Continuous) unit is of the flat table vibrating type, usually
equipped with four decks. The size of the
1. Cold Aggregate Feeder The cold aggregate screens on the decks varies with the type of
feeder in a commercial plant may be bituminous concrete to be produced. The
equipped with separate bins, adjustable top deck is covered with a scalping screen
400-3
that removes all the oversize material and Asphalt cement is usually weighed into an
discharges this material into a reject chute. overflow-type bucket suspended on a
The screening unit should be cleaned daily weighing mechanism with a springless dial
and checked for loose or torn screens. scale.
5. Graded Aggregate Bins The bituminous When the plant is ready to operate, the scales
plant should be equipped with the number of should be cleaned, each part carefully
aggregate bins required by the specifications. checked, and load tested by a commercial
These bins hold the heated and screened scale mechanic for the accuracy specified.
aggregates in various size fractions required Each scale should be equipped with a quick
for the type of bituminous mixture to be adjustment to zero to compensate for
produced. The bin partitions must be tight, accumulations of dust and asphalt cement
free from holes, and of sufficient height to during production operations. Mixing plants
prevent the intermingling of aggregates. should have the required number of test
Each bin should be equipped with an weights nearby for frequent testing of all
overflow pipe that will discharge any excess scales.
aggregate from the bin. Bin shortages or
excesses should be corrected by adjusting The Contractor may provide an approved
any or all of the following as required: automatic printer system that will print the
weight of each material delivered, provided
• The cold feeder gates. the system is used with an approved
• The screen sizes. automatic batching and mixing control
• The hot bin pull weights. system.
On batch plants the bottom of each bin is 7. Graded Aggregate Bin Control Gates Up to
fitted with a discharge gate that may be the point of discharge from the graded
operated manually or automatically. The aggregate bins, the functions of the
gate’s closure should be positive enough to continuous-mix plant and the batch-mix
ensure that no leakage into the weight box plant are essentially the same. In
will occur. On continuous-mix plants the continuous-mix plants, the proportioning of
gates must be adjusted and locked in place to the separate sizes of aggregate is
provide a continuous and uniform flow of accomplished through the adjustable gates on
material from each bin to the pug mill mixer. the feeder of the gradation unit. These gates
Samples of aggregates from these bins may deposit the aggregates onto the elevator to be
be secured from “gates” or “windows” in the delivered directly to the pug mill. The
sides of the bins, or by diverting the flow of asphalt cement is delivered to the pug mill
aggregates from the bins into the sampling through a calibrated metering pump. The
containers. aggregate feeder and the asphalt cement
pump are geared to a common power source
6. Scales On the batch-mix plant, a weigh so that proportions of aggregate and asphalt
hopper for the aggregate is found directly cement remain constant, regardless of
under the graded aggregate bins. The weigh variations in power supply.
hopper is suspended on a weighing
mechanism that is generally equipped with a Before production begins, a careful
springless dial scale. Aggregate weight from calibration of the flow of aggregates from
each bin is marked accumulatively so that each feeder gate must be made. The rate of
the last mark will read the total amount of flow of aggregate from each bin is
aggregate in each batch. The sequence of determined by weighing the amount
weighing from each bin must be strictly discharged at various openings and
observed. The recommended practice is to computing the quantity delivered per
weigh the coarse aggregate fraction first. revolution of the feeder drive shaft. A curve
is then plotted for each gate, showing pounds
400-4
of aggregate per revolution against the gate • The temperature of the combined
opening in centimeters. materials.
• The quantity of materials in the mixer.
The Contractor must furnish a copy of the • The clearance between the paddle tips
manufacturer’s operating instructions, that and liner plates.
will show the operating speed of the feeder
and the asphalt cement pump delivery rate The paddle tips and liner plates should be
for the various sprocket sizes. The sprocket checked for excessive wear and when the
size for the asphalt cement pump must be clearance exceeds the dimensions specified,
checked for the delivery rate required, by the paddle tips and liner plates should be
weighing the quantity of material pumped replaced.
into a container over a carefully timed
interval. A thermometer must be installed in The mixers of batch-mix plants and
the circulating line just ahead of the pump. continuous-mix plants are essentially of the
This is done as the temperature of the same design, except for the variations in
asphalt cement must be controlled within a arrangement of the paddle tips. In the batch-
very narrow range to control fluctuations in mix mixer, the materials are dumped into the
percentages of asphalt cement in the mixture. center of the mixer and the paddle tips are
arranged to give an end-to-center mixing or a
8. Asphalt Cement Control Unit Satisfactory run-around (figure eight) mixing pattern.
means should be provided, either by The material is held in the mixer for the
weighing or metering, to obtain the proper required mixing time and then discharged
quantity of asphalt cement in the mix within through the discharge gate into the
the tolerance specified. Means should also transporting vehicles. The mixer should be
be provided for checking the quantity or rate equipped with an automatic timing device to
of flow of asphalt cement as it passes into regulate the dry-mixing and wet-mixing
the mixer. periods automatically and a batch counter to
accurately record the number of batches
9. Pug Mill Mixer After proportioning, the produced. In a continuous-mill pug mill, the
aggregate and asphalt cement are introduced materials are introduced in one end of the
into the pummel for mixing. The pug mill mixer and the paddle tips are set to transport
mixer should consist of twin shafts equipped the materials to the discharge end as the
with paddles for mixing the ingredients into a mixing is accomplished.
homogeneous mass. The main parts of the
pug mill mixer are: The degree of mixing varies with the depth
or volume of material in the pug mill, which
• The paddle tips can be controlled by the following:
• The paddle shanks
• The spray bar • Raising the dam on the discharge end of
• The liners the mixer to hold the material in the
• The shafts mixing unit for a longer period and at a
• The discharge gates depth that will intensify the mixing
• The heated jacket action.
Efficient mixing is dependent on the • Adjusting or reversing the pitch of the

following: paddles to retard movement of material
through the pug mill.
• The number and shape of the paddle
tips. 10. Surge/Storage Bins Hot asphalt mixtures
• The r.p.m.’s of the mixing shafts. may be stored in holding bins especially
• The length of mixing time. designed for that purpose. Each holding bin
should be inspected to determine acceptance
at specific holding times. Acceptance will be
400-5
based upon the ability of the holding bin to gates must be adjusted to deliver the proper
hold and discharge mixtures within the proportion of aggregates to the gradation unit. A
quality criteria specified in the job-mix sieve analysis of the aggregates from each bin of
formula without segregation. Discharge into the gradation unit should be made to calculate
the surge/storage bins should not be a direct the bin weights (or gate openings and pump
stream but through a batching device (job- sprockets for a continuous-mix plant) required to
hopper). produce a mixture that will conform with the job-
mix formula. It is important to draw several dry
11. Haul Trucks and Scales Haul trucks used to batches through the plant. This will give the
transport the mixture to the roadbed should screening unit a chance to operate at normal
be in good operating condition, capable of operating speed before securing the samples used
hauling the mixture without spillage, and in making the sieve analysis. The hot bin
capable of dumping into the asphalt paver or weights determined from these screen analyses
windrow sizer. Before beginning hauling will be used to start production of the plant. The
operations, each truck will be assigned a procedures for establishing bin weights, sample
number. The inside of each truck bed may forms, and possible causes of fluctuations in
be lightly coated with a soap detergent gradation, density, and stability results are
solution, lime water solution, or an approved generally explained in publications governing the
commercial oil emulsion (soluble oils) in the design and production of concrete mixtures.
proportions recommended by the
manufacturer. If such coatings are applied, 401.01.06 Inspection During Mixing
truck bodies should be rinsed immediately Operations
before loading to remove excess coating
material. The use of diesel fuel, kerosene, or Before the beginning of each day’s production,
other like products as a truck bed cleaning the Plant Inspector should check to see that the
agent is not to be allowed. When required various gates, scales, timers, etc., are accurately
by the specifications, the truck beds must be set before mixing begins. In addition, the
properly insulated and equipped with screening unit, bins, and overflow vents should
suitable covers. be checked and cleaned. The recording
thermometer charts for the previous 24-hour
Truck scales or hanging weight hoppers period should be collected, dated, and filed in the
under holding bins of the size and type project records.
specified for the project should be furnished
and installed by the Contractor. A After mixing begins, and throughout the day, the
commercial scale mechanic should supervise Inspector must make the required job control
the installation and provide the initial check tests or submit samples to the central laboratory
on the accuracy of the scales. Periodic for testing. If possible, an assistant should do
checks for accuracy, during construction, the routine tests leaving the Plant Inspector free
should be made by the Resident Engineer to observe all the plant operations at frequent
according to specification requirements. intervals. The Plant Inspector should also
Accuracy checks should be recorded in a schedule periodic visits by personnel from the
field book as part of the permanent project central laboratory to check raw materials and the
records. final product at the plant. The experienced Plant
Inspector’s presence around the plant will
401.01.05 Establishing Mix Proportions contribute much to the production of a uniform
mixture.
The Resident Engineer should furnish the Plant
Inspector a copy of the job-mix formula after it During the day, the Inspector should make
has been approved by the central laboratory. periodic checks of the following:
During the preliminary operating period and
before securing any samples, the cold feeder
400-6
• The aggregate stockpiles, cold feeder gates, • The weighing and mixing operations.
and overflow vents for any overflow of the
graded aggregate bins. • Observing the mixture in the trucks for
uniformity in appearance.
• The temperature of aggregates, asphalt
cement, and mixture in trucks. The Inspector should observe the work of the
scale person on the truck scales at the plant, and
• The allowable tolerance in gradation for each should see that the required tests of the scales are
hot bin to ensure that it is not exceeded and done. The Inspector should see that the daily
that the gradation of the finished mixture totals are promptly obtained, checked, entered on
does not vary from the specification limits. the daily report, and made a part of the
permanent job records.
• The proper dryer operation.
PLANT INSPECTION CHECKLIST
9 Make sure all tests are understood.

9 See that testing tools and equipment are on hand and in good condition.
9 Inspect all components of the mixing plant; make sure all deficiencies are corrected before mixing is
begun.
9 Check all scales for accuracy periodically; check scales for correct adjustment to zero daily.
9 See that stockpiled aggregates are kept separate; see that no intermingling occurs at the cold feeders.
9 Make frequent checks of temperatures of heated aggregate, check for moisture content.
9 Watch for evidence (dark smoke from plant exhaust and oily coating of aggregate) of incomplete
combustion of burner fuel.
9 Check the temperature of the asphalt cement frequently.
9 Establish scale settings for batch weights; observe plant operators frequently to see that correct
weights are obtained.
9 Make daily checks of screens, bins, and overflow vents for proper operation.
9 Check an occasional batch to see that it is mixed the required time.
9 Make frequent visual inspections of the mix leaving the plant for evidence of non-uniformity or
incomplete mixing.
9 Check temperature of the mix frequently.
9 Inspect the truck beds before loading; see that beds are free of excess oil and congealed chunks of
mix.
9 Check occasionally with the Road Inspectors concerning workability and uniformity of the mix
delivered to the roadbed.
9 Take samples of the mix and complete the required tests or submit samples to the central laboratory.
9 Make accurate, complete records of all test results, number of batches mixed, asphalt materials used,
and other pertinent data.
9 Develop a mental picture of the appearance of the proper mixture. A load in which the mixture
“peaks up” more than usual in the haul truck suggests a lean mix, either from too much fine
aggregate or not enough asphalt cement or both. A load in which the mixture flattens out suggests
a fat mix, either from too much asphalt cement, too much coarse aggregate, or not enough fine
aggregate.
9 Ensure emission control equipment is in place and functioning.
400-7
401.01.07 Records and Reports Specifications, Section IV-2, Subsection 402.05.

Approval by the Engineer does not relieve the
The Plant Inspector’s records should reflect a Contractor of his responsibility to provide a
complete summary of materials incorporated and sound asphalt paving mix for satisfactory
plant operations done on the project with proper execution and performance of the asphalt paving
documentation to form an unquestionable basis courses.
for pay quantities. These records should include
a Plant Inspector’s daily diary, tests performed 401.02.01 Stockpiling of Aggregates
on materials by project and other personnel,
materials received, and measurements of Before stockpiling the aggregates, the stockpile
materials used on the project. site must be cleared and leveled. Stockpiles
should be separated to prevent intermingling.
Test reports should be filed, as required, with the This may be accomplished with clearly defined
Municipality. These reports should reflect the stockpiles, bins, or by using adequate bulkheads.
quality and quantity of materials being Bulkheads should extend to the full depth of the
incorporated in the work. stockpiles and should be strong enough to
withstand the pressures that will be exerted under
401.02 MATERIALS AND MATERIAL operating conditions. Aggregates must be
HANDLING frequently checked during stockpiling operations
for contamination, segregation, and gradation
requirements. The stockpiled aggregates should
Aggregates and asphalt material and all
be of a size and gradation that, when blended in
applicable design data for a proposed job mix
the proper proportions, will achieve the gradation
formula will be submitted by the Contractor
of the job-mix formula.
according to the Standard Specifications, Section
IV-2, Subsection 402.05. The use of additives in
401.02.02 Storage of Asphalt Cement
asphalt concrete is expensive and experiments in
Materials
the use of any considered for the job-mix must be
conducted in the design stage.
The asphalt cement storage tank(s) should be of
sufficient capacity to maintain continuous
The Resident Engineer will obtain samples of the
operation. This will allow for some delay in
proposed materials and submit them to the
shipments. The tanks should be equipped with
central laboratory for quality tests as specified.
sufficient heating coils to heat evenly and
Upon receipt of the test results, the Resident
maintain the asphalt cement at the specified
Engineer will then issue an approved job mix
temperature. The coils are usually heated by
formula that will be supplied by the Contractor.
steam, hot oil, or electricity. Coating on the
The job mix formula will include the following:
storage tanks internal surfaces or additives to the
asphalt cement should not be allowed unless
• A combined gradation showing a single
specifically permitted by the Contract
definite percentage passing each sieve.
specifications. During the mixing operations, the
• A percentage of each material to be used in asphalt cement should be continuously circulated
the mix. in the feeder system between the tanks and the
plant. All pumps and feeder lines should be
• Tolerance envelopes for all materials. properly jacketed and heated to maintain the
asphalt cement temperature required. A
• The mixing temperature. thermometer should be placed near the charging
valve to check the temperature of the asphalt
• A compaction reference density. cement at the point of use. When required, the
storage tanks should be calibrated so the quantity
Once the job mix formula is approved, it is the of material remaining in them may be measured
Contractor’s responsibility to provide the mix at anytime. Asphalt cement is usually sampled
within the tolerances specified in the Standard and conditionally accepted at the source;
400-8
however, provisions should be made to sample 401.03.04 Duties before Paving Begins
the asphalt from the sample valve located in a
circulatory feed line to obtain verification The Road Inspector should be thoroughly
samples. familiar with the plans and specifications for the
project and have the equipment necessary to
401.03 ROAD OPERATIONS check all phases of the paving operation. The
Inspector should check with the Contractor’s
Superintendent regarding the previously agreed
401.03.01 General
to paving sequence. The lift thickness shall not
exceed 5cm unless otherwise shown on the
The construction of an asphalt concrete
drawings or approved by the Resident Engineer.
pavement begins with the delivery to the roadbed
In addition, the Inspector should see that the
of a workable mixture proportioned and mixed
construction equipment required by the
according to the specifications. The pavement
specifications is on the project, and that the
should be constructed of the type of mixture,
barricades, warning signs, and other traffic
number of courses, and at the depth specified.
control equipment are in place.
Before delivery of the mixture, the surface to be
1. Layering The lift or layering sequence
paved should be shaped to the correct grade and
should be discussed and agreed with the
cross section, and compacted to the density
Contractor prior to the start of operations.
specified.
Subsequent layers should be placed as soon
as possible, but not before the preceding
If the paving operation sequence is not set forth
layer has been finished and cooled.
in the specifications, the Contractor should
Placement of subsequent courses (types)
submit a proposed sequence of paving operations
may not proceed until the previous course
to the Resident Engineer for approval. Once this
has been tested and approved for
sequence has been agreed upon, it will not be
conformance of the mix and density to the
changed without prior written approval.
specification requirements.
401.03.02 Traffic Control 2. Surface Preparation Before paving
operations, the Road Inspector should
Traffic control should be thoroughly discussed at thoroughly check the surface on which the
the preconstruction conference. At this time, pavement is to be placed. If the surface is a
definite traffic control procedures should be soil or aggregate, a prime coat, when
established that provide maximum safety for the required, should be applied and thoroughly
workers and the traveling public, with the least cured. On some soil bases a light
interruption of the work. All traffic control application of water should be applied for
devices and procedures used to direct traffic dust and/or moisture control. The surface
through the construction area should be should be checked for correct grade and
according to the Manual on Uniform Traffic cross section, and all work areas,
Control Devices (MUTCD) and of the type depressions, or potholes should be repaired
shown on the plans. to give a firm and unyielding paving base.
401.03.03 Weather When an existing surface is to be resurfaced,
the surface should be cleaned of dirt and
Weather and temperature limitations for this type other extraneous matter, all pavement defects
of construction should be according to the repaired, and cracks filled with approved
specifications. Plant production operations bituminous filler material. If a leveling
should be suspended at the imminent approach of course is to be applied, the existing surface
and during wet weather. should be checked and the roughest areas
marked to receive a pre-leveling course
400-9
before the leveling course. A tack coat, deficiencies in the condition of the equipment
when required, should be applied to all may be discussed and corrected. This will avoid
surfaces. The tack coat should be applied to delays once the work is under way and ensure
the width and length to be paved with that the best possible surface finish can be
consideration given to the operation of traffic obtained. Listed below are some of the more
and other factors. Tack coat application important details the Inspector should check
should be limited to the maximum area that during inspection of the paving equipment:
will be covered within the same day’s paving
operation. 1. Paving Machines The Inspector should
become familiar with the mechanical features
3. Grade and Alignment Controls The on the type of paver to be used on the
pavement edges should be marked by a project. In doing so, an intelligent appraisal
string line or paver guide line sufficiently in of the condition and adjustment of the
advance to ensure paving continuity. These machine may be made. Handbooks of
should be set and nailed to the surface at operating instructions are available from
intervals that will permit the line to be held each manufacturer, in which the various
taut and should be checked to be sure that adjustments and operating details are shown.
the proposed pavement width is obtained.
The profile grade controller on the paving 2. Rollers Steel-wheeled rollers should be
machine shall be activated by a traveling checked to determine that the wheels can roll
articulated averaging beam not less than in a true plane and that they do not have flat
9.14m in length or taut string line (wire) set spots or ridges. The steering and driving
to grade. mechanism must be free of excessive play, or
backlash, and the motor and driving
401.03.05 Inspection of Paving Equipment transmission free from oil leaks. Each roller
will be fitted with a water tank connected to
The Road Inspector should make a personal spray bars and mats on each wheel. The
inspection of the Contractor’s paving equipment, wetting mats should be checked for excessive
checking the condition and adjustment of the wear and the spray bars checked for proper
component parts of the paving machine and operation.
rollers. By making this inspection before the
beginning of the paving operations, obvious
PAVING MACHINE CHECKLIST
9 On all paving machines the operating motor should be checked for proper governor operation, and to
ensure the motor operates smoothly, without missing.
9 On track-laying machines, the track linkage must be correctly adjusted and the tracks and pins checked
for excessive wear.
9 On pneumatic-tired machines, all tires should be inflated to the correct pressure, and the chain drives
checked for correct adjustment and/or excessive wear.
9 Tamper bars should be checked for correct R.P.M., proper clearance from screed, length of stroke,
and excessive wear on the tips.
9 Vibrators on the screed should be checked for proper height above the vibrating screed.
9 Screed plates should be checked for excessive wear, proper crown and tilt adjustment, and check that
the screed heating burner operates efficiently. Screed extensions should be in the same true plane and
flush with the screed bottom. Vibrators on a vibrating screed should be checked for proper operation.
9 Electronic grade and thickness controls should be checked for proper operation.
400-10
Pneumatic-tired rollers should be equipped Vehicles that impair the functioning of the
with smooth tires in good condition, of equal paver should be rejected.
size, ply, and equally inflated. Tire
pressures and loading of the roller may be 4. Miscellaneous Tools A check should be
varied to give the desirable ground contact made to see that the Contractor has available
pressures. All wheels should roll true, on the project an adequate supply of rakes,
without wobble or creep. shovels, brooms, and other small tools. The
Contractor should be properly equipped with
Vibratory rollers should be acceptable for portable barricades, cones, or other means of
bituminous mixture compaction and should protecting the freshly laid mixture from
be able to exert the compaction effort damage by traffic.
equivalent to steel-wheeled and pneumatic-
tired rollers with separate controls for energy 401.03.06 Mix Delivery
and propulsion. Vibratory rollers should be
capable of providing a smooth pavement Placing and finishing operations must be
surface, free of ridges, indentations, or other performed in daylight unless nighttime operations
objectionable features. The use of equipment are specifically approved by the Resident
that results in excessive crushing of the Engineer.
aggregate will not be permitted.
3. Haultrucks Haul vehicles should be checked

for compatibility with the paving machine.
ROLLING OPERATION
400-11
Asphalt concrete mix delivered to the paving 401.03.07 Spreading and Finishing
location should be checked for the following:
The asphalt mixture is spread and finished by a
1. Uniform Rate The number of trucks, haul self-propelled paver. In small, irregular areas,
distance, plant capacity, capacity of paving the mixture may be spread and finished by hand.
and compactive equipment, and job site lay
down rate are all factors to be weighed by The principal duty of the Road Inspector is to
the Contractor in the efficient delivery of mix ensure that a pavement or base course is
to the site. Ideally, the paving machine constructed to the correct grade and cross section
should never have to stop and wait for a set forth in the plans, and with the surface
delivery, nor should more than 3 trucks be texture, density, and riding surface of good
queued at any time at the paver. The quality.
Inspector should continually monitor the
situation and ensure the Contractor is To begin paving operations with a paver, the
making proper adjustments in the delivery screed should be heated to the proper
schedule. temperature and grade controls set to construct
the longitudinal joint. This must be carefully
2. Temperature The Standard Specifications checked to ensure good riding qualities and that
require the mix to be delivered to the paver it conforms to the tolerance requirements before
at a temperature between 120°C and 160°C. the paver is allowed to continue. Particular care
The Contractor should be instructed to make should be exercised in setting the thickness
adjustments at the plant if the measured control device to ensure the spread and crown
temperature approaches or exceeds these required. When matching the edge of a
limits. In cold weather, the trucks should be previously laid section of pavement, the paver
covered to retain the heat rather than screed should overlap the existing edge 2.5 to 5
overheat the mix at the plant. centimeters. The thickness control should be
adjusted to leave the material slightly higher than
3. Appearance Each truckload should be
the previously laid section of pavement.
checked for uniformity and proper mixing at
Overlapping this edge will force enough material
the plant. Any experienced Inspector can
into this area to be sure that the joint is
detect potential problems, such as improper
completely filled and moisture proof. The height
temperature, asphalt content, or non-uniform
of the material above the previously laid edge of
mixing, through visual observation of the
pavement should be adjusted so that when the
mix in the truck and the flow characteristics.
longitudinal joint is properly compacted, the
pavement should be uniform in cross section
PAVING CHECKLIST within the tolerances specified.
As the paver continues, the grade or thickness

9 The surface condition control device should be adjusted to give the lift
9 The mixture in the trucks required by the plans. Over or excessive
9 Profile and alignment controls adjustment of the grade or thickness control
9 Mix temperature device should not be allowed since continuity of
9 The depth of the mat being placed operations is essential to securing a good
9 The surface texture behind the machine pavement surface. The speed of the paver should
9 The rolling operation be regulated by the plant’s production capacity
9 Transverse joints offset by at least 2 meters and the number of trucks. In addition, the speed
9 Longitudinal joints offset by at least 15 of the paver must be coordinated to minimize
centimeters paver stopping and starting. By observing the
9 Transverse and longitudinal joints offset at surface texture behind the machine, and checking
least 15 cm from pavement marking lines the surface with a straightedge, a malfunction in
the paver or non-uniformity of mixture may be
400-12
SELF-PROPELLED PAVER OPERATION
detected. The Inspector must insist on prompt 4. Varying surface texture Insufficient mixing;
action to locate and correct any trouble that over mixing; overheating the mixture;
occurs. Some of the most common difficulties varying the dry mixing period; segregation of
met with and their possible causes are as follows: the mix in the trucks; worn or damaged
screed plate.
1. Wavy surface (short choppy waves) Worn or
poorly adjusted tracks or drive chains; the 5. Bleeding patches on the surface Asphalt not
truck driver setting the brakes too tightly; uniformly mixed; excessive moisture in the
excessive paving machine speed. mix; excess asphalt cement; too much tack
or prime coat.
2. Wavy surface (long waves) Excessive
variation in the amount of the mix carried in 6. Irregular rough spots in the pavement The
the auger box ahead of the tampers or roller is standing on the fresh surface; abrupt
screed; rolling too early; roller operating too reversing of the roller; trucks backing into
fast; over-controlling the screed. the paver; poor workmanship at the
transverse joints.
3. Excessively open surface texture Improper
adjustment of the tamper bar; improper When the paving machine is equipped with an
speed of the tamper bar; the screed plate is automatic grade control unit, it is essential that
rough or galled; excessive paving machine the paving crew and Inspector be thoroughly
speed. familiar with its operation and adjustments.
When this unit malfunctions, it tends to
compound its errors; therefore, the paver must be
stopped immediately, the pavement corrected,
400-13
and the malfunction found and corrected before

proceeding with paving operations. Essentially ROLLING SEQUENCE
the automatic grade control unit divorces the
screed from the upward and downward
movement of the paver caused by an irregular When paving in a single width, the first lane
surface. The floating arms that attach the screed placed shall be rolled in the following order:
to the paver are controlled by an automatically
adjusting grade control device. This unit has a 1. Transverse joints
sensor element that travels on a rigidly set or 2. Longitudinal joints
traveling guide line and provides proper control 3. Outside edge
of the screed for grade control. When required, 4. Initial or breakdown rolling, beginning on
automatic slope control sensors may be provided. the low side and progressing towards the
high side
401.03.08 Compaction 5. Intermediate rolling
6. Finish rolling
Rolling equipment for use in compacting asphalt
mixes shall meet the requirements of the When paving in echelon, five to ten centimeters
specifications. At least three rollers shall be of the edge which the second paver is following
required at all times: one self-propelled shall be left unrolled. Edges shall not be exposed
pneumatic-tired and two steel-wheeled rollers. As more than fifteen minutes without being rolled.
many additional rollers shall be used by the Particular attention shall be given to the
Contractor as necessary to provide the specified construction of the transverse and longitudinal
asphalt course density and surface characteristics joints in all courses.
in an orderly, efficient, and continuous manner.
Immediately after the asphalt mix has been The line of rolling shall not be changed suddenly
spread and struck off, the surface shall be or the direction of rolling reversed suddenly. If
checked and any irregularities adjusted and then rolling causes displacement of the material, the
compacted thoroughly and uniformly by rolling. affected areas shall be loosened at once with
hand tools and restored to the original grade of
To prevent adhesion of the mix to steel-wheeled the loose material before being re-rolled. Heavy
rollers, the wheels shall be kept properly equipment or rollers shall not be permitted to
moistened, but excess water will not be permitted stand on the finished surface before it has been
by the Engineer. compacted and has thoroughly cooled.
After the longitudinal joints and edges have been 1. Transverse Joints Transverse joints shall be
compacted, rolling shall start longitudinally at carefully constructed and thoroughly
the sides of the road and shall gradually progress compacted to provide a smooth riding
towards the center. On a super-elevated section, surface. Joints shall be checked with a
rolling shall begin on the low side and progress straight-edge to assure smoothness and true
to the high side, overlapping on successive trips alignment. Joints shall be formed with a
by at least one-half the width of tandem rollers bulkhead, such as a board, to provide a
and uniformly lapping each preceding track. The straight line and vertical face. If the joint has
rollers shall move at a slow but uniform speed been distorted by traffic or by other means, it
with the drive wheels nearest the paver. The shall be trimmed to line and the face shall be
speed shall not exceed 4.8 km/hr. for steel- painted with a thin coating of emulsified
wheeled rollers or 8.0 km/hr. for pneumatic-tired asphalt before the fresh material is placed
rollers. The operating speed shall be approved by against it. To obtain thorough compaction of
the Engineer. these joints, the material placed against the
400-14
joint shall be tightly pushed against the Care shall be exercised in consolidating the
vertical face with a steel-wheeled roller. The course along the entire length of the edges.
roller shall be placed on the previously Before it is compacted, the material along
compacted material transversely so that not the unsupported edges shall be slightly
more than 15 cm of the rear rolling wheel elevated with hand tools. This will permit the
rides on the edge of the joint. The roller shall full weight of the roller wheel to bear on the
be operated to pinch and press the mix into material to the extreme edges of the mat.
place at the transverse joint. The roller shall
continue to roll along this line, shifting its 4. Breakdown Rolling Breakdown rolling shall
position gradually across the joint, in 15 to immediately follow the rolling of the
20 cm increments, until the joint has been longitudinal joints and edges. Rollers shall be
rolled with the entire width of the roller operated as close to the paver as possible to
wheel. Rolling shall be continued until a obtain adequate density without causing
thoroughly compacted, neat joint is obtained. undue displacement. In no case shall the mix
temperature be allowed to drop below 107°C
2. Longitudinal Joints Longitudinal joints shall prior to breakdown rolling. If the breakdown
be rolled directly behind the paving roller is steel-wheeled, it shall be operated
operations. The first lane placed shall be true with the drive wheel nearest the finishing
to line and grade and have a vertical face. machine. Pneumatic-tired rollers may be
The material being placed in the abutting used as breakdown rollers.
lane shall then be tightly pushed against the
face of the previously placed lane. Before 5. Intermediate Rolling Pneumatic-tired rollers
rolling, the coarse aggregate in the material or steel-wheeled rollers, described in Clause
overlapping the joint shall be carefully 401.05, Rollers, of the Standard Specific-
removed with a rake and discarded. Rolling ations, shall be used for the intermediate
shall be performed with a steel-wheeled rolling. The intermediate rolling shall follow
roller. the breakdown rolling as closely as possible
and while the paving mix is still of a
The roller shall be shifted over onto the temperature that will result in maximum
previously placed lane so that not more than density from this operation. Rollers shall be
15 cm of the roller wheel rides on the edge of used continuously after the initial rolling
the newly laid lane. The rollers shall then be until all of the mix placed has been
operated to pinch and press the fine material thoroughly compacted. Turning of rollers on
gradually across the joint. Rolling shall be the hot paving mix which causes undue
continued until a thoroughly compacted, neat displacement will not be permitted by the
joint is obtained. Engineer.
When the abutting lane is not placed in the 6. Finish Rolling The finish rolling shall be
same day, or the joint is distorted during the performed with three-axle tandem rollers
day’s work by traffic or by other means, the unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
edge of the lane shall be carefully trimmed to Finished rolling shall be accomplished while
line, cleaned, and painted with a thin coating the material is still warm enough for the
of emulsified asphalt before the abutting lane removal of roller marks.
is placed.
All rolling operations shall be conducted in close
3. Edges The edges of the asphalt course shall sequence. In places inaccessible for the operation
be rolled concurrently with or immediately of standard rollers as specified, compaction shall
after rolling the longitudinal joint. be performed by manual or mechanical tampers
of such design as to give the desired density.
400-15
removal and replacement at the Contractor’s

PAVING OPERATION CHECKLIST expense if necessary and directed by the
Engineer.
9 Check the condition and adjustment of the 401.04 RECORDS AND REPORTS
paving machines and the rollers.
9 See that traffic control is organized and
functioning properly. Make sure that all The Joint Measurement Sheet and the Inspector’s
required signs are in place. Daily Report should thoroughly document the
9 Check the application of the tack coat. Do not completed and approved asphalt concrete
allow tacking of more surface than will be operations. This phase of the work includes
paved each day. Be sure that adjoining materials that are costly to place and compact
surfaces such as kerbs, manholes, etc., are and represent a significant portion of the value of
properly tacked. the overall construction Contract. Records for
9 Examine the pavement base to ensure that the
this work must reflect the importance of this
required patching and/or preleveling is done.
Make checks on paving depths or spread before
operation in every detail. The Inspector and
the beginning of the paving operations. Surveyor should check each stage of the
9 Make sure that cold transverse joints are cut operation as the work proceeds. Correction of
back to the vertical before continuing a lane. defects after placement may result in:
9 Check the transverse joint for smoothness and
appearance. • Loss of product integrity
9 Watch the trucks dumping into the paver hopper • Lower rideability of the wearing surface
for adverse effect on paver operation.
•
9 Check the temperature of the mixture at the
•
Poor appearance
Shorter service life
time of delivery to the paver and during the
compaction of the course.
9 Maintain a constant inspection of the mat The inspection staff must continually check the
behind the paver for signs of roughness or a work for conformance with the plans and
non-uniformity of mixture. specification requirements to ensure the outcome.
9 See that the longitudinal and transverse joints Never assuming that the work is proceeding
are raked and compacted properly. satisfactorily, but rather constantly proving that
9 Make frequent checks of the spread yield and it is. Progress of the work including inspections
depth.
9 Watch rolling operations. See that the best
made, instructions to the Contractor, noted
deficiencies with follow-up corrective actions,
rolling sequence is used to fit the conditions.
Watch for excessive speed of the rollers. Check and approvals given should be reported in detail
and adjust the amplitude and frequency of the by the Inspector. In addition, the Plant Inspector
vibrating rollers. should complete the Daily Bituminous Concrete
9 Keep records of truck loads used each day. Batch Plant Report and the Road Inspector
Check with the Plant Inspector concerning daily should complete the Asphalt Concrete Daily
totals. Field Inspection Report.
9 Make sure the job is in good shape at the end of
each day. See that all lights, barricades, etc., The Plant Inspector usually files the reports,
are properly placed. See that all signs not when required, with the Municipality. However
required during non-working hours are
the Road Inspector must measure the area paved
removed or covered.
each day and furnish this information to the Plant
Inspector, along with the number of loads or
After final rolling, the smoothness, levels, cross partial loads rejected or wasted. The records of
falls, density, and thickness shall be checked and the quantity of material produced and material
any irregularity of the surface exceeding the placed must agree and be properly documented
specified limits and any areas defective in to form an unquestionable basis for pay
texture, density, or composition shall be quantities.
corrected as directed by the Engineer, including
400-16
401.05 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 402.02.02 Cover Aggregate
The cover aggregate (sand) when required on

Quantities for asphalt paving should be
priming must comply with the Standard
measured and paid for according to the
Specifications, Section IV, Subsection 400.07.
requirements set forth in Sections IV-1 through
During the spreading of the sand on primed
IV-2 of the Standard Specifications. Quantity
bases, the Inspector is responsible for ensuring
measurements will be supported by the project
that no foreign matter is spread and left on the
records kept by the Resident Engineer. If
prime coat.
necessary, core samples may be taken to verify
thicknesses.
402.03 EQUIPMENT
402 PRIME COAT
All equipment proposed for use must be
402.01 GENERAL
inspected for compliance with the pertinent
requirements of the Standard Specifications. All
A prime coat consists of applying a low-viscosity material-carrying equipment must be calibrated
asphalt cement material that is covered by a light so that the quantities of material or materials
application of sand, if required. The prime coat used can be determined. Equipment, by which a
is placed at a specified rate per square meter. material is to be distributed or spread, must be
This material is placed directly upon the surface adjusted so that the material will be properly and
of a base or foundation course that is to receive uniformly placed. The inspection, calibration,
some type of asphalt concrete wearing surface. and adjustment of the major parts of the various
Its purpose is to penetrate the existing surface pieces of equipment that may be proposed for
and to coat and bond any loose mineral particles use and the determination of important values for
to the surface. In addition, a prime coat is the equipment is as follows:
applied to provide a dust-free surface, and to
promote adhesion between the surface and any 402.03.01 Liquid Asphalt Distributor
successive course of material.
1. Tank The tank consists of an insulated shell
402.02 MATERIALS with flues, a thermometer, baffle or surge
plates, a manhole, and an overflow pipe.
Capacities of distributor tanks vary
402.02.01 Bitumen
considerably. All distributors are equipped
with a float-type gauge and a measuring
The Standard Specifications designate the
stick for determining the quantity of material
following liquid bituminous materials that are to
in the tank. The measuring stick should be
be used as a prime coat:
marked in increments of not more than 40
liters. To control and check the rate of
• Grade MC 70
application and, in some instances, to
• Other types and grades of material as may be
provide a basis of measurement for payment,
specified in the Particular Specifications.
the Contractor should be required to furnish
calibration data, signed by a person of
At the Contractor’s option, he may use any of
recognized authority. The statement should
the above types of material unless a specific
identify the distributor and give the interior
material is required by the plans or Particular
dimensions and a description of the tank.
Specifications. Types and grades of materials
The tank should be inspected to see that it
other than those specified above may be allowed
has not been changed from the dimensions
if the Contractor can show that they perform just
and description contained in the certification
as well and approval is obtained in writing from
statement. If the distributor is new or if the
the Engineer.
statement and calibration data cannot be
furnished, a calibration of the tank to relate
400-17
the depth of the material will be necessary. the data that it is designed to measure. The
The calibration is based upon the number of wheel should be maintained in a clean
liters contained in the tank as determined by condition because if material is allowed to
the measuring stick. build up and remain on the wheel, incorrect
results will be obtained.
2. Heating System The heating system consists
of one or two burners and an equal number 5. Spray Bar To ensure proper working
of heating flues. Each burner emits a flame condition of the spray bar, the following
directly into a flue that transfers heat to the inspections and adjustments must be made:
asphalt cement material. The heating system
should be checked to make certain that it can • Nozzles: The nozzles should be
maintain the asphalt cement material at the removed from the spray bar, cleaned,
required application temperature. When and examined for size, wear, and
being heated, the asphalt cement material damage to the edges of the nozzle or the
must be circulated. Care should be taken nozzle opening. Uniform distribution of
that the safe maximum heat of the material the asphalt material depends on the
in the tank is not exceeded. nozzles being in good condition and
being the proper size. Usually, the
3. Circulating System The circulating system smallest size nozzle available for a
consists of a pump and a line passing distributor will provide the most uniform
through the distributor tank to the spray bar distribution. The nozzles should be set
and to the hand spray. The pump should be so that the slots are at the angle with the
checked to make certain that it can circulate spray bar recommended by the
the asphalt material through the tank and the manufacturer of the distributor.
spray bar. The pump should also be capable
of developing and maintaining a constant, • Spray Bar Height: The height of the
uniform pressure along the entire length of spray bar should be set so that the exact
the spray bar. This uniform pressure is number of laps of bituminous material
important so that an equal quantity of required will be obtained. The height for
material will be sprayed from each nozzle a double lap can be determined by
without atomizing the asphalt material or closing every other nozzle, operating the
emitting a distorted fan. distributor at the proper pump speed or
pressure, and raising or lowering the
The control for the valve system, by which spray bar by not more than 1.5
the discharge of asphalt material from the centimeters at a time. This procedure is
nozzles is controlled, should be inspected continued until it is determined by visual
and adjusted, if necessary. There should be observation that exactly one single lap of
no slack in the linkage from the control to the material is being applied. For a triple
valve system so that all the nozzles will be lap, close the second and third, fifth and
completely opened or completely closed sixth, etc., nozzles and follow the above
immediately when the control is operated. procedure. The distribution vehicle
The pump tachometer or pressure gauge, should also be equipped with a hand held
which registers the pump discharge, should hose and nozzle for spraying areas that
be checked for accuracy. are inaccessible to the vehicle.
4. Measuring Wheel A measuring wheel • Spread: To ensure uniform distribution,

consists of a rubber-tired wheel, mounted on the transverse spread and the
a retractable frame, and connected to a dial longitudinal spread should be checked by
in the cab of the truck by a cable. The any of several acceptable methods. The
measuring wheel should be checked to variation should not exceed 10 percent.
determine whether it accurately registers all
400-18
402.03.02 Power Broom 402.04.04 Application of Asphalt Material
A power broom should be used for cleaning the Close control should be exercised over the
existing surface in preparation for construction. operation of the distributor so that the material
All loose material, dust, dirt, caked clay, and will be applied uniformly. If the distributor has
other foreign material should be removed to the been properly inspected and adjusted, the
full width of application. Particular care must be material will be applied uniformly in the
taken in cleaning the outer edges of the width to transverse direction unless one or more of the
be primed. nozzles become clogged. To obtain the required
uniform rate of distribution in the longitudinal
402.03.03 Water Truck direction, the circulating pump and distributor
must be operated at the proper constant speed.
If the base surface is quite dry, water may be The length of spread for each distributor load of
sprinkled on it lightly from a water truck. If material should be determined and marked on the
water is applied, the base is to be rolled prior to road as an aid to obtaining the required rate of
the priming operation. application.
402.04 ROAD OPERATIONS As the amount of prime coat required varies with
the surface texture and density of the underlying
layer, site trials will be carried out to determine
402.04.01 Repair of Defects
the application rate desirable to achieve
maximum penetration with a minimal amount of
On new subbase courses, repairing the surface
‘puddling’ occurring after spraying, and within
will seldom be necessary. In this instance, the
the 0.25 to 0.50 kg/m² specified limit.
subbase course should have been constructed to
the specified tolerance when finished. Any
Prior to spraying, the correct positioning of the
defects found in the newly constructed subbase
spray bar nozzles will be checked to ensure
course must be repaired before any application
uniform coverage with no streaky application
of prime coat is made.
pattern. A light spray of water shall be applied
just prior to prime spraying.
402.04.02 Traffic Control
NO PRIME COAT MAY BE APPLIED
Traffic control should be thoroughly discussed at
WITHOUT THE PRESENCE OF A
the preconstruction conference. At this time,
TECHNICIAN AND INSPECTOR.
definite traffic control procedures should be
established that provide maximum safety for the
A standing start spray will not normally be
workers and the traveling public, with the least
allowed. If a standing start is necessary,
interruption of the work. All traffic control
cardboard or other absorbent material must be
devices and procedures used to direct traffic
placed under the spray bar area in order that the
through the construction area should be
prime spray is commenced with the applicator
according to the Manual on Uniform Traffic
moving at the pre-calculated speed.
Control Devices (MUTCD) and of the type
shown on the plans and approved by the
The temperature of the prime will be checked to
Municipality.
ensure that it is between 60 and 85 degrees C
and noted on the appropriate form. Prime coat
402.04.03 Weather Limitations
should not be applied more than 48 hours
preceding placement of asphaltic concrete
The prime coat should not be applied when the
paving.
existing surface is wet, when it is foggy, raining,
or threatening rain. Temperature limitations
The transverse joints on prime coats should be
should be according to the specifications.
made carefully. This can be done most
successfully by starting and stopping each
400-19
application of asphalt cement material on square meter, upon the existing pavement surface
building paper. Each successive application to ensure a thorough bond between the old and
should overlap the end of the preceding one by 1 new courses. Tack coats are used primarily
centimeter to avoid a gap in the surface. By between layers of asphaltic concrete.
using the building paper, there will be less
chance of creating puddled areas needing to be 403.02 MATERIALS
rectified.
Before use, all materials must be inspected,
The longitudinal joints for prime coats that are
tested for compliance with the requirements of
not placed to the full width of the roadway in a
the specifications, and approved by the
single pass should also be carefully controlled.
Municipality.
Since using building paper on these joints is not
practical, slight overlapping the adjacent passes
403.03 EQUIPMENT
is better than to have a gap in the surface.
402.05 RECORDS AND REPORTS Refer to Section 402.03 of this manual for the
applicable equipment.
Data concerning the construction operations for
403.04 ROAD OPERATIONS
prime coats should be recorded in detail on the
Prime/Tack Coat Application form (SM-34). In
doing so, the necessary data is recorded so that 403.04.01 Surface Cleaning
the final pay quantities can be determined. Both
the Inspector and Laboratory Technician have The existing surface must be cleaned just before
responsibility for the proper application of prime the applying of the asphalt material. All foreign
coat. materials such as paper and mud should be
removed and the entire surface should be
402.06 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT thoroughly broomed to remove dirt and dust.
403.04.02 Traffic Control

Measurement and payment for prime coat should
be according to the recommendations set forth in
Traffic control should be thoroughly discussed at
the Standard Specifications, Section IV-3,
the preconstruction conference. At this time,
Subsection 403.04.
definite traffic control procedures should be
established that provide maximum safety for the
Two methods of the measurement of the
workers and the traveling public, with the least
application rate could be used. The first method
interruption of the work. All traffic control
would be by the physical measurement of the
devices and procedures used to direct traffic
total amount of prime used in Kgs, using the
through the construction area should be
applicator tank dip stick and dividing this figure
according to the Manual on Uniform Traffic
by the total number of square meters covered.
Control Devices (MUTCD) and of the type
The other method would be carried out by a lab
shown on the plans and approved by the
technician by using a minimum of three, 1 square
Municipality.
meter papers (or similar) and weighing each
before and after prime application to calculate
403.04.03 Weather Limitations
the application rate.
An important factor that must be considered
403 TACK COAT when applying a tack coat is the weather.
403.01 GENERAL Construction operations should not continue
when the existing surface is wet, when it is
foggy, raining, or threatening rain. Temperature
A tack coat consists of applying a liquid asphalt
material, at the specified application rate per
400-20
limitations should be according to the road as an aid to obtaining the required rate of
specifications. application.
403.04.04 Coverage 403.05 RECORDS AND REPORTS
The tack coat must be applied to the width and

Data concerning the construction operations for
alignment required by the lift of asphalt material
tack coats should be recorded in sufficient detail
to be laid. Unless otherwise specified, it is
in a bound field book. In doing so, the necessary
recommended that the tack coat be applied 15
progress reports and the final pay quantities can
centimeters wider than the proposed width of
be determined at a later time. Records must be
asphalt to be laid. This is necessary to ensure
kept in such detail and such a manner that the
that the tack coat exists under the full width of
final pay quantities can be proved by qualified
the proposed lift of asphalt material.
personnel with a minimum of assistance from the
project personnel. Form SM-34 is to be used for
403.04.05 Application of Asphalt Material
all tack coat applications and completed by the
responsible Inspector and Materials Technician.
Tack coat between base course layers, and
between the last base course and first wearing
403.06 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
course layer, should be kept to an absolute
minimum. Tack coat between wearing course
layers should not normally be used, as the Measurement and payment for tack coat should
asphalt laying schedule should be so planned as be according to the recommendations set forth in
to ensure that the next layer is applied within 24 the Standard Specifications, Section IV-4,
to 48 hours. If because of traffic or construction Subsection 404.04.
scheduling, or other reasons, a tack coat has to
be used between wearing course layers it should, Method of measurement of temperature (10-60
where practical, be hand sprayed with the degrees C) and application rate are the same as
lightest application possible to ensure a bond for prime coat. Uniformity of cover and the
between the layers. Permissible limits are 0.1-0.5 avoidance of “standing start” applications should
kg/m². be stringently applied. A sample of the tack coat
should be taken by a Lab Technician and
NO TACK COAT MAY BE APPLIED submitted to the central laboratory to check for
UNLESS THE CONTRACTOR GIVES A over dilution with water.
FULL 24 HOURS NOTICE IN WRITING
OF THE INTENT TO APPLY TACK 404 COLD MILLING ASPHALT
COAT. THE PRESENCE OF A PAVEMENT
LABORATORY TECHNICIAN AND
404.01 GENERAL
INSPECTOR IS MANDATORY.
Close control should be exercised over the Cold milling is the process of removing all
operation of the distributor so that the material and/or portions of an existing asphalt pavement
will be applied uniformly. If the distributor has to accomplish the following:
been properly inspected and adjusted, the
material will be applied uniformly in the • Remove a distressed pavement
transverse direction unless one or more of the • Improve the roadway profile
nozzles become clogged. To obtain the required • Restore the roadway cross section
uniform rate of distribution in the longitudinal • Improve drainage
direction, the circulating pump and distributor
must be operated at the proper constant speed. The pavement is removed at locations, depths,
The length of spread for each distributor load of and widths according to the typical sections
material should be determined and marked on the indicated in the Contract Documents or as
directed by the Resident Engineer. This work
400-21
usually includes removal of the milled material and transported to designated locations according
from the highway right-of-way and cleaning the to the project specifications.
remaining pavement surface so it may be suitable
for maintaining traffic, if necessary, before The milled pavement surface should be
paving. Unless specified otherwise by the thoroughly cleaned of all loose aggregate
Contract Documents, the reclaimed pavement particles, dust, and other objectionable material
becomes the property of the Contractor. by using power brooms, power blowers, power
vacuums, or other means. Oversize pieces of
404.02 EQUIPMENT pavement or loose aggregate material should be
removed and disposed of at the approved waste
disposal site.
Equipment for cold milling includes a self-
propelled milling machine capable of removing
The pavement removal operations should be
the existing pavement to the required depth of cut
conducted to minimize the amount of dust being
and slope. The milling machine should be
emitted. The operation should be planned and
equipped with a grade control system that will
conducted so that it is safe for persons and
automatically control the longitudinal profile and
property next to the work as well as the traveling
cross slope of the milled surface. This is
public.
achieved by referencing from one or more skid
sensors moving along the pavement surface or
At the end of any day’s production, a smooth
from a preset fixed reference line. The machine
transition to the existing pavement should be
should be capable of leaving a uniform surface
achieved.
suitable for maintaining traffic, if necessary,
without excessive damage to the underlying
404.04 RECORDS AND REPORTS
pavement structure. The milling machine may be
equipped with an integral loading means to
remove the material being cut from the roadway Project records should reflect a complete
and discharge the cuttings into a truck in one summary of the construction operations done on
operation. the project and, with proper documentation, form
an unquestionable basis for pay quantities.
Additional equipment may be necessary to These records should include project diaries,
remove the pavement near manholes, water measurements of area and depths for volume
valves, curbs, and other obstructions. calculations of work completed.
The milling equipment should be equipped with a 405 RECYCLING ASPHALT

means to limit the amount of dust escaping from PAVEMENT
the removal operation.
405.01 GENERAL
This operation usually includes:
The milling operation should be continually
checked to determine that the proper depth of • Milling the existing asphalt pavement.
milling has been achieved, and that the surface
texture is free from longitudinal ridges and has a • Removal of the pavement from the roadway
uniform pattern. A change in the resulting before or after pulverization.
surface may be achieved by varying the forward
• Processing of material through a central hot
speed of the milling machine or the speed of the
mix plant with the addition of virgin material
mandrel.
or a modifier.
The milled material may be windrowed behind • Lay down and compaction.
the miller or directly loaded into hauling units
400-22
Two approaches have been used to size the 405.02.01 Recycled Material
material before recycling in a central hot mix
plant: The recycled material should consist of the
existing asphalt pavement (aggregates and
• The pavement can be reduced in size in-place asphalt). Normally a maximum of 50 percent
and then hauled to the central plant. can be recycled through a batch plant and 70
percent through a drum mixer.
• The pavement can be removed from the site
and sizing can be done with equipment 405.02.02 New Aggregate
normally associated with aggregate
processing. The virgin aggregate should be added as required
to meet job-mix specifications.
Plant sizing can be done with conventional,
fixed, and portable crushing and screening 405.02.03 Asphalt Modifier
equipment. The pavement is normally ripped
and broken to a size suitable to be received by The asphalt modifier or recycling agent should
the primary crusher before loading onto the haul be capable of giving the required mix properties.
units. Using grid rollers or other types of
equipment to produce a properly sized material 405.02.04 New Asphalt
on the roadway before hauling to the central
plant may prove to be economical. Additional new asphalt, as required, should be
added to meet the job-mix design.
Equipment to centrally process recycled material
can be separated into at least three general 405.02.05 Recycled Mixture
categories:
The recycled mixture should be a uniform
1. Direct flame heating mixture of recycled material, new aggregate, and
2. Superheated aggregate asphalt (as required), and asphalt modifier (as
3. Without heat required). The mixture is then combined to have
the properties of a new asphalt pavement
Central-plant recycling techniques are different composition complying with the job
from the other methods of recycling in that the specifications.
material is removed from the roadway and mixed
either cold or hot at a central location. 405.03 EQUIPMENT
Additional asphalt, recycling agents, cement,
lime, aggregate, or other materials may be added
1. Asphalt heating and mixing plants designed
at the plant.
to produce a uniform mixture within the job-
mix tolerances. Many existing hot mix plants
405.02 MATERIALS AND MIX DESIGN
can be modified to produce the recycled
mixture. These modifications generally
The mixture design process for central plant involve new cold feed bins with continuous
recycling requires the determination of both the weighing devices.
type and amount of asphalt material to be used.
If asphalt is to be the binder, the central 2. An asphalt paver that can spread the mixture
laboratory should determine the need for a to the thickness and width specified, true to
modifier recycling agent and/or the quantity of the line, grade, and crown shown on the
asphalt material. This can be determined only by plans.
detailed laboratory testing. Samples of the
existing asphalt surface should be obtained and 3. Haul trucks.
subjected to the standard series of tests.
4. An asphalt distributor.
400-23
5. Rollers. unquestionable basis for pay quantities. These

records should include the following:
6. A power broom.
• Project diaries.
7. Aggregate processing equipment and milling,
• Tests performed.
grinding, or pulverization machines,
• Materials received.
depending on the process used to size the
aggregate material. • Measurements of materials used on the
project.
Descriptions, inspections, and use of this • As-built drawings.
equipment are outlined in Section 401.03 of this
manual. Test reports and progress reports should be filed,
as required, with the Municipality. The reports
405.04 PLANT OPERATIONS should reflect the quality and quantity of
materials incorporated in the work.
Plant operations to centrally hot process the Asphalt concrete operations shall be reported
recycled material can be separated into at least daily by the Inspectors assigned to the work.
two general categories: direct flame heating and The Plant Inspector should complete the Daily
superheated aggregate. Bituminous Concrete Batch Plant Report. The
Road Inspector should complete the Asphalt
405.04.01 Direct Flame Heating Concrete Daily Field Inspection Report.
Direct flame heating is typically done with a 406 SURFACE RECYCLING

drum mixer in which all materials are mixed
simultaneously in a revolving drum with a flame 406.01 GENERAL
at one end. Problems with air quality have led to
several modifications, such as the addition of This operation usually includes reworking the
heat shields and split feeds. surface of a pavement to a depth of less than 3
centimeters by heater-planer, heater-scarifier,
Split feed drum mixers introduce virgin hot-milling, cold planing, cold milling devices, or
aggregate at the flame end of the drum. Near the a combination of these processes. The work
midpoint of the drum, the reclaimed asphalt involves a continuous, single pass, multi-step
pavement material is introduced and is heated by process that may also incorporate new materials.
the hot gases as well and by heat transfer from
the superheated new aggregate. 406.02 MATERIALS
405.04.02 Superheated Aggregate

The design of mixtures associated with surface
Superheated aggregate can be used to heat recycling techniques is limited by the nature of
reclaimed asphalt pavements. Standard batch the operation. Heater-scarification operations
plants can be used for this approach. should be carefully evaluated to ensure that the
mixture produced will meet the job-mix design.
Plant operations are as outlined in Section This can be determined only by detailed
401.01 of this manual. laboratory testing. Samples of the existing
asphalt surface should be obtained and subjected
405.05 RECORDS AND REPORTS to the standard series of tests. To meet the
specifications, a rejuvenating agent, softer grade
of asphalt, or additional aggregate may be added
Project records should reflect a complete to the existing asphalt surface.
summary of materials incorporated and
construction operations done on the project and, Surface milling and grinding operations do not
with proper documentation, form an require a mix design unless the millings are to be
400-24
reused. Standard mix design methods can be 406.04.02 Heater Scarifying

used to design mixes using milled materials.
Heater scarifying operations consist of heating
406.03 EQUIPMENT and scarifying the surface, adding additional
materials, if required, and rolling. The basic
heater-scarification-overlay procedure is as
The Inspector should make a personal inspection
follows:
of the Contractor’s equipment. By making this
inspection before beginning the paving 1. A large, mobile combustion chamber is used
operations, obvious deficiencies in the condition to heat the pavement to soften the asphalt
of the equipment may be discovered and surface.
corrected. This inspection will aid in avoiding
delays once the work is underway and it will 2. Closely spaced scarifier teeth are then used
ensure that the best possible surface finish can be to plow continuous shallow furrows in the
obtained. Some of the more important softened materials.
equipment that has not been discussed above is
listed below: 3. An asphalt overlay is placed.
406.03.01 Heater-Planer 4. The overlay is compacted to firmly bond the

new overlay to the older pavement structure.
The heater-planer consists of a mobile heating
unit followed by a planing device. The heating Note: Steps 1, 2, and 3 may be accomplished
and planing devices may be contained in one with one combined machine followed by step 4.
mobile unit, or may be two pieces of equipment. In some processes, steps 1 and 3 are combined,
followed by a compaction of the heater scarified
406.03.02 Heater Scarifier surface, followed by a traditional asphalt
overlay.
The heater scarifier consists of a mobile heating
unit followed by closely spaced scarifier teeth. 406.04.03 Surface Milling and Grinding
The heater and scarifier are contained in one unit
of equipment. This operation involves the removal of the
surface of a pavement by a hot milling, cold
406.03.03 Milling and Grinding Machines milling, or a cold planing machine. The depth of
removal is variable and may be as great as 12
Surface milling and grinding equipment should centimeters in a single pass. The millings or
be capable of removing pavement to a depth of at shavings are to be removed from the construction
least 25 centimeters and a width from a few site.
centimeters to 4 meters.
406.04.04 Miscellaneous Pavement Repairs
This work usually consists of the types of repairs
to an existing pavement necessary to correct
406.04.01 Heater Planing structural failures, grade elevations, drainage,
and surface deterioration, and/or to prepare the
Heater planing is used primarily to restore existing pavement surface before placing
pavement longitudinal grade, transverse cross asphaltic concrete overlays or seal coats.
slope, and to correct minor irregularities.
Heater-planer operations usually consist of The Inspector should become aware of the
separate mobile units for heating and planing the procedures set forth in the Standard
pavement followed by rolling. Often additional Specifications.
new asphalt pavement is applied to the new
heater planed surface and rolled simultaneously.
400-25
406.05 RECORDS 407.03 MATERIALS
Project records should reflect a complete The materials required for the replacement of
summary of materials incorporated in the asphaltic pavement courses shall match existing
construction operations done on the project and, materials and shall be as specified in Section II-
with proper documentation, form an 7, Subgrade Preparation, Section III, Subbase
unquestionable basis for pay quantities. These and Base Courses, and Section IV, Asphalt
records should include the following: Works, of the Standard Specifications.
• Project diaries. 407.04 EQUIPMENT

• Tests performed.
• Materials received. The major items of equipment for asphaltic
• Measurements of materials used on the pavement replacement shall conform to Section
project. IV, Asphalt Works, of the Standard
• As-built drawings. Specifications.
Test and progress reports should be filed, as 407.05 REPAIR METHOD

required. These reports should reflect the quality
and quantity of materials incorporated in the
work. After approval by the Engineer of the excavation
backfilled to subgrade level, the existing
406.06 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT pavement, base, and subbase courses shall be
removed to a minimum of 60 centimeters from
the edge of the backfilled trench, or to non-
Section IV, Asphalt Works, and the related disturbed pavement areas, whichever is further,
subsections of the Standard Specifications or to locations as directed by the Engineer.
provide detailed instructions regarding the Underlying existing geotextile fabric shall be
measurement and payment for the work and protected and laid back over the remaining
materials presented in this section of the pavement while the replacement subgrade is
Construction Supervision Manual. prepared. The existing subgrade and top of the
backfilled trench shall be excavated 30
407 ASPHALT CONCRETE centimeters and the surface compacted to at least
REPAIRS 95% of the maximum Modified Proctor Density
using mechanical compactors. The excavation
407.01 GENERAL
shall be filled to the original subgrade level with
aggregate subbase material, gradation ‘B’,
This section includes the procedures for general compacted in not-to-exceed 15 centimeter thick
repairs and reinstatement of asphalt concrete layers at optimum moisture content to not less
following utility installations or maintenance than 95% of the maximum Modified Proctor
operations. Density. Replace the protected existing
geotextile fabric over the newly prepared
407.02 REMOVAL subgrade and install new geotextile fabric such
that a minimum 30 centimeter overlap is made
Asphaltic concrete pavement courses shall be between the existing and replacement geotextile
removed by saw cutting with approved power fabric.
pavement cutting machines, along straight lines
to the extent required, and shall be broken out, Replacement of aggregate base courses shall be
cleaned of all deleterious substances, and made to match existing by carefully compacting
stockpiled or disposed of in areas approved by against undisturbed existing courses to match the
the Engineer. existing levels and densities. Installation of
replacement aggregate base course shall meet the
400-26
requirements of Section III, Subbase and Base raise the asphalt wearing surface back to match
Courses, of the Standard Specifications. The the proper grade, as follows:
replaced aggregate base course layer shall be
primed with an bitumen emulsion, prime coat, at 1. Cut and remove the upper 3 centimeters of
the application rate approved by the Engineer. the pavement starting just in back of the
depression. Haul away and dispose of all
Replacement of any damaged or removed removed pavement.
subbase drainage system piping, aggregate
bedding, and geotextile fabric shall match 2. Wire broom clean the surface and lightly
existing and be placed in accordance with tack coat the surface and paint the edges of
Section 604.04, Other Related Works, of the the cut with bituminous emulsion at the rate
Standard Specifications. of 0.25 to 0.50 kilograms of tack coat per
square meter of surface area.
After approval of the compacted aggregate
subbase layers by the Engineer, the individual 3. Fill the cut with Type II wearing course hot
asphaltic pavement layers shall be saw cut back mix asphaltic concrete and compact with a
to produce steps a minimum of 60 centimeters steel-wheeled roller by first compacting the
wide between layers of the existing pavement. hot asphalt concrete 15 centimeters from the
two traffic edges and then by rolling in the
The faces of the layers shall be saw cut straight direction of traffic. The drive wheel of the
and vertical and shall be wire-broomed and roller shall be in the forward position,
painted with bituminous emulsion, tack coat, without vibratory action.
immediately prior to laying the replacement
4. Check the level of the patch with a straight
asphaltic courses.
edge and make corrections as required.
Asphaltic courses shall be installed in
408 SAND-ASPHALT COURSES
thicknesses and compositions to match the
existing pavement layers as far as is practical or
as otherwise directed by the Engineer. Layers 408.01 SAND-ASPHALT SUBBASE
shall be laid and compacted in accordance with
the requirements of Section IV, Asphalt Works,
The sand-asphalt subbase course is located
of the Standard Specifications with prime and
immediately above the subgrade and consists of
tack coats as directed by the Engineer. In no
material of a superior quality to that which is
case shall a single layer of asphalt paving be laid
generally used for subgrade construction. This
greater than 8 centimeters in thickness, unless
course is composed of a mixture of mineral
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
aggregate, mineral filler, and asphalt binder
heated and mixed in a stationary central mix
The top asphaltic layer shall be finished level and
plant. This course is placed on a prepared
smooth with the existing pavement, and under no
surface in various depth and width combinations.
circumstances shall the road be opened to traffic
The depths of the sand-asphalt subbase course is
before all replacement of asphaltic courses and
designated on the plans and cross sections. It is
markings have been completed and approved in
the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the
writing by the Engineer.
placement of this subbase course is according to
the plans, cross sections, and the Standard
If in the opinion of the Engineer, the replaced
Specifications. It is the duty of the Inspector to
asphaltic pavement and/or underlying trench
call to the attention of the Resident Engineer all
backfill settle to unacceptable levels over time
conditions that appear to require changes in the
(where the surface grade has settled more than
subbase course depth due to unforeseen
10mm below the design elevation, when checked
conditions found after construction has started.
with a straight edge), the Contractor shall make
repairs by applying an asphalt “skin patch” to
400-27
Materials used to construct the sand-asphalt As with all asphaltic base course construction,
subbase shall meet the requirements of Section the Road Inspector should ensure that succeeding
III of the Standard Specifications. courses are not placed until the previously placed
course has cooled to the extent that it will not be
Further instructions to Plant and Road Inspectors distorted by equipment.
regarding testing, plant operations, and road
operations are the same as for the other asphalt
SAND-ASPHALT COURSES
courses discussed above.
408.02 PLANT MIX SAND-ASPHALT

Within the Municipality, there are three types of
BASE COURSES
sand-asphalt subbase or base courses that might
be used. Sand-asphalt (Type A), Sand-asphalt
Sand-asphalt base courses consist of a plant (Type B), and Sand-asphalt (Type C). The
mixed uniform combination of asphalt cement, requirements for each of these types are outlined
coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, and other in the Standard Specifications, Section III-3,
materials. All types of plant mixes, whether open Subsection 303.03. All sand-asphalt subbase
graded or fine graded, are types of asphalt courses shall comply with the requirements of
concrete with essentially the same procedure in sand-asphalt (Type B) unless otherwise specified
mixing and placing. in the Particular Specifications, shown on the
Drawings, or directed by the Engineer.
400-28
SECTION 500 Inspectors assigned to concrete work should be

thoroughly familiar with the plans,
CONCRETE WORKS
specifications, special conditions, construction
details, and sequence of work. Before the start
501 GENERAL of any major concrete placement, a meeting
High quality concrete construction must be should be arranged between the Contractor’s
durable and possess a structural soundness so supervisory personnel, the Resident Engineer,
that the structures or pavements can withstand: and the inspection forces. The purpose of this
meeting is to discuss the sources of materials,
• Destructive forces of traffic handling of materials, plant site, equipment,
• Moisture penetration methods of operations, and specification
• Temperature extremes requirements. Minutes of the meeting should be
• Corrosive soil conditions written by the Resident Engineer and copies sent
• Weathering effects to the appropriate persons.
It is essential that only specified materials be 502 MATERIALS

used and that the equipment, methods, and 502.01 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
procedures are satisfactory in every respect.
Therefore, the Resident Engineer and the
Inspectors assigned to a project involving the Section V and other applicable Sections and
placement of concrete must realize that they have Clauses of the Standard Specifications contain
a great responsibility. They are responsible for specific requirements for materials to be used in
building a project according to the Contract that concrete works. Materials are to be delivered,
will render many years of service. In addition, stored, and handled to ensure the preservation of
they are responsible for the expenditure of a their quality and fitness for the Works.
considerable amount of money for work that is Materials that do not comply with the
finished in a matter of hours. There is little requirements of the Standard Specifications are
chance for revision, repair, or rectifying errors to be rejected by the Resident Engineer. These
once the concrete has hardened. If rejected, the materials are to be removed immediately from
Contractor is obligated to remove and replace it. the site of the Works.
All structures, of whatever category, require care 502.02 CONCRETE CLASSES

in the staking. The key to error free work is a
staking method that provides for double checking Within the Municipality there are six classes of
that will be independent of the original work. concrete that are commonly used. The following
Such methods will provide the objective check description is taken from the Standard
sought and bring measurement and instrument Specifications and reflects the mix designations
errors to the surface at a time when corrections and strength requirements for each class of
are not costly. Care and attention to details is concrete. The approximate volumes of the
also needed in the inspection of structure components and weights are provided as an aid
construction. The larger structures are viewed as to the Resident Engineer in determining the trial
monuments and as such they are expected to be mix. The minimum crushing strength of the
strong, durable, and to have graceful lines and an Work Test Cubes listed in the Table 500.01 for
attractive appearance. The Inspector must be 7 day and 28 day strengths must be strictly
constantly alert to any violations of the plans and followed.
specifications throughout the construction stages.
He should constantly question the Contractor’s
operations and methods to build confidence in the
execution of the work.
500-1
Table 500.01
Minimum Concrete Strength
Class of Concrete
Requirements K140 K250 K335 K415 K455 K500
Minimum crushing strength
Kg/cm² 140 250 335 415 455 500
Preliminary Test Cubes at 7 Days
Kg/cm² 100 185 250 310 345 375
Work Test Cubes at 7 Days
Kg/cm² 185 335 445 555 605 665
Preliminary Test Cubes at 28 Days
Kg/cm² 140 250 335 415 455 500
Work Test Cubes at 28 Days
Slump range (mm) 60-120 60-120 60-120 60-120 60-120 60-120
Water cement ratio (max) 0.50 0.45 0.42 0.42 0.40 0.38
Minimum cement content 220 300 400 425 435 445
Kg/m³
The concrete class for each individual structure 502.02.04 Concrete Class K415
or component is specified in the Standard
Specifications. General usage is indicated as High strength structural concrete used for all
follows: post-tensioned structures.
502.02.01 Concrete Class K140 502.02.05 Concrete Class K455 and K500
Utility concrete is used for mud slabs, blindings, Special types of structural concrete are used on
and non-reinforced sections. structures and at locations as indicated on the
Drawings and in the Particular Specifications.
502.02.02 Concrete Class K250
502.03 MIX DESIGN APPROVAL
Basic structural concrete used for all bridge
substructures including footings, piers,
Before any concrete is allowed for use on the
abutments, wingwalls, and approach slabs. Uses
project, samples of all material that is to be used
on other reinforced sections include: barriers,
in the mix are to be submitted to the Resident
parapet walls, retaining walls, light pole
Engineer for testing. The samples will be tested
foundations, and traffic signal foundations.
in the site laboratory under the direction of the
Resident Engineer and according to the Standard
502.02.03 Concrete Class K335
Specifications. The Contractor is not to have
any materials delivered to the site until he has
Higher strength structural concrete used for non-
received written approval from the Resident
post-tensioned superstructure deck slabs,
Engineer.
diaphragms, and sidewalks where bridge decks
are cast on prestressed girders.
Once the Contractor has received the Resident
Engineer’s written approval of the individual
material components, he is required to submit a
500-2
proposed mix design for the Resident Engineer’s aggregate should be carefully washed before the
approval. The mix design is to be proportioned batching operation to remove any airborne
by weight and based upon trial mixes that were chlorides.
conducted with the approved materials for the
specified class of concrete for the project. The Regardless of whether aggregates are tested at
Resident Engineer’s approval of the mix design the point of production or at the job site, a test
is based upon tests performed according to the report showing numerical results must be
Standard Specifications. If approved, the available. This report is to show that the
Resident Engineer will inform the Contractor in aggregates are acceptable before being
writing. If the Contractor’s mix is not approved, incorporated in the work.
the Resident Engineer should advise the
Contractor of areas of non-compliance and Cement must be handled and stored in a manner
suggested modifications for achieving to prevent loss, wetting, or contamination. It is
compliance. usually furnished from calibrated bins at the
cement plant. If there is no documentation
The Contractor is required to arrange submittal accompanying the shipment of cement indicating
of the samples and mix design as early as that it has been tested, a preliminary test sample
possible. No concrete work is to be allowed until must be submitted according to the requirements
written approval from the Resident Engineer is of Section V of the Standard Specifications.
received by the Contractor. Should any changes Different types of cement must not be
in the attributes or source of materials used for intermingled or used in place of the type
the approved mix occur, the Contractor is specified.
responsible for submitting new samples and a
new mix design to the Resident Engineer for Potable water is acceptable for use in concrete
approval. unless it contains sugar. Water of unknown
quality should be tested and found acceptable
The Resident Engineer or his Inspectors should before incorporating it into the mix. All water is
take samples of the work mix frequently to to be checked for pH levels, chlorides, and
monitor compliance with the approved mix temperature.
design.
The hauling of mixing water should be done in
502.04 HANDLING MATERIALS clean, covered containers. Assurance of using
acceptable water is the responsibility of the
Inspector for on-the-job mixing.
In order for the necessary aggregate stockpiles to
be built without the overlapping of different
Admixtures, except those used for air-entraining,
materials, adequate storage facilities need to be
should not be used without obtaining prior
provided. Stockpiles should be formed on bases
approval of the Resident Engineer. Samples of
approved by the Resident Engineer and should be
the proposed retarders or admixtures, unless
built in layers not exceeding 1.5 meters in
previously approved, must be submitted before
thickness, with each layer being completed
use.
before the next one is started. Conical stockpiles
built by discharging the coarse aggregate at one
502.05 CONCRETE BATCH PLANT
point or end-dumping over the sides of stockpiles
INSPECTION
should not be permitted. Use of equipment on
the stockpile should be held to a minimum to
avoid contamination, breakage, and segregation. The Inspector of materials and batching
operations is responsible for enforcing
Aggregates removed from the stockpiles and compliance with the specifications. The duties of
placed in bins should be handled in a manner to the Inspector will start at the time materials are
prevent segregation, degradation, contamination, being accumulated and continue until final
and to ensure relatively uniform moisture. All records for the project are complete. The
Inspector must be familiar with the source and
500-3
type of aggregate intended for use, mix method of determining batch quantities, scale
proportions, moisture content, method of weights, yield, effective water, cement
determining scale weights, batching equipment, factor, and the procedures for adjusting
tests, and reports. The Inspector should be proportions and yield when using air
familiar with the manufacturer’s brochures on entrainment. The design mix as established
the batching equipment to understand its and approved should be included in the
operation. The Contractor will be required to permanent records of the project.
provide this information.
• Calibration of weighing and measuring
The importance of proper plant inspection cannot devices, balancing scales and checking
be overemphasized since proper proportioning of calibrations, and systematic and regular
materials is one of the major steps in obtaining a checking of scale settings for batches to
satisfactory concrete mix. The Inspector should assure proper quantities are being dispensed.
be guided by the idea that the quality of the end Scale settings are not to be made by the
product is dependent on each step along the line, Inspector since this is the responsibility of
and no amount of extra effort at one step can the Contractor’s representative. Check to
compensate for errors, omissions, or ensure that all scales have been certified.
inefficiencies at some other step of the process.
• Make free moisture tests. These tests are
Before the start of batching operations, the required so that batch weights may be
Resident Engineer and the Inspector should be adjusted and to ensure that the maximum
assured that all equipment is of an approved allowable water-cement ratio is not being
design and complies with the requirements of the exceeded. The batcher should be advised
specifications. Hoppers or bins should be set immediately of any change in moisture
level and loaded for at least 24 hours before content of the aggregates and of the
calibration. The Contractor should have maximum liters of water that may be added
available at the proportioning plant, at all times, at the mixer without exceeding the
not less than ten 23-kilogram weights for specifications and design limits.
calibration and verification of scales. A cradle
or test platform should be provided for each • Require that central-mix concrete be hauled
scale for testing purposes. in vehicles meeting specification require-
ments and in a manner to avoid segregation
The specific duties of the Plant Inspector should and be delivered at the site with proper
include the following: consistency and workability before the
concrete starts to take its initial set. Require
agitating-type trucks if this condition cannot
• Observation of the stockpiling and handling
be met.
of materials to assure compliance with the
specifications.
• Check truck mixers to ensure that they
contain a water-metering device of
• Maintain laboratory inspection report
prescribed accuracy, approved revolution
records to verify that all materials are
counters, mixing blades inside the drum that
acceptable prior to incorporating into the
are not caked with mortar, loose, broken,
Works.
bent, scalloped, worn more than 20% of any
• Make a periodic check, at least daily, of the dimension, or otherwise damaged. Truck
quantity of cement actually used by mixers should not be permitted to mix
comparing the total quantity received to the batches having volumes greater than the
theoretical quantity used, taking into account maximum capacity indicated on the
the cement remaining on hand. manufacturer’s rating plate.
• Be familiar with the physical characteristics

of aggregates, design mix proportions, the
500-4
• Proper handling, curing, and breaking of storm water to inlets, catch basins, storm sewers,
cubes to determine the compressive strength and ditches; and are an effective means in the
of the concrete. control of driveway entrances, both as to location
and width.
• All required records and reports should be
kept current and prepared in conformance It is good practice to consult with the property
with the instructions of the Resident owner before finally placing the depressed curbs
Engineer. All test reports should be dated for driveways. Shifting the locations to suit the
and signed by the person making the test. property owner is acceptable if safety standards
An orderly record should be kept of all and local ordinances are not violated.
specific checks or tests made to determine
compliance with the specifications, such as: In relatively level areas where storm water runs
off very slowly, there is a tendency for water to
1. All calibrations, verifications, and stand if curbs are not designed and built to
checks proper grades. Studying the drainage conditions
2. Scale certifications on any project where curbs will control or have
3. Cumulative total of all acceptable an affect on the drainage is very important for
materials received the Resident Engineer. This study should be
4. Moisture tests made before the start of any grading work. It
5. Scale weight settings may be found necessary to make minor
6. Cumulative total of material used alterations in grades or minor changes in
7. Compressive test results elevations of inlets to catch basins, culverts,
8. Inspector’s Daily Reports pipe, etc., to assure efficient drainage.
502.05.01 Inspector’s Diary Concrete work for curbs will consist of the
following:
A diary must be maintained by the Inspector and
should be a concise record of daily events and • Construction of cast-in-situ foundations for
observations. This record should include: all use with precast concrete curbs and cast-in
special instructions to the Contractor, unusual situ curbs, noses, and curb cuts.
actions taken by the Inspector, daily time of
starting and ending operations, the extent of • Construction of cast-in-situ concrete
progress by stations or structure sections, lost haunches for use with precast concrete
time due to breakdowns or other reasons, a curbs, cast-in-situ curbs, noses, and curb
counting of the Contractor’s forces, the cuts.
temperature, and weather conditions.
• Construction of cast-in-situ curbs, noses,
503 CONCRETE ELEMENTS and curb cuts.
503.01 CONCRETE CURBS • Construction of precast curbs.
The Standard Drawings depict several types of 503.01.01 Cast-in-Situ Foundations

concrete curbs, both precast and cast-in-situ. The
type or types of curb to be constructed will be When detailed in the plans or as determined by
shown on the plans. the field conditions, it may be necessary to place
a cast-in-situ concrete foundation to provide
Curbs serve for channelizing traffic at adequate support for the curb. This foundation
intersections, ramps, traffic islands, and will consist of K140 concrete. The formwork
medians. They delineate the limits of the and the ground will be approved by the Resident
traveled way and prevent the encroachment of Engineer before casting.
motor vehicle traffic onto sidewalks, medians,
and green areas. Curbs also serve to convey
500-5
Casting will be carried out in lengths not to unsuitable material shall be removed and
exceed 5 linear meters separated by expansion replaced with approved borrow material
joints of pieces of bituminous preformed joint which shall be thoroughly compacted
filler. according to the Standard Specifications.
503.01.02 Haunching 2. Forming: Forms shall be of wood, metal, or

other suitable material and shall extend for
Cast-in-situ class K250 concrete haunch will be the full depth of the concrete. All forms will
used with precast and cast-in-situ concrete curbs. be straight, free from warp, and of sufficient
The casting of the haunching will not be carried strength to resist the pressure of the concrete
out in lengths exceeding 5 meters and will be without displacement. Bracing and staking
separated by a compressible board. of the form will be such that the forms
remain in both horizontal and vertical
503.01.03 Cast-in-Situ Curbs and Nose alignment until their removal. The formwork
should be designed and erected to permit
Cast-in-situ curbs and noses shall be constructed easy removal of the front face for final
of class K250 concrete. The construction should finishing. All forms will be cleaned and
proceed as follows: coated with an approved form release agent
before the concrete is placed. Divider plates
1. Subgrade Preparation: Excavation will be are to be metal.
made to the required depth and the base upon
which the curb is to be set shall be
compacted to an even surface. All soft and
FORMING FOR CURB CONSTRUCTION
500-6
3. Concrete Placement: The concrete shall be than the depth of the curb. The templates
proportioned, mixed, and placed according to are to be set carefully and held firmly during
the requirements of class K250 concrete. the placing of the concrete. The templates
Consolidation of the concrete placed in the can remain in place until the concrete has set
forms will be by vibration or some other sufficiently to hold its shape but will be
acceptable compaction method. The removed while the forms are still in place.
concrete must be allowed to set sufficiently The resultant 3 mm wide contraction or open
so that the forms can be removed without joints in the curb will match the contraction
injury to the curbing or the nose. The top of joints in the concrete median sidewalk.
the concrete is to be struck off to the cross
section specified, after which, it will be 6. Expansion Joints: Expansion joints will be
finished smooth and even by means of a formed at 5 meter intervals using preformed
wood float. The required radius at the top expansion joint filler having a thickness of 2
front edge is provided by means of the centimeters. Curbs constructed next to the
proper radius edging tool. Where no radius is concrete median sidewalk will have
specified, the top edges shall be separated expansion joints that match and are located
from the form using a slightly rounded at the same point as the expansion joints in
edging tool. This prevents spalling of the the sidewalk.
corner and produces a neatly finished curb.
7. Curing: Immediately upon completion of the
4. Finishing: After the concrete has taken its finishing, the curbing shall be moistened and
initial set, the front or face form must be kept moist for three days, or the curbing and
carefully removed, with the back form nose shall be cured with a membrane curing
remaining undisturbed. The exposed top and material. The method and details of curing
front faces are finished with steel or will be subject to the approval of the
aluminum trowels using a minimal amount Resident Engineer and are described further
of water to produce a cement paste. When in this section.
the timing is right, minimal trowelling is
necessary to fill the voids and form induced 8. Backfilling: After the concrete has set
irregularities, producing a relatively smooth, sufficiently, the spaces in front and back of
even surface. It is extremely important that the curb will be backfilled to the required
this finishing procedure is accomplished elevation. Backfill will be with suitable
within 2-3 hours of the concrete pour to material, which shall be thoroughly tamped
achieve the desired result. Proper finishing in layers of not more than 15 centimeters.
cannot be attained otherwise. No
plastering of hardened concrete surfaces 503.01.04 Precast Curbs
will be allowed.
Precast curbs shall be constructed of class K250
5. Contraction Joints: Curbing will be concrete using Type V cement and precast by the
constructed in sections having a uniform hydraulic press method. The curb element will
length of 2.5 meters unless shorter sections be 60 centimeters long, where required to be laid
are necessary for closures. No section will in straight lines, but may be reduced to 20
be less than 1.2 meters. These sections will centimeters for laying on curves. The edges are
be separated by sheet steel templates set to be perfectly sharp without flanges and
perpendicular to the face and top of the curb lippings. All joints are to have a constant width
or nose. The templates are to be 3 not to exceed 0.5 centimeters.
millimeters in thickness over the width of the
curb and not less than 5 centimeters longer
500-7
On main roads, curbs are generally not placed of constructing barriers are described in the
until after the subbase and base courses have Standard Specifications.
been placed, compacted, and approved by the
Resident Engineer. For secondary roads and • Cast-in-place by slip form or extrusion
parking areas, curbs are normally placed on a • Cast-in-place by fixed form
100mm thick concrete foundation. • Precast
Precast curbs are to be placed on a setting bed of Whichever method is used, the final appearance
mortar not exceeding 3 centimeters thick. The will be influenced by the foundation. Vertical
mortar is to be one part Type V Portland cement cracking of slip formed barriers is a common
and two parts sand. No mortar shall be used problem. In some cases, the problem can never
after it has partially set and no material from any be completely eliminated. The condition can be
previous mortar batch will be used to mix a new eased by attention to the rate of travel,
batch of mortar. maintenance of the proper concrete level when
feeding the machine, properly operating
The grade and elevation at the top face of the vibrators, and fine tuning the concrete mix.
curb shall be controlled by a stringline to
produce a straight alignment true to grade. Once 503.02.01 Constructing Barriers
set, the curb serves as the control for the
construction of pavement and drainage If possible, the Resident Engineer should inspect
structures. The Contractor’s setting-out should previous work done by the equipment to be used.
be continuously checked by the Surveyor and By inspecting previous work, any shortcomings
Inspector to ensure the curb is constructed within can be discussed with the Contractor and
the allowable tolerance. corrective measures agreed upon. When
constructing barriers, the following general
Precast curb that is cracked, chipped, or requirements must be met:
otherwise damaged shall be marked by the
Inspector and rejected. Any type of on-site • Methods of casting, handling, and placing
repair to precast concrete elements is the barriers must be approved by the
unacceptable and will not be allowed. Resident Engineer.
Haunching is poured as a backing to the curb as • The required steel reinforcement and anchor
soon as possible to provide stability. The final bolts for bridge railings must be set in place.
operation is filling of the joints between the curb The Contractor is responsible to set these
elements with cement grout and striking the accurately and firmly secure them in place.
joints with a tool capable of producing a slightly They must be secured to prevent the weight
concave joint. of the fresh concrete from moving them out
of place. Slip-forming of bridge barriers or
503.02 CONCRETE BARRIERS parapets is not allowed.
• Cast-in-situ forms are usually made of metal

Reinforced concrete median barriers and other
and need to be inspected for dents, bends, or
traffic barriers at roadways and on structures
any other defects that would be detrimental
will be constructed as indicated on the Drawings
to the appearance of the finished barrier.
and will conform to Section V-7, Subsection
507.02 of the Standard Specifications. The • Concrete median and other traffic barriers
construction of concrete barriers on structures may be precast in sections not to exceed 6.0
will not be allowed until the complete meters. Contraction joints shall also be
superstructure is in place and all the post- placed at intervals not to exceed 6.0 meters.
tensioning has been completed. Three methods
500-8
• Precast barrier sections will probably be Before construction begins, the Resident
inspected at the suppliers plant but the units Engineer is responsible for the review of all the
should also be inspected before installation. phases of the work. He must see that all
The fact that precast barriers were inspected members of the Contractor’s crew are familiar
and accepted at the plant does not mean they with the duties to which they are to be assigned.
must be accepted on the job if they are Advance planning and organization of the
defective. As with any precast item, it is engineering and inspection teams will do much to
good practice for the Resident Engineer to eliminate the confusion and improper
inspect finished work at the plant early in the construction inspection sometimes found during
production run. If there are any differences the first day’s work. All inspection equipment
in inspection criteria between the project and and testing tools should be on hand before the
the plant Inspectors, they can be resolved beginning of paving, and demonstrations should
with the least disruption and expense to all be conducted to acquaint the Inspectors with
parties. their proper use.
• A joint sealant is used in all three types of The Resident Engineer should make certain that
barriers, but the application and sealing all Inspectors are instructed in the proper
procedures vary so it is important that the methods of keeping notes, records, and diaries.
Inspector is aware of the provisions for the Accurate records of construction progress and
particular type of barrier and the particular test results are essential in evaluating pavement
project. The Resident Engineer will provide performance through the years.
the project specific instructions for the
approved sealant to the Inspectors. The Inspector is assigned the responsibility for
obtaining the construction of structurally sound
503.02.02 Aligning Barriers pavement with the desired riding qualities and of
performing the necessary checks and tests on this
The barrier lines should be profiled so that the portion of the operation to determine that it meets
form heights can be established to produce a the Contract requirements. To do this, the
smooth line at the top of the barrier. A smooth Inspector must be able to recognize good
profile is important because errors and poor construction practices, have a working
construction on barriers are highly visible. The knowledge of the equipment used, be able to
top profile of the barrier should be adjusted to issue clear-cut decisions to the Contractor’s
smooth out any irregularities or departures in the representative, and be fully aware of all required
finished deck grade from the design grade. tests and reports. It is recommended that the
Contractor provided brochures, from
503.03 CEMENT CONCRETE manufacturers of the equipment to be used, be
PAVEMENT made available to the Inspector.
Modern concrete paving is a highly complex, All records and reports should be kept current
mechanized operation. Proper organization and and prepared in conformance with instructions
planning of the work are essential by both the from the Resident Engineer. All test reports
Contractor and the Resident Engineer. A cement should be dated and signed by the person making
concrete pavement has a high initial cost and the tests. An orderly record should be kept of all
many years of satisfactory service are expected specific checks or tests made to determine
from this type of pavement. It is imperative that compliance with the specifications.
the Resident Engineer and Inspectors are
thoroughly familiar with the specifications and
techniques applying to the work if this objective
is to be attained.
500-9
To avoid uncontrolled cracking, sawing should

CONCRETE PAVEMENT INSPETION be performed when it can be done without
CHECKLIST causing excessive tearing or raveling to the
concrete by the saw blade. The proper time will
have to be found by the trial and error method.
9 Subgrade measurements Sawing should be avoided when the slab is under
9 Check mixer timer tension because uncontrolled cracking can
9 Check impulses or strokes of vibrators or develop. Concrete is in tension when it is cool,
tampers such as in the early morning. The amount of
9 Record water used at on-site mixer tension will depend on temperature differences so
9 Record any equipment checks and adjustments
9 Slump and entrained air tests
experimentation will determine if there is a
9 Concrete cube samples taken as per the
problem. Early morning is a good time to
specifications examine the pavement to see if there are any
9 Depth of reinforcement uncontrolled cracks. The Contractor should be
9 Check of finished crown and straight-edging discouraged from attempting to perform the
9 Check of curing application sawing by a predetermined schedule because
9 Check of depth and width of sawed joints changing temperatures, humidity, and wind
9 Inspector’s Daily Report velocity may alter the optimum time for sawing.
9 Inspector’s Diary: A diary must be maintained If a crack should open up at a joint where sawing
by the slab Inspector and should be a concise is being performed, the sawing at the joint should
record of daily events and observations. This
be stopped, otherwise there could be two cracks
record should include: all special instructions
to the Contractor, unusual actions taken by the
causing possible spalling of the concrete between
Inspector, daily time of starting and ending the cracks.
operations, the extent of progress by stations,
lost time due to breakdowns or other reasons, a The dimensions of the saw cut should conform to
counting of the Contractor’s forces, the the dimensions shown in the plans.
temperature, and weather conditions.
If the Contractor falls behind in his sawing, it
may be necessary to increase the joint spacing up
503.03.01 Joint Sawing to 18 meters to control early cracking.
Intermediate joints can be cut later when early
Pavement joints provide a means to allow for cracking has been controlled.
expansion and contraction and to control
cracking. If it is constructed without joints, a Sawed joints should be cleaned and filled with
concrete pavement will crack as stresses build up joint compound as soon as possible so the joint
but it is generally preferred that the crack pattern will be kept clean and to prevent rapid moisture
is controlled by constructing joints. loss from the concrete at this joint. Curing
compound is not used in the joint because it can
Construction joints must be carefully made with create problems with the joint sealing.
a face that is perpendicular to the center line.
Dowel bars are placed in some joints so that 503.04 BRIDGES
loads will be transferred between slabs after a
crack has formed.
The testing, handling, placing, finishing,
Sawing is performed with a diamond tipped inspection, and approval of the concrete used in
single blade saw. A standby saw, in good bridge construction shall be according to the
condition, should be provided for use in case of a procedures stipulated in the Contract
breakdown of the single blade saw. Documents. Additional instructions and
requirements for pre-stressed and post-tensioned
concrete follow.
500-10
Ready mixed concrete may be used for this work Pre-stressed concrete bridge members (typically
provided it meets the requirements of the beams, girders, and members of girder systems)
specifications, complies with ASTM C94, and are cast at a concrete fabrication yard. Section
meets with the approval of the Resident VIII-2 through VIII-5 of the Standard
Engineer. Concrete transported by truck mixer, Specifications along with Section 700 of this
agitator, or other transportation device shall be manual contain the requirements for quality
discharged in the forms within one (1) hour after assurance including the following:
the cement has been added to the water or the
aggregates. • System manufacturer’s qualifications
• Sampling and testing
All concrete is to be air-entrained concrete. The • Certification
air entrainment shall be produced by the addition • Submittals
of an approved air-entraining agent at the mixer. • Technical assistance
Air-entraining cement is not to be used. The
volume of the entrained air in freshly mixed The Resident Engineer and his Inspectors should
concrete shall not be less than 4 percent and not be familiar with these requirements as well as
more than 7 percent, unless otherwise ordered by those of the plans and job specifications.
the Resident Engineer. The air-entraining
admixture is to comply with ASTM C260. 503.05 PRECAST STRUCTURES
When the ambient temperature is 10ºC and

above, a retarding admixture is to be added to Certain minor structures may be precast as
the concrete in the proportions recommended by indicated on the plans, in the specifications, or as
the manufacturer and as approved by the approved by the Resident Engineer. The
Resident Engineer. The retarding admixture is to Contractor will prepare and submit shop
comply with ASTM C494, Type D. drawings of precast structures and a method
statement of the precast operation. The
No retarding admixtures are to be used when the Inspector should be thoroughly familiar with
ambient temperature is below 10ºC. approved shop drawings and procedures to guide
inspection of the work. All work should be in
The consistency of the concrete is to be measured accordance with the specifications and
by the Resident Engineer or his Inspector by the requirements for cast-in-situ concrete with the
slump test according to ASTM C143. The slump addition of the following:
of all concrete shall not be less than 5 cm, nor
more than 10 cm. 1. Precast Operation The Inspector should
regularly observe the precast operation for
Cement for typical interior pre-stressed girders conformance with the approved procedure
and for special pre-stressed facia girders shall be including forms, reinforcement materials and
ASTM C150, Type V, Portland cement. placement, concrete materials and placement,
finishing, curing, and handing.
Fine aggregate is to consist of natural sand
conforming to the gradations of ASTM C33. No 2. Transport The precast elements should
more than 1 percent shall pass the No. 200 sieve. incorporate suitable lifting hooks to facilitate
handling, transport, and placement.
Coarse aggregate shall consist of gravel or
crushed stone. Nominal size of coarse aggregate 3. Blockcuts Blockcuts for connecting pipes or
shall be 20 mm to No. 4 sieve, conforming to the conduits should be constructed as defined on
grading requirements of Size No. 67 aggregates the Contractor’s shop drawings, and the
of ASTM C33. concreting operations should be equivalent to
and subject to all requirements for cast-in-
situ concrete.
500-11
503.06 SIDEWALK TILES 2. Mortar Bed: The composition and

consistency of the mortar is vital to the
strength and durability of the tile installation.
Sidewalk quarry tiles may be required as
The Inspector should continually check the
indicated on the Drawings. Colors, patterns, and
mortar mix for the proper proportioning of 4
mosaics of quarry tile will be as directed by the
parts sand to 1 part cement. The amount of
Engineer and may vary from area to area.
latex additive should be as recommended by
the latex materials supplier. The Contractor
503.06.01 Construction
should submit a method statement along with
his proposed materials for approval of the
Strict adherence to proper construction methods
mortar mix design by the Resident Engineer.
and procedures for the placement of quarry tiles
Latex greatly improves the strength of the
is extremely important.
mortar and reduces shrinkage. The mortar
should be mixed to a paste-like consistency
The steps for installation of quarry tiles are
that can be easily spread with hand trowels,
outlined in Section 506.04 of the Standard
but not so wet that it will flow when
Specifications. The inspector should note the
deposited on the slab. The concrete
following in addition:
foundation shall be clean and wetted prior to
placing the mortar materials. The expansion
1. K140 Concrete Base Slab: Following
joint material shall be extended to the top of
approval of the prepared subgrade, the
the mortar bed at the same locations placed
formwork for the base slab should be
in the concrete base. The mortar mix shall
checked for conformance to line and grade.
not be placed too far ahead of the tile laying.
Forms should be placed to allow proper
Tiles must be placed before the mortar has
screeding and finishing of the slab in
taken its initial set (approximately 45
sections. Expansion joint materials should be
minutes). The mortar materials shall not be
pre-cut to proper width and length and
tempered with water to prolong the set.
extended the full width of the sidewalk tiles
at each location at intervals not exceeding 4 3. Setting Tiles: Tiles should be precut as
meters. Expansion joint material shall also required to maximize the amount of tiles
be provided at all joints with foundations, placed per batch. The Contractor should use
pullboxes, covers, curbs, etc., or any other a stringline and/or straightedge to guide
objects embedded in the sidewalk. Joint proper alignment of the tiles. Patterns,
material should be braced and staked firmly colors, and mosiacs will be defined on the
such that the joint material remains straight Contractor’s shop drawings approved by the
and perpendicular to the walkway. The joint Resident Engineer. The Inspector should
material will extend to the finished surface, review the day’s work with the Contractor’s
and therefore, proper alignment at the Tile Supervisor to confirm the laying
foundation level is imperative to maintain the requirements and make adjustments in
appearance and integrity of the finished location or spacing due to site conditions
product. The completed installation should such as utility and drainage structures or
be damp cured for at least 72 hours or less if sidewalk geometry. Once the tiles have been
the Contractor proceeds with the tile placed, the Contractor shall immediately
installation. Tiles should not be installed cover the installation with damp hessian and
until the foundation has been placed and plastic sheeting to damp cure the work.
cured for at least 24 hours. Liquid membrane
curing compounds are not to be used.
500-12
4. Mortar Joints: Joint material should be Alternatively, when directed by the Engineer,
identical to the mortar bed composition and the existing tiles, mortar bed, and concrete
consistency. Jointing should not commence base course shall be saw cut along straight
sooner than 24 hours from tile placement. lines with the tiles, mortar, and concrete
Tile grout is placed with hard rubber trowels closest to the trench removed and disposed
working at a 45° angle to the joints to firmly of. For the alternative case, an expansion
squeeze the material in place. After the joint shall be installed between the existing
mortar has set, the joints are cleaned and and replacement quarry tiles.
tooled to achieve the finished surface.
Again, the installation is covered with damp Expansion joints shall be installed at not to
hessian and plastic sheeting for a minimum exceed 4-meter intervals in any direction
of 3 days. through both new and existing quarry tile
pedestrian pavement.
5. Joint Sealing: All expansion joints should be
clean and free of debris prior to placing After removal of the quarry tiles and
approved joint sealer. The instructions of concrete base course, the exposed subgrade
the manufacturer of the approved sealer shall be excavated 20 centimetres and the
should be strictly followed. surface compacted using mechanical
compactors to a minimum of 95% of
6. Repairs: This section includes the procedure Modified Proctor Density. The excavation
for the removal and reinstatement of quarry shall be backfilled in not less than two lifts,
tiles for repairs or utility installations or with aggregate subbase material, gradation
maintenance. ‘B’. Each lift shall be compacted to a
minimum of 95% of Modified Proctor
7. Removal: The quarry tiles, underlying Density at optimum moisture content.
mortar bed, and concrete base course shall
be broken out with a power concrete saw and Installation of the concrete base, mortar bed,
cutting tools to the extent required, along and quarry tiles over the newly prepared
lines that leave the remaining tiles whole and subgrade shall meet the requirements of
unbroken, and removed and disposed of at an Section V-6, Quarry Tiles, Precast Tile
approved disposal site. Blocks, Interlocking Pedestrian Pavers, and
Interlocking Vehicular Pavers, of the
8. Materials: The Contractor shall provide new Standard Specifications. Particular care
quarry tiles for replacement, matching shall be taken with placement and timing of
existing sizes, type, thickness, colors, and latex mortar prior to tile installation, and
pattern, and meeting the Standard follow-up curing procedures for the proper
Specification requirements. tile bonding.
9. Restoration: After the Engineer’s approval Figure 500.01 shows the details of sidewalk
of trench backfill to subgrade level, any restoration over a utility trench.
disturbed tiles, mortar bed, and concrete
base course areas shall be removed to Quarry tiles shall be laid symmetrically,
undisturbed existing tiles, along lines that starting at centers of areas and finishing with
leave the remaining quarry tiles whole and equally cut rows on the sides, matching
unbroken, with the mortar and concrete base existing patterns and colors, or to a new
course cut on a vertical face. pattern as directed by the Engineer.
500-13
Figure 500.01
QUARRY TILE SIDEWALK DETAILS
503.07 INTERLOCKING PAVING The plant inspection will assess all aspects
BLOCKS of the manufacturing methods, quality
control procedures, component materials, the
curing and storage facilities, and labeling/
Interlocking paving blocks are used in both
identification procedures for the pre-cast
pedestrian and vehicular areas. The locations
pedestrian and vehicular pavers.
where the blocks are to be placed are indicated
on the plans. The Contractor is required to
Based on this inspection, the Engineer will
prepare and submit shop drawings for the
notify the Contractor of any improvements
pedestrian pavers indicating colors, patterns, and
that are necessary before provisional
locations for the Resident Engineer’s review and
approval of the plant will be issued. In the
approval. No pavers are to be fabricated until
event improvements are outstanding, a
the colors and patterns have been approved in
follow-up inspection will be made by the
writing.
Engineer before the plant is considered for
approval to produce pavers.
503.07.01 Materials
During the actual production of pavers, the
The quality of paver materials is extremely
Engineer will periodically inspect the plant to
important to ensure the integrity, durability, and
ensure continued compliance with the
performance of the pavers in the harsh
provisional approval.
environment. A strict quality assurance program
will be implemented in accordance with the
2. Manufacturer’s Plant, Production, and
following:
Testing Quality Assurance Procedures: All
1. Plant Inspection and Approval: Prior to pavers shall be produced strictly in
approval of a supplier to produce precast accordance with the requirements of the
pavers, the manufacturing facilities will be specifications. The plant, materials,
inspected by the Engineer. equipment, and method of manufacture shall
500-14
be provisionally approved by the Engineer a) Dimensional Accuracy (10 units)

prior to actual production of the pavers. The permissible variations allowed are:
Pavers shall be manufactured using the Length: + 2mm

materials and proportions approved at the Width: + 2mm
time of provisional approval of the facility. Thickness: + 3mm
No variations of the mix proportions will be
allowed unless authorized in writing by the No variations outside these limits will be
Engineer. Each production batch accepted.
(approximately 400 units) shall have clearly
b) Water Absorption (same 10 units)
stamped, with indelible ink, on one of the
For 3 specimens, soaked in water for 10
side faces of each paver the manufacturer’s
minutes after being dried and cooled for
name or logo or other approved identification
24 hours, the requirement for water
marking. Also, each batch shall have affixed
absorption is 2.5% maximum.
a label giving the batch identification
number, the date of casting, and the date of For 3 specimens, soaked in water for 24
removal from the curing chamber. All pavers hours after being dried and cooled for 24
shall be placed in approved sealed curing hours, the requirement for water
chambers within 6 hours of casting and absorption is 5.0% maximum.
remain for a continuous 72-hour period.
c) Density (same 10 units)
Pavers shall be clearly identified by fixing a Pavers are to be tested in a soaked state.
tag to each and every bundle/batch indelibly
marked with the Contract Number and Size and Shape: Full size paver
Contractor’s name. Age of specimen: 28 days
Average Bulk Density ≥ 2.375
At the site of manufacturing of the pavers, Ave. Bulk/Apparent Density ≥ 0.88
the manufacturer shall provide, install, and
operate a permanent materials test laboratory d) Compressive Strength (5 units)
fully equipped and staffed with qualified Pavers are to be tested in a soaked state.
quality control manpower to undertake all
tests as required and necessary to assure Size and Shape: Full size paver
compliance with the specifications and these Age of specimen: 28 days
procedures. All test results shall be kept on
Compressive Strength (N/mm²) =
file and provided to Government
representatives and their consultants as and Maximum Applied Load (N)
when requested. Duly designated Net area of Top Surface (mm²)
representatives of the Government and their
consultants shall have the right and shall be = 52 N/mm² (minimum)
allowed to inspect the test laboratory.
e) Flexural Strength (5 units)
3. In-house Quality Assurance Testing Pavers are to be tested in a dry state.
Procedures: From every day of production,
a minimum of 25 specimens will be selected Size and Shape: Full size paver
at random for testing of the following in Age of specimen: 28 days
accordance with ASTM C936-82 by Average flexural strength ≥ 5 N/mm²
designated manufacturer’s Quality Control
personnel: 4. Independent Quality Assurance Testing
Procedures: On at least a bi-weekly basis, a
representative of an independent testing
company approved by the Government of
500-15
Abu Dhabi shall inspect the production Manufacturer to obtain the certifications
facility and report on the following: from the materials suppliers and
distribute as indicated herein.
• Sand/aggregate mix proportions.
• Cement content of mix. 6. Requirements of On-Site Delivery: The
• Water cement ratio. receipts for pavers delivered for use on all
• Color weight per mix. Government Contracts must state the name
• Curing facilities & procedures. of the Contractor, Contract Number, and the
identification number of each batch/bundle
A minimum of 25 random samples shall be delivered to the site.
taken by the independent testing company.
The samples shall be tested by the Each delivery shall also be accompanied by
independent testing company for dimensional copies of the In-house Certification and
accuracy, compressive strength, and reports on the testing for dimensional
specified flexural strength as follows: accuracy, compressive strength, and water
absorption relevant to the batches delivered.
• Dimensional check - 15 blocks On delivery of pavers to the site, copies of
• Water absorption - 15 blocks these documents must be transmitted to the
• Compressive strength - 5 blocks Engineer responsible for supervision of
• Flexural strength - 5 blocks construction for the Government.
A report shall be issued to the Manufacturer, No pavers shall be laid on site until the
Municipality, Consultant, and Contractor Engineer receives and approves the aforesaid
covering each inspection. documentation.
5. Certifications of Suppliers of Materials: In The Resident Engineer shall be notified 24

addition to the above, all suppliers of hours in advance of paver deliveries. Pavers
materials used in the manufacture of the shall not be off-loaded until inspected by the
pavers shall provide the following Engineer. At the Engineer’s option, test
certifications for all deliveries to the samples may be taken from the loaded truck
manufacturer: and checked for compressive and flexural
strength. Permission to off-load the pavers
• Certification of the supplier that the does not indicate approval of the pavers.
materials delivered meet the applicable Approval depends on the results of the
specifications. A minimum of one manufacture, independent and site laboratory
certification shall be required covering testing, and the proper handling and
all deliveries made during a 24 hour installation of the pavers.
period.
503.07.02 Construction
• Latest and current certification of tests
conducted by an approved independent The construction procedure for the installation of
testing company on materials at the interlocking vehicular and pedestrian pavers is
supplier’s source. Such certifications detailed in the Standard Specifications.
shall confirm that materials at the
supplier’s source are compliant with the 503.07.03 Repairs
specifications and that testing by the
independent testing company is being This section includes the procedure for the
carried out on at least a monthly basis. removal and reinstatement of pavers for repairs
or utility installations or maintenance.
Copies of these certifications shall be
provided to the Municipality, 1. Removal: The concrete pavers shall be
Consultant, and Contractor on a monthly carefully removed and cleaned with any
basis. It is the responsibility of the mortar or other foreign matter being removed
500-16
from the exposed faces. All sound pavers 95% of Modified Proctor Density. Replace
designated by the Engineer for re-use shall the protected existing geotextile fabric over
be carefully handled, stacked, and protected the newly prepared subgrade and install new
until needed. The Engineer shall be the sole geotextile fabric such that a minimum 30
judge of which, if any, of the pavers are centimeter overlap is made between the
acceptable for re-use. All unusable pavers, existing and replacement geotextile fabric.
broken pieces, and other debris (mortar,
concrete base, etc.) shall be removed and Replacement of aggregate subbase and base
disposed of at approved disposal sites. The courses shall be made to match existing by
Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring carefully compacting against undisturbed
that all re-usable pavers are kept protected existing courses to match the existing levels
until required for re-use. Any pavers which, and densities. Installation of replacement
in the opinion of the Engineer, are unsuitable aggregate base and subbase courses shall
at the time of re-use shall be removed from meet the requirements of Section III,
the site and dispose of. Subbase and Base Courses, of the Standard
Specifications.
It is expected that unless the pavers are new
and recently installed, they will in general be Replacement of any damaged or removed
rejected, to be replaced by new pavers subbase drainage system piping, aggregate
matching the existing in type, size, and color, bedding, and geotextile fabric shall match
to be supplied by the Contractor. existing and be placed in accordance with
Section 604.04, Other Related Works, of the
2. Materials: All materials shall be in Standard Specifications.
accordance with Section II-7, Subgrade
Preparation, Section III, Subbase and Base After approval of the installed subgrade or
Courses, and Section V, Concrete Works, of base course by the Engineer, the pavers shall
the Standard Specifications. be installed in accordance with Section V-6,
Quarry Tiles, Precast Tile Blocks,
New interlocking vehicular and pedestrian Interlocking Pedestrian Pavers, and
pavers shall be subject to Municipality Interlocking Vehicular Pavers, of the
quality assurance procedures as previously Standard Specifications.
described.
New pavers shall be provided as necessary
3. Restoration: After the Engineer’s approval to match the size, thickness, and style of the
of trench backfill to subgrade level, the existing pavers as closely as possible.
existing pavers, base and subbase courses Where pavers matching the existing are
shall be removed to a minimum of 60 unavailable, the Engineer shall direct the
centimeters from the edge of the backfilled style of pavers to be used.
trench, or to non-disturbed paver areas,
whichever is further, or to areas as directed In placing the pavers, the Contractor shall
by the Engineer. Underlying geotextile ensure that no spaces are left between the
fabric shall be protected and laid back over individual paver blocks, the sides of pavers
the remaining pavers while the replacement shall be touching each other. The pavers
subgrade is prepared. The existing subgrade shall be secured in place using plate
and top of backfilled trench shall be compactors in order to achieve the proposed
excavated 30 centimeters and the surface levels and grades. Sand shall be used as
compacted to a minimum of 95% of filler between the pavers. The concrete
Modified Proctor Density using mechanical pavers shall be placed in a proper pattern to
compactors. Fill the excavation to the match the existing pavers unless otherwise
original subgrade level with aggregate directed or agreed by the Engineer. Re-use of
subbase material, gradation ‘B’, compacted pavers having paint striping will not be
in not to exceed 15-centimeter thick layers at permitted.
optimum moisture content to a minimum of
500-17
504 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

PAVER CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES 504.01 GENERAL
• Materials delivery - Pavers delivered to the site After the falsework, forms, and reinforcement
must be tagged as indicated above or rejected. have been erected and set in place, the contractor
The Inspector should note the batch will be ready to begin placing concrete. This
identification numbers keyed to the installation phase is the most critical operation in building a
location in his diary. structure. Previous operations can be corrected
without too much trouble, however, placing
• Utility chambers - All utility chambers,
concrete is probably the most costly and time
drainage structures, etc., within the paver area
shall be adjusted to the required finish grade consuming rework. For this reason all possible
and sloped to conform with the required cross- efforts should be made to make the first concrete
section. In most cases, this can be checked by placement the only placement.
the Inspector with a stringline or straightedge.
Circular frames/covers should be surrounded Before concrete is ordered for any portion of the
by a square or rectangular concrete frame in project, the Resident Engineer should make
accordance with the approved shop drawings. certain that the necessary skilled and unskilled
No pavers will be installed until this work is workers, equipment, and tools are on the site or
complete and approved by the Inspector. readily available to properly handle, place,
vibrate, finish, and cure the concrete.
• Curbs - Precast and cast-in-situ curbs will be
complete, cured, and formwork removed prior
to commencing work. The Contractor is responsible for informing the
Resident Engineer when he intends to start
• Patterns - The Inspector should review the work placing concrete. Before placement, the
on site with the Contractor’s supervisor to Inspector should ensure that the forms have been
confirm the laying requirements and make checked for alignment and that the reinforcement
adjustments in the location or spacing due to is the proper size and placed at the proper
site conditions such as utility and drainage spacing and cover. Also the forms and the rebar
structures or area geometry. should be given a final check for cleanliness. All
sawdust, chips, and any other debris from the
• Compaction - Tamping and leveling should be
interior of the forms must be removed. Final
performed with a plate compactor as soon as
possible following completion of a defined area. approval of the work for placement of concrete is
The finished grade after compaction should be the responsibility of the Inspector.
checked against the required elevation and
adjustments made in the pre-compacted height The following guidelines are useful to the
as necessary. Inspector assigned to the concrete pour:
• Cutting - Cutting of pavers will only be done 1. Equipment Approved equipment must be on
with a block splitter or concrete saw. The work hand for placing concrete in every part of
should be laid out to minimize the number of the structure. Tools for spreading the
cuts and small pieces. Manufactured special
concrete must have handles long enough to
pieces for corners, half blocks, etc., are
desirable and should be incorporated wherever
reach all parts of the forms. The vibrators
possible. must be checked to see that they are in good
condition and an extra vibrator and power
• Spacing - The blocks should be placed together source should be on hand in case of a
tightly (maximum joint 3 mm). Loose laying to breakdown.
reduce cuts or increase coverage area will not
be permitted. 2. Embedded Items All embedded items must
be in their correct positions and solidly
fastened. If wood inserts are to be used, they
must be soaked in water for at least 24 hours
500-18
prior to being placed in the forms. After all is prepared to meet the time intervals before
reinforcement has been placed, a special the concrete is placed. Placing should start
check should be made to be sure that bolts, in the corners and ends and progress in
fixings, or inserts for any required uniformly placed layers within the forms.
appurtenances have been installed and have When concrete is being placed in walls or
not been displaced. other long, narrow sections, a uniform depth
should be maintained. The layers should be
3. Placement Rate The planned rate of placing between 15 centimeters and 30 centimeters
the concrete should be limited to such rate for reinforced concrete and no greater that
that the concrete can be finished before the 45 centimeters for unreinforced concrete.
beginning of the initial set.
9. Segregation: Care should be taken to fill
4. Water Never permit extra water beyond that each part of the form by depositing the
specified in the design mix to be added to concrete as near the final position as
increase workability. possible. Shovels should be used to move
concrete. When moved, the concrete tends to
5. Consistency Observe the consistency of the segregate. Usually the rock will stay where
concrete and watch for obvious differences it was dumped, and all that moves is the
between the first, middle, and latter portions mortar and fine materials. The Resident
of the mix as it is discharged from the mixer. Engineer should observe this work closely.
Variations of this type are usually caused by Once the concrete is placed, it should be
worn mixer blades or hardened concrete in moved as little as possible.
the mixer drum. The cause of segregation
should be corrected before reusing the 504.02 PUMPING CONCRETE
equipment or the equipment should be taken
out of service.
Equipment to pump concrete into position is
6. Freefall The placement of concrete should often used, particularly on bridge projects, with
be continuous for each pour sequence to concurrence of the Resident Engineer.
avoid a cold joint and the concrete shall not
freefall more than 1.5 meters. Avoid Pumping of concrete involves the following
segregation of the mix by using chutes, special considerations, equipment, and
hoppers, or pipes. procedures:
7. Workhours Concreting should be done 1. Mix Design Aggregate stockpiles must be

during daylight hours. If permission is kept moist so that absorption will be as low
obtained for night placement, suitable and as uniform as possible. Aggregate size
artificial lighting must be provided. and the amount of sand, air entrainment,
admixtures, and water content may need to
8. Layering To obtain a uniform mass of be adjusted but the normal mix design should
concrete, the rate of placement must be timed be tried before making adjustments.
so that each layer does not set completely
before the next layer is placed. If it does set, 2. Air Entrainment Air content should be
the bond between the layers will be poor. checked both at the truck discharge and the
This will result in a plane of weakness which pump discharge to be sure that the desired
can cause a failure in this part of the air content is achieved in the structure. After
structure. The Contractor should regulate a correlation is established, the air content
his operations so that the interval between can be determined at the truck only with
deliveries of concrete does not interrupt the occasional checks at the pump discharge.
placement operations. The Resident
Engineer should be sure that the Contractor
500-19
CONCRETE PUMPING OPERATION
3. Pump Priming Initial pumping of grout (one 6. Delivery Placement should progress from
part cement to one or two parts water) will the furthest point away from the pump, back
lubricate the pump and pipeline. One half of towards the pump. This will serve to
a cubic meter of grout will lubricate 300 eliminate pipelines on fresh concrete and to
meters of a 15-20 centimeter diameter eliminate the problem of lubricating sections
pipeline. This grout is then wasted. With of pipe added on. The pump hopper should
these preparations, it should be possible to always be full. Begin dumping from the next
pump a normal mix with slumps ranging truck before the last truck is finished to
from 5 centimeters to 15 centimeters. prevent combining first and last parts of the
loads. Pump continuously. Slow down
4. Uniformity Excessively wet, as well as dry, when needed to prevent running out of
mixes can cause pumping problems. If concrete in the hopper, pump, and pipeline.
mixes are uniform, a pump will operate at a Vacuum or pressure build-up can cause
constant engine speed and constant pressure. pumping problems. The pipeline is
Variations in the mix can be detected by sometimes vented through a valve to guard
observing the pump pressure and listening against vacuum or pressure build-up.
for uneven engine operation.
504.03 VIBRATING CONCRETE
5. Sampling Concrete samples are taken from
the discharge points of the hoses. Concrete
is accepted at the chutes of the trucks, but As concrete is placed, it will contain areas with
acceptance should be verified at the hose undesirable voids. If it were left this way, the
discharge points by separate slump tests. A concrete would have a rough surface and
dry run should be made to be sure all questionable strength. To eliminate the
equipment is in proper working condition undesirable voids and settling, the concrete must
before placement begins. be consolidated to a uniform density while it is
being placed. Vibrators are used to consolidate
500-20
the concrete. The portable spud-type vibrator is • In multilayered pours, the concrete must be
most commonly used. placed in shallow layers and each layer of
concrete vibrated after it is poured. The
Vibrators should be capable of transmitting vibrators are to penetrate the previous layers
vibration to the concrete at frequencies of not a few centimeters to permit a good mixing of
less than 4,500 impulses per minute (75 Hz.) and the layers.
visibly affecting a typical mix (25.4 mm slump)
for at least a distance of 46 centimeters from the • The vibrators should not rest against the
vibrator. reinforcing steel bars that extend from the
concrete that has taken an initial set. The
The Resident Engineer must be sure that the vibrations will break the bonds between the
Contractor’s workers use the vibrators concrete and the bars.
effectively. Improper vibration will result in
segregated concrete and ultimately a weak • Vibrators should not touch the inside
structure. surfaces of the form walls. This will cause a
double vibration that can loosen the forms
Below are some important points for the and weaken the supports. This will also
Inspector to watch for: cause segregation against the form walls.
• Vibrators should enter and leave the surface • The vibrators must have sufficient line to
vertically. This prevents possible reach the bottom of the form.
segregation at the surface.
• The vibrator should not be operated like a
• Inspection of vibration techniques involves fishing rod. When an operator throws the
experience and judgment. Experienced vibrator out on the surface of the concrete
personnel will usually remove the vibrator and drags it back, the concrete does not
when the surface just begins to glisten and consolidate properly and tends to segregate.
the air bubbles cease to appear. Immersion
• Avoid over-vibration. When over-vibration
should not last more than 30 seconds
occurs, the surface of the concrete appears
• Care should be taken to ensure that the wet and consists of a layer of mortar
vibrators are not used to move the concrete containing very few coarse aggregates. This
in the forms. This will cause segregation. top layer will be weak and deteriorate
Concrete should be placed with chutes, quickly.
tremie tubes, and when necessary, hand
• Use of a dirty vibrator will introduce
shovels.
material into the concrete that will weaken
• Consolidation should be done concurrently the structure and increase the possibility of
with placement. future failures.
• There should be enough workers and 504.04 WEATHER LIMITATIONS

equipment to consolidate the concrete at the
same rate as it is being placed. At least two The Resident Engineer is responsible to know the
vibrators should be used in a structural pour weather and temperature limitations of
of more than 25 cubic meters of concrete. concreting. Two extreme situations are
presented within this section; cold weather and
• The vibrator should be placed at regular hot weather. In both cases, the Standard
intervals approximately 10 times the Specifications will emphasize the situation(s)
diameter of the vibrator. that will be most critical to the project.
• Spare vibrators should be kept ready in case
1. Cold Weather Concreting Cold weather may
of breakdowns during the pour.
not be a common problem, but when it
500-21
occurs, it can cause serious problems. It is combined with wind, the results can be
may even create conditions so unsatisfactory disastrous for the concrete. If the concrete
that the Contractor is forced to remove the temperature at the completion of mixing
concrete and start over. exceeds 32ºC, it may be rejected.
Concrete should have a temperature of at HOT WEATHER CONCRETING

least 16ºC, but not more than 32ºC at the GUIDELINES
time of placing. Maintenance of at least the
minimum temperature will be accomplished
• Concreting should not be allowed when the
by heating the water or the aggregates, or
ambient air temperature exceeds 40°C.
both as necessary. This heating process is
• In hot weather, take suitable precautions to
the Contractor’s responsibility. The ensure that the temperature of fresh concrete as
Resident Engineer is to ensure that only placed does not exceed 32°C.
steam or dry heat is used. Heating methods • Aggregates shall be shaded from direct sunlight
that alter or prevent the entrainment of the and mixing water cooled. If necessary, cool the
required amount of air in the concrete are not aggregate by sprinkling water and keep it moist.
to be used. The temperatures of the heated Additional free water must be considered
aggregates or water are not to exceed 66ºC relative to the approved mix design.
at the time the cement is added to the • Transporting, placing, and finishing concrete
mixture. should be done as quickly as practicable during
hot weather. Elapsed time between batching
No concrete is to be placed when the air and placing should not exceed the time
determined in the trial mix process (say 1.5 or 2
temperature is 2ºC and falling. Occasionally
hrs.). Schedule trucks to reduce waiting time on
the air temperature will drop below 2ºC after the job. Concrete trucks should arrive on site
the concrete is placed but before it is cured. at regular intervals. Line-ups should be
When this is the case, the Contractor must avoided.
enclose the structure and maintain a 16ºC • Concrete can be kept cooler in transit when
temperature for seven days after placing the truck drums are painted a reflective colour or
concrete. spray bars are used to cool drums. It may also
be necessary to cool pump pipelines and shade
2. Hot Weather Concreting The specifications the entire placing area.
stipulate that the temperature of the concrete • Use windbreakers to reduce evaporation.
immediately before placement shall not • Restrict concrete placement to late afternoon
exceed 32ºC. It has been observed in the past or evening.
• Forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade are to
that cement has sometimes arrived on a
be sprinkled with water just before concrete
project at a temperature considerably over placement to cool contact surfaces and
38ºC. When a free air shaded thermometer minimize evaporation from the concrete during
near the concrete production plant reaches placement. Minimize exposure of mixing trucks
29ºC, the Resident Engineer should take to the hot sun while waiting.
thermometer readings of the temperature of • The Contractor shall provide an accurate
the concrete hourly. Concrete is not to be thermometer, located in an approved shaded
mixed and placed when the shade air position on site to be used for all records and
temperature is 40ºC or above without special reports.
protection and precautions as approved by • Check that concrete is placed in small areas
the Resident Engineer. with a minimum periphery to reduce the
possibility of cold joints.
At a shaded air temperature of 35ºC, special • Adequately cure immediately after finishing.
An early moist cure is very important in hot
precautions must be taken to ensure a
weather. Prevent alternate wetting and drying
concrete temperature of 32ºC. Hot concrete of the concrete during the remainder of the
may not develop the desired strength, may be curing period. Apply a fog spray on the
less durable, is more difficult to finish, and concrete surface to prevent early drying.
will often be of poor appearance. When heat
500-22
The Contractor is responsible for having a 1. Wrought formwork On this type of forms,
plan of action to reduce the temperature of the surface is tooled or wrought. The
the concrete delivered to the site of the work. formwork is constructed of steel or plywood
When the temperature of the concrete or planed dressed or undressed timber. The
reaches 24ºC, generally a water reducing insides of the forms are lined with an
retarder must be added to the concrete. The approved fiberboard.
use of additives is subject to the approval of
the Resident Engineer. Other heat reducing 2. Lined formwork This formwork is made of
measures include shading and/or spraying sawn tongue and grooved timber. Each
water on the aggregate stockpiles or cooling piece is of the same width and thickness
the mixing water with ice. When ice is unless it is otherwise specified.
used, it is to be considered a part of the
water in the design mix. Under no 3. Sawn formwork Sawn formwork consists of
circumstances should the mixing operations timber sawn at the mill. All boards of sawn
be considered complete until all the ice in the form work are of the same width.
mixing drum has melted.
4. Special formwork Special formwork consists
Wind, low humidity, and high temperatures of the formwork required to produce an
can cause rapid loss of moisture from the ornamental pattern on the concrete surface.
surface of concrete. The moisture loss will
Forms can be made of either wood or metal and
cause shrinkage cracks to appear on the
in some cases, such as for barriers, fiberglass
surface. When there are unfavorable wind,
can be used. Details of the forming are subject to
humidity, and temperature conditions, it may
inspection by the Resident Engineer. Such an
be necessary to erect shade and/or wind
inspection does not relieve the Contractor of his
breaks. In extreme conditions, it may even
responsibility for the forms and the resulting
be necessary to postpone placing the bridge
lines, grades, and dimensions of the completed
deck or paving concrete until more suitable
structure. If the forms will result in irregular
environmental conditions prevail. This
lines, patches, rough surfaces and joints, uneven
should be done to avoid too rapid drying of
chamfers, offset joints, broken or wrinkled
the surface and severe shrinkage cracking.
plywood marks, non-uniform texture and color,
When concrete is placed under these
they should be rejected.
conditions, it is extremely important that the
curing medium is applied immediately after
504.05.01 Wood Forms
finishing.
Wood is the most commonly used form material.
504.05 FORMS
Generally, form faces are constructed of
plywood that is braced by lumber studs. Wood
Forms hold the concrete in place until it gains forms for all exposed concrete surfaces should be
enough strength to hold its shape. The forms made of lumber that is dressed and free of
must be strong enough to support the pressure defects. When constructed, the forms should
and the weight of the fresh concrete and any provide mortar tight joints that produce smooth
other loads such as finishing equipment and wind and even concrete surfaces.
loading. In addition, the forms are to be able to
withstand the effects of vibration caused by The Resident Engineer should be sure to check
vibrators used for the consolidation of the the condition of the wood that is used as forming
concrete. material. Lumber that is too dry will warp from
rain or the moisture in the concrete. Lumber that
Unless otherwise directed, all formwork is to be is too green will shrink causing joints to open in
fabricated according to Standard Specifications the surface.
and is to be one of the following types:
500-23
Plywood forms or forms face-lined with plywood

can be used:
CONCRETE FORMING GUIDELINES
• if they are strong enough to resist bending,
• The inside surfaces of the forms should be oiled
before erecting the forms. Two types of oil are
• if they are of uniform thickness, and
generally used for the forms; paraffin base oil
for wooden forms and petroleum base oil for • if they will be mortar tight when set in
steel forms. In either case, the oil is not to position.
cause any discoloration of the concrete and is
to be applied before the reinforcing steel is The plywood used for form construction should
placed. This is done so that the necessary bond have a thickness of not less than 12 mm and be
will not be affected. The forms are to be wetted fabricated with waterproof glue.
with water before the actual placement of the
concrete. 504.05.02 Metal Forms
• Form joints should be mortar tight. Wood
forms should be constructed to prevent the In addition to wood forms, metal forms may be
joints from opening due to lumber shrinkage. used. However, precautions must be taken to
• Braces should be used to prevent buckling and
ensure that the following requirements are met
displacing of the forms.
• All exposed sharp edges should be chamfered
before metal forms are used:
with triangular fillets not less the 2 centimeters
square. This will prevent mortar runs and will • The metal should be thick enough to hold its
preserve smooth straight lines. shape.
• Forms should be beveled at all exposed and
right angled corners with chamfer strips. This • All bolts and rivet heads must be
will make the corners stronger and lessen the countersunk to prevent them from marring
likelihood of chipping. the finished surface.
• Forms should be constructed so that they may
be removed easily without damage to the • Clamps, pins, or other connecting devices
concrete. should be designed to hold the forms rigidly
• Forms should be constructed so that the together and to allow removal without
necessary forms and falsework may be left in damage to the concrete.
place to support the weight of the concrete until
it has gained sufficient strength to safely
support its own weight plus any superimposed The Contractor is to remove any metal forms
construction loading. that do not have smooth surfaces, are bent or
• Forms for high walls must be built so that dirt otherwise damaged, or do not line up properly.
and debris can be removed immediately before All the forms are to be free from rust, grease, or
concrete placement. To accomplish this, the other matter that would discolor the concrete.
lower forms should be left loose or a cleanout
should be cut into one of the forms to allow Forms for bottom slabs or floors of structures
cleaning to take place. require screed rails that will control the elevation
• Extra care must be exercised in forming and of the top of the concrete. The rails will be
bracing the forms for the portions of the bridge
supported from the ground or by other means
decks that are outside of the outside girders.
that will not allow movement of the screed
This overhang is difficult to hold true to line
and grade and is the one part of a bridge elevation relative to the top of the reinforcing.
structure in which any imperfection is most The purpose of using a screed is to ensure that
noticeable. Angle bracing to girders must be the correct cover over the reinforcing will be
performed with care. The Contractor should be maintained and to provide a uniform base for the
requested to furnish a detailed drawing of his rest of the structure. The use of “telltales” nailed
overhang forming so it can be checked by the to steel racks or stakes marked at the top of the
Structural Engineer. slab for “eyeballing” will not be permitted.
500-24
Measurements should be taken continually • Foundation pads including a description of

during forming to ensure that the Contractor the soil, bearing capacity, settlement
builds forms that comply with the plans and calculations, and required excavation or soil
specifications. Once the forms are completed replacement provisions.
and in place, the Resident Engineer will have to
measure all lengths, widths, and heights and • A cross section of the deck forming.
compare them with plan dimensions. These
measurements are important. There is no room • Size, placement, and details of all lumber
for error, since dimensional errors are cause for and timber.
the removal of concrete structures.
• Continuity of the supporting members over
Before the concrete is placed, the Inspector must two or more spans, if such continuity is to be
be sure that the grades and alignments are considered in the analysis of the falsework.
checked thoroughly by the Surveyor. The
• Species and grade of timber and lumber to
Inspector will be able to check some grades when
be used.
he checks dimensions, but the Surveyor still must
check all the critical points on the forms for
• Structural calculations verifying the
grades and alignment.
falsework design.
504.06 FALSEWORK The Contractor’s submittal should also include
design calculations for the concrete bearing pads.
Falsework consists of temporary supports
required for the construction of the permanent Soil borings or in-place density tests may be
structure. It is essential that the falsework be required to verify the allowable bearing capacity
strong enough to support the weight of the forms, of the soil. The estimated settlement resulting
the fresh concrete, and any construction from the applied loads should be provided for
equipment, personnel, runways, and impact evaluation by the Structural Engineer.
loads. When taken together, these loads shall be
taken as not less than 250 kg/m² of horizontal Falsework systems will include double wedges or
projection. screw-type adjustments to allow leveling and
adjustment of the supports to the required deck
The specifications require the Contractor to elevations. A system of gauges or “telltale”
submit detailed shop drawings for approval of devices will be used to monitor differential
falsework for all structures. Such drawings must settlement between column supports and provide
be accompanied by catalog cuts and a method a direct indication of deck movement that can be
statement describing the erection, monitoring, checked against the calculated deflection.
and adjustment procedures.
504.07 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND
The falsework plans must be legible and readily FALSEWORK
understood. They should also include the
following information:
Falsework and forms may be removed when the
concrete that they are supporting is strong
• A general layout of the falsework and enough to be self-supporting and withstand form
spacing of bents. removal damage. Forms and their supports must
not be removed without the approval of the
• An elevation view of the falsework bents,
Resident Engineer. The following description
showing spacing of columns (or piles) and
and Table 500.02 are taken from the Standard
showing caps and sway bracing.
Specifications and reflect the minimum
requirements.
500-25
Removal of the forms and falsework shall not

begin until the concrete has obtained the
percentage of the 28-day design strength or after FORM REMOVAL GUIDELINES
the period shown in Table 500.02, unless
otherwise authorized by the Resident Engineer. • Releasing and resetting supports will not be
permitted.
For cast-in-place, post-tensioned bridge • Honeycombed areas, areas that have air
superstructures, the falsework is to remain in pockets due to insufficient consolidation, must
place until all the post-tensioning has been be patched properly.
completed. • Excessive jarring, prying, or banging should
not take place during form removal. This can
Falsework under all bridge spans will be cause hairline cracks or spalling of the
completely released before the concrete is placed concrete.
for parapets, barriers, and medians. • Any holes left by removing projecting wire ties
or other metal devices are to be filled with
cement mortar. The cement mortar should be
For normal conditions, the above can usually be mixed in the same proportions as were used in
followed unless the daily temperature range is the concrete that is being repaired. Surfaces
lower than 20ºC maximum. With the must be damp before the mortar is applied.
temperature ranging between 4ºC and 20ºC or • The forms that are to be reused must be
lower, the strength gain of concrete is slow and handled properly. The shape, strength, rigidity,
the time should be extended unless compressive water-tightness, and surface smoothness are to
strength tests on samples, cured under similar be maintained.
conditions, indicate that the anticipated strength • Forms and falsework that support no load, such
at 28 days has been reached. The Resident as forms on most piers, abutments, walls,
Engineer should advise the Contractor before railings, and sides of beams, should be removed
as early as possible. Such early removal is to
concrete work starts that the time for removal of
be done, without damaging the concrete, to
forms and falsework is subject to the approval of facilitate the patching and finishing operation.
the Resident Engineer. In all cases, form
removal is to be supervised by an experienced
supervisor. The Resident Engineer should keep a
schedule of pouring dates and projected dates for
removal of forms and falsework to avoid either
premature or unduly delayed removal.
Table 500.02
Form Removal
Description Period Percentage of
Design Strength
Falsework supporting 14 days 80%
ramps, slabs, or beams
Walls 1 day 70%
Columns 2 days 70%
Sides of beams and all other 1 day 70%
vertical surfaces
500-26
504.08 REINFORCEMENT After the bars have been checked for certification
and markings, they can be stored until ready for
504.08.01 Materials use. The bars must be stored above ground on
platforms, skids, or other supports and should be
The epoxy-coated reinforcement manufacturer/ protected from damage, corrosion, dirt, scaling,
supplier must be approved by the Resident paint, oil, or other foreign substances. The bars
Engineer/Chief of Soils and Materials. Approval should be stored under cover.
will be based on test results on representative
samples and manufacturer’s certifications. The handling of epoxy-coated bars is important.
Materials delivered to the site should be checked All bundling bands are to be padded and all
as follows: bundles are to be lifted with a strongback,
multiple supports, or a platform bridge to
• Check the supplier’s delivery tickets, heat prevent bar to bar abrasion from the sags in the
number tags, and certificates of compliance bar bundle. The bars or bundles are not to be
for epoxy-coated bars. These tickets should dropped or dragged. Extra care in handling of
be compared to the documentation approved these bars is beneficial to the Contractor in
by the Resident Engineer. reducing or eliminating in-place coating repairs.
• Check the bars against the plan requirements Additional requirements for epoxy-coated bars
for proper grades, lengths, sizes, numbers, are as follows:
and bends. An identification tag should be
attached to each bundle or group of bars. • The Contractor is to supply a representative
0.28 kg sample of the coating material from
• Check all the bars for visible damage to the each batch of material. The sample is to be
epoxy coating. packaged in an airtight container and
identified by the batch number.
REINFORCEMENT
500-27
• In general, fabrication is to be performed • Tack welding instead of tying the rebar is not
before coating for bent bars and straight bars allowed.
less than 7.6 meters in length with the
following exceptions: • Check splices for the correct bar laps at the
splices.
1. For coating and then bending, the
fabricator must clearly demonstrate the • Splicing by welding will be permitted only if
satisfactory condition of the coating after indicated on the plans or if authorized by the
bending. Resident Engineer in writing. Where a weld
is made, the following is to be observed:
2. Bars less than 7.6 meters in length may be
sheared or sawn to length after coating, 1. Each weld must be of the specified size
provided end damage to the coating does and length.
not extend more than 12 mm from the cut
end and it is coated before any visible 2. The bars must not be burned.
oxidation appears. Flame cutting will not
3. The bars must not be made smaller at the
be permitted.
weld. The welds must not be cooled by
• The epoxy coating is to be checked visually wetting them with water.
for continuity of the coating. It must be free
4. Welding must be done by certified
from holes, contamination, cracks, and
welders.
damaged areas. There must not be more
than two holidays (pinholes not visually • Reinforcement steel temporarily left
discernible) in any 30 cm of the epoxy- projecting from the concrete at the joints is
coated bar. A holiday detector is to be used not to be bent without prior approval of the
according to the manufacturer’s instructions Resident Engineer.
to check the epoxy coating for holidays.
Bars having three or more holidays in 30 cm • The bars are to be properly spaced and
are to be cleaned and re-coated or replaced located.
as directed by the Resident Engineer.
• Watch for bent bars. If a bar with a bad
504.08.02 Placement kink or bend that is not required by the plans
is encountered, the bar should be rejected. If
All reinforcing steel is to be accurately placed the bend or kink is minor, it may be
and securely held in position. The Contractor straightened with a hammer. However, if a
has the option of placing the reinforcing steel bar is repeatedly bent it will be weakened.
either by the piece or in sections. Heating reinforcing bars for bending is not
allowed.
The following are items that should be observed
and checked during the placement of reinforcing • Check the condition of the bars. The surfaces
steel: should be free of dirt, oil, grease, mortar, or
any other foreign material that may prevent
• Count the number of bars used. The count the steel from bonding with the concrete.
should equal the number required by the Before concrete placement, the forms and
plans. rebar are to be flushed with clean neutral pH
water to wash away any atmospheric
• The correct size bars must be used in the conveyed chlorides. Excess wash water is to
specified locations. be allowed to drain away.
• All bars are to be securely tied in the proper
manner according to the specifications.
500-28
505 CONCRETE FINISHING surface irregularities and assure a uniform

color. After all concrete above the surface
Once the concrete has been placed and
being treated has been cast, the surface is
consolidated, it is the Contractor’s responsibility
then rubbed with a fine carborundum stone
to finish the concrete to the required elevations as
and water to remove excess paste. Finally,
shown in the plans. The method the Contractor
after the surface has dried, the surface is
uses to finish the concrete depends on what is
rubbed with burlap to remove any loose
being built. Small areas such as the tops of walls
powder remaining from the previous steps.
and columns are finished with wood floats.
Larger areas such as the tops of footings, floors,
box culverts, and pile caps may be finished using CONCRETE FINISHES
a screed that is drawn along with a perpendicular
back and forth motion over the tops of the forms,
then the surface is floated. Very large areas of There are three types of finishes in the Standard
concrete such as bridge decks are finished with a Specifications:
finishing machine.
• Class 1, Ordinary Surface Finish
All concrete shall be given an ordinary surface • Class 2, Rubbed Finish
finish unless a Class 2, rubbed finish, or a Class • Class 3, Surface Texture Treatment
3, surface texture treatment is specified. The
objective is to achieve a true surface, uniformity • Class 3, Surface Texture Treatment Where
of color and overall appearance, and a concrete specified, a surface texture treatment is
surface that will endure the elements over an accomplished with a form-liner or other
extended period of time. Guidelines and means of architectural features designed into
procedures for finishing concrete are as follows: the formwork.
• Class 1, Ordinary Surface Finish This is the Judging finishes is very subjective and is
first step in the finishing process of all influenced not only by the surface in question but
concrete and should be accomplished as soon also how it will affect or be effected by other
as the forms can be stripped. In the case of parts of the structure.
barrier rail, stripping of forms is completed
within 24 hours. Abutment and wing wall Although a poor Class 1 finish may require a
forms can usually be struck 3 days after the Class 2 finish, the basic criteria for concrete
concrete has been cast. The object is to finishing are as follows:
repair all defects, e.g., rock pockets,
honeycombed areas, air voids, removal of • Surfaces Not in View of Traffic Normally
unsightly bulges caused by deflection of only a Class 1 finish is required. If the Class
forms, removal of fins and projections of 1 finish is not acceptable, only the part of the
concrete (which mainly occur at form lines). structure that is not acceptable (wing wall,
The pointing of these defects and filling of pier, outside of curbs, etc.) will require a
she-bolt or form tie holes are discussed in the Class 2 finish.
specifications. Pre-saturation with water,
mix proportions, mortar usage, and curing • Surfaces in View of Traffic If only part of a
shall be as stated in the specifications. structure is unsatisfactory, such as one wing
wall of a box type structure, all parts will
• Class 2, Rubbed Finish The Class 2 finish, normally be given a Class 2 finish. The goal
which should immediately succeed the Class is to have a uniform appearance of all parts
1 finish, is well defined in the specifications that would be visible at one time. When the
and consists of rubbing the surface with a concrete barrier on only one side of a bridge
medium carborundum stone and cement design is unacceptable, both sides will be
paste to the extent necessary to remove all given a Class 2 finish for uniformity.
500-29
The Resident Engineer should not approve a on site. Only mixes using full packs are to be
delay in removal of forms or a delay in the used. Part pack mixes will not be permitted.
finishing unless there are valid and sufficient Repair mortars should not be applied when the
reasons for such delay. ambient temperature is below 5°C. Mixing shall
be carried out strictly in accordance with the
It is difficult and more costly to obtain a finish manufacturer’s recommendations using only
on hardened concrete equal to that obtained by suitable mechanical mixers. The Contractor is to
finishing the concrete while it is still green. The ensure the correct equipment is on site. The
Resident Engineer should not accept inferior liquid components shall always be thoroughly
finishing, regardless of the method used. mixed together first and the powder/filler added
to the mixed liquids. Under no circumstances
Excessive use of water to facilitate the finishing shall any other components be used in the mix
operation should not be allowed due to other than those supplied or recommended by the
weakening of the outer portion of the concrete, manufacturer.
which can lead to premature spalling or scaling.
Use of a sand/cement paste to “plaster” the 506.02 CONCRETE PREPARATION
concrete surface to achieve the required finish
will also not be permitted.
The damaged concrete shall be broken out.
Where the removal depth corresponds to the
506 CONCRETE REPAIRS depth of concrete cover and thereby exposes
Certain minor defects such as cracks, honeycomb reinforcement, breaking out shall continue to
pockets, and chipped edges or corners of expose the full circumference of the steel and to
concrete structures that are not detrimental to the a further depth of 20-30mm or as directed by the
structural integrity may be tolerated by the Engineer. The depth of breakout for any repair
Resident Engineer if proper repairs are made. area shall be a minimum of 10mm and feathered
Damaged areas to be repaired or replaced will be edges will not be accepted. To achieve this, the
determined by the Engineer on a case by case rim of the area to be repaired shall first be cut to
basis. Where repairs are allowed, an epoxy a depth of about 10mm using a suitable tool.
mortar material will be used. The following The areas shall be cleaned as necessary with any
describes the materials and procedures to be combination of suitable grit, steel brush, water-
followed in performing epoxy mortar repairs: blasting technique, compressed air, or any other
suitable means in order to remove any remaining
506.01 MATERIALS loose material. The preparation shall be such as
to leave a sound exposed concrete substrate free
from dust, loose particles, and any deleterious
In vertical or overhead locations, the repair
matter. Reinforcement damaged during the
material shall be a lightweight, high-build epoxy
removal of concrete or the preparation process
resin, non-shrink repair mortar. In horizontal
shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of
locations, or vertical locations where the repaired
the Engineer.
areas will be subjected to physical abrasion, the
repair material shall be an abrasion resistant,
506.03 CONCRETE BONDING AGENT
epoxy resin, non-shrink repair mortar. In
locations where an impermeable lining or render
is required, the repair material shall be an Depending on the final selection of the type of
abrasion resistant, epoxy resin, lining mortar. epoxy mortar, an appropriate concrete bonding
The Contractor will submit product agent shall be used in strict compliance with the
specifications and performance data to the manufacturer’s requirements. The bonding agent
Resident Engineer for approval of epoxy mortar shall be prepared in accordance with the
compounds prior to use. manufacturer’s instructions. It shall be worked
into the irregularities of the substrate according
The resin mortars are to be of the pre-measured, to the manufacturer’s recommendations before
pre-packed type so that no batching is required commencing to apply the repair mortar. The
500-30
timing of the repair mortar application must be In practice, two methods of curing have proven
in accordance with the instructions of the effective for most concrete work:
bonding agent manufacturer. The repair area
may be approached in stages to allow for proper
timing of the bonding agent. If the application CONCRETE CURING METHODS
becomes dry, it shall be removed before applying
another coat. • Supplying Additional Moisture by water curing.
506.04 APPLICATION • Preventing Moisture Loss by using waterproof

paper, plastic sheets, or membrane-forming
curing compounds.
Particular care shall be taken in the application
of the repair mortar. It shall be applied by
trowel or gloved hands to the prepared and
primed surface of the substrate and be well 507.01 DAMP CURING
compacted, paying particular attention to filling
behind and between exposed reinforcement. This method includes covering the finished work
Where necessary, the repair mortar shall be built
with wetted burlap sheets completely and then
up in successive wet on wet layers to the
sealing the moisture in with polyethylene
necessary profile. The maximum thickness
(plastic) sheeting. Polyethylene draped loosely
recommended by the manufacturer shall not be
over the concrete is worthless. It must be
exceeded. If sagging occurs, the mortar must be
fastened down in a manner that will prevent
completely removed prior to filling the void in
circulation of air between the concrete and the
two or more successive applications or filling the
polyethylene. Burlap mats must be wet when
void in one application with the use of temporary
applied and kept continuously wet or they are of
formwork, in full accordance with the
little value except to prevent the direct rays of
manufacturer’s recommendations. After applying
the sun from striking the concrete. Only the
sufficient mortar to build the surface to the
areas of a concrete member actually being
required level or to achieve the required cover to
finished should be left uncovered during the
the reinforcement, the surface shall be troweled
finishing process. The Inspector must
smooth to the finished profiles. The finished
continually monitor the protected work to see
surface shall be worked to match the adjacent
that the sheeting is in place and properly secured
concrete surfaces so that the exposed mortar
and the burlap is moist.
blends in to produce a neat repair.
507.02 LIQUID MEMBRANE METHOD
507 CURING
Proper curing procedures are extremely When a liquid membrane curing compound is to
important in the harsh thermal climate within the be applied to an exposed horizontal surface, it
Emirates. Concrete gains strength as the should be applied at the time the water sheen has
chemical reaction called hydration between the just left the surface. On formed surfaces that
cement and the water takes place binding the require a Class 1 finish, it should be applied as
aggregates together. The water must be kept soon as possible after removal of the forms,
inside the concrete to allow full hydration to take delaying its application only long enough to
place. If the concrete dries out, hydration will permit any needed repair work to be done. On
stop and hairline cracks could develop. To surfaces that require a Class 2 finish, it is
prevent this from happening, the concrete must somewhat of a problem to perform good
be cured as soon as possible after placement and finishing and the curing simultaneously. Both
continued for at least 7 days or as otherwise are important and both need to be performed
specified in a manner that will produce sound, early. The specifications provide for keeping the
strong, durable concrete. surfaces covered with polyethylene, wet burlap,
or wet cotton mats during the process of
500-31
performing the finishing for a Class 2 finish. specified in the Particular Specifications or
Since this is usually the critical period for proper directed by the Resident Engineer, all structures
curing, the Inspector shall make certain that are to receive a Type A waterproof membrane.
whatever method of protection is used, it will be
effective. 508.01 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE,
TYPE A
If the Contractor has elected to perform the Before any application of the waterproof
curing by means of the liquid membrane method, membrane is made, the Contractor is responsible
the temporary covering should be removed and for submitting the proposed materials to the
the compound applied before the surface has lost Resident Engineer for approval. The individual
its moisture. If too dry, it should be thoroughly components; primer, membrane, and protection
moistened before applying the compound. board must be compatible and endorsed by the
Curing compounds are applied by low pressure membrane manufacturer.
spraying devices, as a mist, which is easily
windborne, therefore, coverage may not be Upon receipt of the written approval of the
uniform. Holidays or small openings in the Resident Engineer, the Contractor is responsible
resulting membrane often appear on the leeward for delivering the products to the job site in
side of surface texture irregularities. Proper unopened containers that are clearly labeled with
shielding should be provided to minimize this the manufacturer’s name, brand designation,
potential problem or another type of curing, type, and class. The products are to be stored in
which would provide a minimum of at least one an approved dry area with all roll goods placed
gallon of compound per nine square meters of one pallet high and laid flat. The Contractor is
bridge deck surface, should be used. The responsible for ensuring that the products are
Inspector should be sure to monitor the site kept dry at all times and that they are protected
conditions for possible variation in the rate. The from contact with soil and exposure to the
materials in many curing compounds separate elements.
and may need agitation before use. The
specifications do not specifically require The Contractor is to coordinate the application
agitation but the Resident Engineer may require of the self-adhering waterproofing membrane
it to maintain the integrity of the curing work so that the placement of the protection
compound. Unapproved curing compounds are board follows the waterproofing membrane
not to be used. Thorough mixing should be done application within a reasonable time. The
at least once daily while curing compound is application of the primer materials can be made
being used. using a brush or roller. The membrane sheet is to
be applied with 12 cm overlaps at the edges and
The rate of application of the compound should ends, and rolled down firmly and completely. If
be checked occasionally and a record made in the the work must be left partially complete, the
Inspector’s diary as to the area covered and exposed edges on the outside strips are to be
quantity used. finished with a trowelled bead of mastic. The
following procedure for fixing the membrane to
508 WATERPROOFING CONCRETE the concrete surfaces should be complied with:
SURFACES
• Primer Over a cleaned concrete surface, the
Generally, all concrete below grade is to be primer is applied following the membrane
protected with a complete waterproofing manufacturer’s printed instructions and
membrane system. There are two types of allowed to dry. If the concrete is not covered
waterproof membrane, Type A and Type B. All within 36 hours, re-priming is required. The
materials used for waterproofing are to comply membrane should be installed after
with the Standard Specifications, Section V-8, structures are completed to avoid a
Subsection 508.03 for Type A waterproofing piecemeal application with an excessive
membrane and Subsection 508.04 for Type B number of seams.
waterproofing membrane. Unless otherwise
500-32
WATERPROOFING
• Membrane After the primer has dried, the to the outer edge of the slab and is to be
Contractor is to apply the self-adhering protected until the following overhead work
membrane to the concrete surface without is completed. Membrane that is placed on
stretching and with the polyethylene face out. sidewalls is to extend down and out to the
The membrane is to be smoothed down with edge of the previously applied horizontal
heavy hand pressure or with a small roller. slab membrane.
The edges and ends are to be lapped as
specified. • Reglet Where the top of the membrane ends
at a reglet, the membrane is to extend therein
• Corners and Edges The inside and outside and the reglet is to be filled with rubberized
corners of the membrane are to be doubled mastic.
using an initial strip of 30 cm width
membrane centered along the axis of the • Protrusions Areas around piping and
corner. The strip is then to be covered by a protrusions are to be double covered with an
regular application of the self-adhering additional layer of self-adhering membrane
membrane. All exposed edges of the for a minimum of 300 mm in all directions.
membrane are to receive a trowelled bead of The membrane edges are to be coated and
mastic. the gaps between the protrusions are to be
filled with a rubberized mastic.
• Horizontal Slabs and Sidewalls Membrane
that is placed on horizontal slabs is to extend
500-33
• Protection Board Within a reasonable time 510 RECORDS

after the membrane application, the
The Joint Measurement Sheets and the
Contractor is to install an asphalt protection
Inspector’s Daily Report should thoroughly
board to the vertical and horizontal
document the work prepared and approved for
membrane coated concrete surfaces. The
concrete placement. The erection of steel
protection board is to be applied with the
reinforcement and formwork is a time-consuming
polyethylene face out and in two layers.
operation and errors in the work discovered late
Butted edges and ends of the protection
in the procedure may have a serious effect on the
board are to be glued to the membrane using
schedule and require significant rework. The
mastic or an approved compound. The
Inspector and Surveyor should check each stage
second layer joints of the protection board
of the operation as the work proceeds.
are to be staggered in relation to the joints in
Reinforcement bar size, spacing, and clearances
the first layer. All exposed edges and gaps
should be checked as it is placed - not after the
are to be pointed up with mastic between the
formwork is installed. Progress of the work
penetrations and edges of the protection
including inspections made, instructions to the
board.
Contractor, noted deficiencies with follow-up
• Repairs The Contractor is responsible for corrective action, and approvals given should be
repairing all gouges and other damage to the reported in detail by the Inspector.
completed membrane by means of membrane
patches applied before the placement of the During the placement operation, the Inspector
protection courses. should note the frequency and results of slump
tests, where cubes are taken relative to the pour,
and any other notes pertaining to the concrete
509 TESTING
mix, delivery, placement, or finishing operation.
Attention of the Resident Engineer and the The Inspector should continue to monitor the
Inspectors is called to Section V of the Standard work through the curing period.
Specifications and the Contract Special
Conditions. These provide detailed instructions 511 MEASUREMENT AND
regarding the testing required before and during PAYMENT
the construction of concrete works.
Section V, Concrete Works, of the Standard
Specifications provides detailed instructions
regarding the measurement and payment for the
work and materials presented in this section of
the Construction Supervision Manual.
500-34
SECTION 600 samples to decide whether the materials will meet

the specifications. Second, sample testing of
STORM WATER DRAINAGE
materials that are actually delivered on the job or
set aside for shipment. Lastly, a visual
601 GENERAL inspection at the installation site to guard against
Storm water drainage systems provide for the defects in workmanship or damage in handling.
collection and disposal of storm water and
pavement runoff and provide for the passage of Inspection of concrete pipe is done by the
storm water and intercepted ground water flows materials section at the manufacturing plant.
in natural drainage channels through the project Accepted material will be marked and a
site. The construction of storm water drainage certification will be issued to the Contractor. The
systems consists of earthwork, furnishing and Resident Engineer will inspect the concrete pipe
installing pipe systems and drainage structures, upon delivery to the project and at the
testing, and other related work items as indicated installation site for approval markings by tags,
in the contract documents. The Resident cards, or other means as allowed by the
Engineer is to be familiar with all the specifications. Where tags or cards are used,
requirements of Section VI of the Standard they will be placed on the lips of the pipes.
Specifications regarding the construction of Marks (or stamps) will be placed on the inside of
storm water drainage systems. the pipe. Even though the pipe was inspected at
the plant, it is not finally accepted until it is in
The drainage design provides for the necessary place and completely backfilled. It is sometimes
drainage systems. However, it is impossible to necessary to reject pipe even after it has been
foresee all drainage problems that may result for backfilled, because evidence of latent defects
the construction of a roadway. The Resident appeared after the pipe was in-place.
Engineer should review the plans and the project,
particularly in periods of heavy rain, to 603 EARTHWORK
determine the drainage pattern and assure that
603.01 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
the designer provided drainage systems to
accommodate the run off. Should there be any
changes in the actual runoff pattern or perceived Excavation for structures should be adequate to
quantity of flow, the provided drainage design fit the structure to be installed and should
may require some adjustment which must be provide sufficient room for forms and bracing
approved by the Design Engineer. and working space, if required. Economy will
generally dictate that the excavations are the
The Contractor is required to prepare detailed minimum necessary. Undisturbed natural ground
shop drawings of the storm water drainage under and at the sides of the structure generally
system including annotating any differences on provides better support for the structure than will
the plans and profiles. Existing utilities will be backfill material.
shown in plan and profile and any differences
will be annotated on the plans. Excavation for storm water drainage systems
shall be according to Section VI-2, Subsection
602 MATERIALS 602.03 of the Standard Specifications. All
earthwork shall also comply with the applicable
The requirements, tolerance limits, and requirements of Section II, Earthwork, of the
procedures for acceptance of certain materials Standard Specifications.
are given in Section VI-1 of the Standard
Specifications. The quality of material used on
the job will be controlled in three steps. First, by
an examination of manufacturer’s data and
600-1
When unexpected soft or weak material that is

not capable of supporting the proposed storm
TRENCH EXCAVATION GUIDELINES
water drainage lines or structures is discovered,
the Contractor is required to notify the Resident
Engineer in writing before proceeding with • Rock, hardpan, or other unyielding material
construction. However, the Resident Engineer should be removed to at least 15 cm below the
foundation grade.
and Inspectors should be aware of the possibility
• All trenching, pipe laying, encasement, and
of weak soils from geotechnical investigations backfilling operations shall be performed in a
and be capable of identifying soft material. This dry condition. Dewatering systems are required
material is to be handled in accordance with the in high groundwater areas.
Standard Specifications, Section VI-2, Sub- • All suitable excavated material may be used as
section 602.06 backfill or embankment according to the
Standard Specifications.
603.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION • The typical width for the unlimited width trench
condition is the width of the cradle plus at least
45cm more on each side in order to form and
Generally, the strength requirements of buried place the pipe cradle and/or encasement.
pipes are based on the width of trench, the depth • A trench may be dug with vertical sides in
of cover, and the bedding condition of the pipe. stable earth but in most cases the material must
There are two general trench width conditions, a be sloped to counteract the tendency to cave-in.
limited trench condition where there are vertical A slope of 1:6 will ordinarily be sufficient in
walls of native material, and an unlimited trench firm earth if the trench does not stand open too
width where the trench walls slope away or long. In less stable or sandy material,
embankments are placed on top of the pipe after excavating a 1:1 slope will be necessary for
safety and stability.
installation of the pipe. The concrete cradle and
• For deep excavations or when flattening of side
encasement requirements significantly improve slopes is impractical, the trench walls must be
the strength of the pipe. braced or sheeted. Bracing or sheet piling
details and calculations must be submitted to
Concrete cradles are the same for both trench the Resident Engineer for approval before their
conditions except the unlimited width trench use.
requires reinforcement beneath the pipe. In the • The Contractor is solely responsible for
limited width trench, the concrete is placed ensuring that all applicable trench safety
directly against the undisturbed trench sides standards as directed by local law are enforced
providing greater resistance to the applied loads, to ensure that a safe work environment is
maintained.
thus reinforcement is not required. The unlimited
• The excavated material should be stockpiled
trench width installation applies when the
well back from the edge of the excavation so it
Contractor over excavates the trench width or the will not slough back in or cause the trench wall
trench walls cannot be excavated vertically to cave-in.
within the concrete encasement limits. The • The Resident Engineer shall observe the
dimensions of the excavation shown on the excavation and inform the Contractor when an
drawings are to be maintained to assure that the unsafe condition exists. The Contractor is
specified strength of pipe will be capable of required to immediately instruct the workmen to
handling the embankment or trench loads. Wider get out of such an unsafe trench and correct the
trenches impose more load on the pipe and could situation.
cause failure.
600-2
Two typical trench conditions are depicted on the

Standard Drawings as illustrated below:
600-3
603.03 FOUNDATION certifications or other pertinent papers that may

accompany the shipment.
It is essential that the foundation under pipes and
Care shall be exercised as the Contractor
drainage structures provide a firm and uniform
distributes pipe at installation points throughout
support Unstable foundation material should be
the project. Pipe that has been damaged by
removed and replaced with satisfactory material.
rough, careless handling should be rejected.
If this cannot be done, a layer of sand, gravel, or
Before installing pipe, it shall be inspected for
other suitable material should be placed so a
manufacturing defects or for defects caused by
stable foundation is formed. Over excavation of
improper handling. Any defective pipe that
the trench bottom should be avoided except for
cannot be repaired to the complete satisfaction of
removal of unsuitable materials. The bottom of
the Resident Engineer shall be rejected and not
the trench should be shaped and leveled to grade
used on the project. Section VI-1 of the Standard
by hand. Finally, a vibratory plate compactor
Specifications lists causes for rejection of pipes.
and hand tampers should be used to compact the
foundation material.
PIPE DEFECTS
In high groundwater areas, the trench must be
completely dewatered such that there is no
• Serious cracks having a width of 0.25 mm or
seepage or standing water at the bottom of the
more, a continuous length of 30 cm or more, or
trench. Dewatering methods are numerous and as specified in the Standard Specifications.
the Contractor’s responsibility. The Contractor • Exposed reinforcing steel.
should be knowledgeable about the specific • Shattering or flaking of concrete at a crack.
dewatering requirements for the project. • Deficiencies in pipe wall thickness.
• Bubble voids exceeding 6 mm in depth.
A class K140 concrete mud slab is placed on the • Unauthorized application of a wash coat or
prepared pipeline foundation to provide a stable grout.
working platform. Anchors are generally • Variation of the internal diameter of one
installed in the concrete at regular intervals to percent or more.
assist with the forming and bracing of the pipes
to the required line and grade.
604.03 INSTALLATION AND
604 PIPE LAYING, JOINTING INSPECTION
604.01 GENERAL Installation of pipe shall be in accordance with

he Standard Specifications and as indicated on
the plans and Standard Drawings. Suitable
The proposed sites for installation of pipe should
equipment must be provided for handling and
be carefully observed to ensure that the planned
lowering the sections of pipe. The interior of the
location, skew angle, and lengths are proper for
pipe shall be free of any dirt or foreign material
each installation. It is the responsibility of the
and kept clean as the work progresses. Several
Contractor to check and verify the pipe lengths
important aspects of pipe installation are as
before he orders the pipe.
follows:
604.02 CARE IN HANDLING PIPE
1. Survey Control The Contractor’s survey
crew sets the controls used in placing the
Unloading, storing, and handling of pipe should pipeline to the proper grade and alignment.
be inspected by the Resident Engineer or his The proposed location of the pipe is
Inspector. Care should be exercised by the generally defined with offset hubs and tacks,
Contractor in unloading the pipe to ensure that it accompanied by separate guard stakes.
is not damaged. At the time the pipe arrives on Each guard stake shows the horizontal
the project, the Inspector shall check the quantity distance from the tack to the pipe centerline
and sizes received and obtain any testing or end of the pipe. It also shows the cut
depth to the pipe flow line. The stakes should
600-4
be placed to allow each joint or section of 3. Joining Pipe The method of joining rigid pipe
pipe to be easily adjusted to the proper line requires careful attention. The ends must be
and grade. fully shoved home and the inner surfaces
should be reasonably flush and even. Joints
2. Pipe Laying Pipe laying should proceed for rigid pipe must be made with rubber
starting at the low end of the section between gaskets recommended by the manufacturer
drainage structures. The first pipe section and approved by the Resident Engineer.
should be a short (3.0 Meters maximum) Rubber gaskets must form a flexible
piece adjacent to the drainage structure and watertight seal. The Inspector should ensure
properly located with respect to the drainage that gasket lubricants are compatible with
structure. The drainage structure is generally the gasket. Petroleum based lubricants could
constructed first simplifying the proper damage rubber gasket materials.
positioning of the pipe but this is optional.
Bell and spigot pipes should always be laid 4. Pipe Bedding Pipe bedding is intended to
with the “bell” end at the higher elevation provide a uniform foundation that will
than the spigot end. The reinforcement minimize the effects of differential settlement
required for the unlimited width trench and assist the pipe in resisting embankment
condition should be in place and fixed to the loads. Two types of pipe bedding are used;
bedding anchors prior to pipe laying. The a concrete cradle and concrete encasement.
mud slab should be thoroughly cleaned prior Concrete pipe is supported by a concrete
to the pipe laying operation as later cleaning cradle unless otherwise specified on the
of soils and debris is difficult. The pipes plans. GRP pipe is always placed in concrete
should be fixed in final position using encasement. The Resident Engineer should
precast concrete wedge blocks. After be familiar with the requirements set forth in
checking by the Surveyor, the pipes are fixed the Standard Drawings, Standard
to the bedding anchors using wire ties. Specifications, Section VI-2, Subsection
Bedding anchors are used to resist floatation 602.07 regarding concrete bedding for
of the pipe during the concrete pour for the pipelines and mud slabs for storm water
concrete cradle or concrete encasement. drainage.
CONCRETE PIPE CRADLE
600-5
5. Concrete Cradle After the pipe has been documents or, in the opinion of the Engineer,
laid, a concrete cradle is formed by pouring is unsuitable.
concrete up to the “springline” or widest
point on the pipe. In fill sections, the Backfill material must be placed and
embankment must be built up and compacted compacted in 15 cm maximum layers. Each
at least 30 cm above the top of the proposed layer of backfill must be mechanically
pipe before digging of the trench can begin. tamped to 95 percent of the maximum
density. Imported backfill material must
6. Concrete Encasement Concrete encasement consist of borrow material selected from
is used for all GRP pipe. It is also used for approved borrow pits unless otherwise
high embankment conditions where trench indicated on the plans.
loads on the pipe are very high. The
Inspector should make sure that the thickness The load supporting strength of any pipe is
and concrete strength requirements are never directly affected by the condition of the
less than shown on the plans. material around the pipe and of the bedding
material. Usually, the higher the degree of
7. Forming Forming may be required for the compaction of the backfill, the less the pipe
unlimited trench width condition to contain will deform under load. Consolidation of the
the concrete encasement and/or cradle. material alongside the pipe results in an
Forms must be firmly braced against the increased transfer of the embankment load
sides of the trench to avoid deflection and directly onto the pipe.
maintain the proper clearances as indicated
on the Standard Drawings. Backfill and compaction between the
concrete encasement or cradle and trench
8. Concrete Placement The completed walls for the unlimited trench width
installation should be checked and approved condition needs special attention. Hand
by the Inspector and Surveyor prior to tampers and vibratory plate compactors may
pouring concrete. Concrete placement, not achieve the desired compaction rates due
finishing, and curing operations are to working in narrow widths. The
described in Section 500. Contractor’s operation should be carefully
scrutinized to ensure the required
compaction is being achieved. Caution
CONCRETE POUR CHECKLIST
should be used to avoid over-tamping to the
extent that the pipe is lifted out of position.
9 Pipe grade and alignment are proper.
9 Adequate forming and bracing is in place.

10. Compaction by Flooding Techniques
Compaction by flooding techniques may be
9 Pipes are firmly anchored to prevent allowed up to 1.5 m below finish grade
displacement and flotation. subject to the following conditions:
9 Flexible joint materials are installed according • The material is considered suitable for
to the plans and
placement under this method by the
9 securely braced. Resident Engineer. (Note: The majority
of superficial deposits on Abu Dhabi
9 The installation is completely dewatered. Island are suitable for this type of
9 The pipes, reinforcement, and mud-slab have placement, as they were generally
been washed with clear, fresh water. deposited in this way originally.)
• The material will be placed in evenly

9. Backfilling The material to be used for
deposited lifts not exceeding 0.5 m.
backfilling of trenches will be the material
Dewatering equipment will be in place
taken from the excavation unless it is
and operational during the entire
specifically disallowed in the contract
backfilling operation by this method.
600-6
• The discharge hose of the dewatering 2. Geotextile Material Geotextile material is

system will be used to flood the placed placed on the prepared and approved
material to be compacted, with subgrade including the pipe trench.
additional tanked water being applied to Geotextile material overlap will be as
provide sufficient water levels, if deemed specified on the plans or in the
necessary. specifications.
• After flooding, water will be drawn 3. Pervious Backfill Type III A 5 cm layer of
down to a level that is under the base granular backfill material is placed over the
elevation of the lift. geotextile fabric which aids in the filtering of
fines and provides a cushion for the pipe
• Repeated flooding and draw down cycles during placement. The material must be
will continue until the specified carefully placed to avoid damage or
compaction and elevation is reached. displacement of the filter fabric. Hauling and
The use of vibratory compaction spreading equipment should always be on the
equipment may help to achieve the placed material and not on the geotextile.
required compaction.
4. Perforated PVC Pipe The perforated pipe is
• A minimum of two acceptable in-situ placed in the trench fully bedded over its
density test results per layer per section length with pervious backfill type III
will be required. Moisture content by material. The grade and alignment should be
‘Speedy’ moisture methods should be checked and approved by the Surveyor and
used to ensure test results are made Inspector prior to allowing the Contractor to
available in the shortest possible time. completely backfill the pipe. Approval
should include complete and proper
605 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES AND connections to the receiving drainage
APPURTENANCES structure and PVC end caps at the upper
ends.
605.01 PAVEMENT SUBBASE
DRAINAGE SYSTEM 5. Pervious Backfill Type V Pervious backfill
type V is a coarse mixture of aggregates
The purpose of the pavement subbase drainage from 1/2” to 8” graded in accordance with
system is to remove excess water from the the specifications. A 20cm layer is typically
aggregate base courses under the pavement specified and must be compacted to 95% of
resulting from high ground water conditions that the maximum dry density.
are prevalent on Abu Dhabi Island. The subbase
drainage system consists of perforated pipes The completed installation must be inspected
placed parallel to and under all low side curb in place by the Municipality Representative in
lines of main roads, parking areas, service and accordance with the Standard Specifications.
sector roads. The perforated pipes are connected
605.02 MANHOLES, INLETS, AND
to the storm water drainage system. Pervious
CATCH BASINS
backfill material which surrounds the perforated
pipe is separated from the existing soils or 605.02.01 General
subgrade material by a geotextile material. The
procedures for construction of the subbase Before work begins on any drainage structure,
drainage system are described as follows: the Inspector and the Surveyor should examine
the plans and the Contractor’s staking to assure
1. Shop Drawings The Contractor will include that the structure will be properly located and
the perforated pipe system on the storm pipe connections suitably aligned with
water drainage system shop drawings thestructure walls. Adjustments may be needed
identifying pipe locations, invert elevations, to improve the integrity of the structure.
and connections to the drainage structures.
600-7
GEOTEXTILE MATERIAL IN PLACE
SPREADING PERVIOUS BACKFILL TYPE III

All drainage structures are required by the materials or liners according to Table 600.01, as
specifications to be waterproofed and protected follows:
from the corrosive soil environment by coating
600-8
Table 600.01
Drainage Structure
Waterproofing
Structure Exterior Interior
Inlets Waterproofing Membrane Type A Coal Tar Epoxy
Catch Basins Waterproofing Membrane Type A Coal Tar Epoxy
Manholes Waterproofing Membrane Type A GRP Liner
Junction Chambers Waterproofing Membrane Type A GRP Liner
The Standard Specifications allow precasting of ensure the pipe connections will be straight and
various drainage structures or components. The at the proper invert elevations.
Contractor is required to prepare detailed shop
drawings and method statements for the Resident 605.02.05 Wall Construction
Engineer’s approval of both precast and cast-in-
situ components of the drainage system. The Reinforced concrete construction guidelines are
Inspector should be thoroughly familiar with the included in Section 500. Drainage structures
approved shop drawings. typically consist of heavily reinforced concrete
buried structures with numerous corners, angles,
605.02.02 Excavation pipe connections, and benches. They require
careful attention for placement of reinforcement
The excavation for structures shall allow suitable and formwork to obtain necessary clearances and
space between the outside of the structure and permit proper spacing and vibration of the
the suitably supported soil face for construction concrete. The Inspector should assure that the
and inspection of the structure before backfilling. Contractor has carefully conformed to the
Excavations must be suitably braced, sheeted, or approved shop drawings and has anticipated
sloped back in accordance with the specification problems prior to concrete placement.
requirements. The Inspector shall insist on a
safe working environment at all structure 605.02.06 Pipe Connections
locations. Overexcavation should be avoided
and any disturbed materials shall be Pipe connection requirements vary with the type
recompacted, tested, and approved prior to of pipe material and structure detailed as
placement of the concrete mud slab. follows:
605.02.03 Mud Slab • RCP - RCP ends projecting into structures

are usually special sections manufactured
A 10 cm thick K140 concrete mud slab is placed specifically for each location to meet the
on the approved subgrade extending at least 15 requirements in the specifications for the
cm beyond the structure in all directions. PVC liner protection. RCP pipes are always
connected at 90° to the structure wall.
605.02.04 Concrete Base
• GRP - GRP pipe ends are flush-cut to
Prior to placement of the precast or cast-in-situ match the inner wall and protected with a
base, any protective membrane is to be laid on resin rich coating. GRP connections to
the mud slab. The contractor must take suitable preformed inner and/or outer liners may
measures to protect the membrane during require a field joint. The jointing should
subsequent operations. Pipe alignment should be only be performed by prequalified personnel
checked carefully. Special care must be taken and procedures approved by the Resident
for precast units or prefabricated GRP liners to Engineer.
600-9
JUNCTION CHAMBER CONSTRUCTION WITH GRP LINER
• Precast Units - Blockouts are normally pipe materials. Various exfiltration and
provided in precast structures to accept infiltration test procedures and allowable
minor pipe connections. The connection tolerances are detailed in the specifications.
procedures should be detailed in the
Contractor’s approved method statement. 607 RECORDS
Epoxy bonding is required for all such
Drainage system construction involves many
construction joints.
different items which comprise a large portion of
the Bill of Quantities. An efficient and orderly
605.02.07 Frames & Covers
means of recording and documenting the
inspection, testing, and measurement of the work
Installation details will be shown on the
will ensure that all items and operations have
approved shop drawings. Normally the walls of
been checked and approved.
inlet or catch basin structures are constructed to
within 30 cm of finished elevation to allow the
Organization begins at the shop drawing
frame and cover to be set and aligned with the
preparation stage when the Contractor and
curb. The frame should be supported in position
Resident Engineer discuss and agree on a number
using metal chairs or precast K250 concrete
identification system for all structures and
blocks. Manhole frames are anchored with
pipelines that will track the operations from
galvanized rods as shown on the plans.
initial excavation through final testing of the
work. Summary forms that record the progress
606 TESTING of work for pipe runs and structures should be
Testing for watertightness is required for completed and maintained daily for the benefit of
drainage system pipelines and structures in all supervision staff as well as the Contractor.
accordance with the Standard Specifications.
Deflection testing is also required for flexible
600-10
A sample format is illustrated below:
SURFACE DRAINAGE WORKS - PROGRESS SUMMARY Contract C-N-X
Pipe Type Depth Trench Mud Pipe Concrete Backfill & Compaction Testing
Run Size Category Exc Slab Placed Cradle/Enc L-1 L-2 L-3 L-4
A1-C3 300 1.5-3.0m √ √ √ √ √ √ √ N/A √

GRP 6/10/95 7/10/95 12/10/95 14-10-95 21/10 23/10 25/10 15-11
The summary forms represent the status of each

operation that is finally documented on the Joint
Measurement Sheet when the particular item is
acceptably completed.
600-11
SECTION 700 702 FOUNDATIONS

BRIDGES 702.01 SPREAD FOOTINGS
701 GENERAL Spread footing foundations may be used for

Bridge types are usually classified according to structures located in soils with good bearing
their supporting members in the superstructure support characteristics, and are commonly used
(beams and girders). The following lists a brief for lighter structures such as retaining walls.
description of the more common types of bridge
structures. The elevations of the bottoms of the footings that
are shown on the plans are determined from soil
701.01 CAST-IN-PLACE POST- data secured from test holes, borings, or other
TENSIONED CONCRETE BOX sources. During excavation, the Resident
GIRDER Engineer should observe the characteristics of
materials removed to confirm that the material is
similar to that identified in the test borings. If
Cast-in-Place Post-Tensioned Box Girder is the
the material is similar, he will note the soil
most frequently constructed bridge design in Abu
profile elevation of the material encountered and
Dhabi. The reinforced concrete box girders are
may approve the footing elevation. The actual
typically multicelled with several interior webs
soils should be comparable to the test samples.
and diaphragms. Stressing tendons are inserted
If the material differs from the test borings, the
into integrally cast ducts located within the
Chief Soils Engineer should be consulted.
beams, and are anchored and stressed after the
concrete has developed a specified strength, then
702.02 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS
pressure grouted. The deck slab is constructed
as a separate pour. This type of bridge is
normally constructed on falsework and can Most major structures in Abu Dhabi are founded
accommodate relatively long spans. on piles. Pile foundations may be driven or
bored, however, bored piles are typically
701.02 PRECAST I-GIRDERS(AASHTO specified. Bored piles can be installed using a
GIRDERS) permanent casing or liner that remains in place
and is not withdrawn as the concrete is placed.
The Contractor is required to submit a method
This type of bridge uses precast girder elements
statement for the installation of bored piles to the
that are either pre-stressed or post-tensioned to
Resident Engineer for approval. The procedure
form the superstructure. The deck slab is
and tolerances detailed in the method statement
normally cast-in-place and integral with the
will be in accordance with the contract drawings
girders. This type of bridge allows bridge
and specification requirements and also include
construction over traffic but has limited span
procedures for dealing with obstructions
capabilities.
encountered, maintaining vertical plumb, etc., to
ensure the works are carried out properly and
701.03 STEEL STRUCTURES
efficiently. The formation level surrounding the
pile array should be prepared to the elevation of
Steel bridges utilize plate girders or I-beams as the top of the pile reinforcement to allow the pile
the primary structural components and can be equipment to access all piles.
designed in a variety of styles depending on span,
clearance, and architectural considerations. Where it is not practical or feasible to dewater
the pile casing, the concrete may be placed by the
tremie method with the prior approval of the
Engineer.
700-1
water before the reinforcement and concrete is

placed.
PILE METHOD STATEMENT CONTENTS
703 BRIDGE SUBSTRUCTURE
• Site Preparation
• Permanent Casing Installation The bridge abutments and intermediate supports
• Boring Operations or bents on multi-span structures comprise the
• Reinforcement Installation & Details bridge substructure which is constructed directly
• Concreting Operations on the completed foundation. The procedures for
• Materials reinforced concrete construction in Section 500
• Schedule include the requirements for substructure
• Equipment construction.
• Test Loading Method
• Load Test Schedule For pile foundations, the Inspector should ensure
• Settlement Measurement Method that the subgrade around the piles is not overly
• Hydraulic Jack Capacity Calculations disturbed and is properly prepared for pile cap
• Calibration Certificates construction. The top of each concrete pile
• Load Test Arrangement should be checked to ensure that a firm and
relatively level surface is provided by chipping
away irregularities or contaminated concrete.
The permanent casing should be adequately
Protruding reinforcement should be checked for
seated in the rock bearing materials to avoid
damage and that bar bending is in accordance
groundwater infiltration. A penetration of 2 pile
with the plan requirements.
diameters normally provides a good seal and
bearing. The casings must be clean and free of
PILE FOUNDATION ARRAY
700-2
704 BRIDGE SUPERSTRUCTURE weeks before placing the concrete in the deck, a
pre-construction conference should be held to go
Erection of false work for cast-in-place
over the procedures to be used and to emphasize
superstructures follows completion of the
the critical areas of construction. As a
substructure supports. The Contractor is
minimum, this should include a discussion of the
required to prepare and submit a method
rate of pour, personnel and equipment and back-
statement to the Resident Engineer for approval
up equipment to be used, type of finish, and
as described in Section 504.06, Falsework.
curing details.
The method statement should be supported by a
Proper positioning of the reinforcing steel is very
detailed set of structural calculations certified by
important. Adequate blocking and ties are
a licensed structural engineer. Allowance is to
necessary to hold the steel in place. If the traffic
be made in the initial falsework levels for any
on the reinforcing steel causes it to deflect, the
settlement of supports and deflection due to the
spacing of the chair supports is not adequate. A
dead weight of the concrete and prestressing
pre-check of the screed setting for proper
forces. Levels and camber should always be
elevations and clearances to the reinforcing steel
checked and any final adjustments made during
is essential before any concrete placement. The
the concrete placement. No further adjustments
finishing machine should be run the full length of
should be attempted after the concrete has started
the pour after the screed is adjusted to check the
to set.
deck thickness and cover of the reinforcing steel.
During the pour, frequent checks should be made
704.01 BRIDGE DECK CONSTRUCTION
of the actual cover obtained directly behind the
finishing machine and recorded in the Inspector's
Construction of maintenance-free bridge decks Daily Report.
requires close attention to details. One or two
BRIDGE DECK CONSTRUCTION
700-3
Quality concrete is required. Uniform all the project people who will be involved in
consistency of the concrete should be maintained inspection will be well informed.
throughout the pour. Along with the guidelines
set forth in Section 500 of this manual, the It is important that the Resident Engineer is
following should be observed: The water-cement advised as far ahead as possible of the date that
ratio is very important. It should be the the Contractor plans to prestress so that
minimum possible to produce the required arrangements can be made for inspection. There
workability and not exceed the specification are detailed requirements in the specifications
limit. and on the plans covering materials, procedures,
forms, hardware, etc. Even though the actual
Unless otherwise specified, to keep the water- pre-stressing may be inspected by others, the
cement ratio as low as possible, the use of a project personnel are responsible for quality
water reducing additive is recommended. control throughout the operation from forming to
However, no water reducing additives are to be final acceptance.
used until approval has been given in writing by
the Resident Engineer. Frequent checks of the Pre-stressed concrete bridge members (typically
free water contained in the aggregates is beams, girders, and members of girder systems)
necessary to determine the amount of water are cast at a concrete fabrication yard. Section
actually contained within the concrete mix. VIII of the Standard Specifications contains the
requirements for quality assurance including
704.02 PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE system manufacturer qualifications, sampling
and testing, certification, submittals, and
technical assistance. The Resident Engineer and
Pre-stressing can be accomplished by pre-
his Inspector should be familiar with these
tensioning, by post-tensioning, or by a
requirements as well as those of the Contract
combination of these two methods.
Documents.
In the first method, tendons are tensioned before
After the award of a contract involving the use of
the concrete is placed. After the concrete has
prestressed concrete, the Resident Engineer shall
developed a specified strength, the anchorages
see that the Contractor provides the name of the
for the tendons are released and the forces in the
Subcontractor who will produce the prestressed
tendons transferred to the concrete.
concrete members. The Resident Engineer shall
then see that the manufacturer submits complete
In the second method, post-tensioning, tendons
details on his facilities and equipment, shop
are placed in ducts in the concrete and are
drawings, and proposed methods for review and
anchored and stressed after the concrete has
approval by the Structural Engineer.
developed a specified strength. Then the ducts
are pressure grouted. The third method is a
While the inspection of prestressed concrete will,
combination of the first two methods. In
in most cases, be performed by an Inspector who
accordance with the design, some of the tendons
has had experience in this field, he may work in
are pre-tensioned with the remaining tendons
another area and the site of the plant may be a
post-tensioned.
considerable distance from the project. Such
circumstances should not cause the Resident
Pre-stressing is specialized work that is done by
Engineer to shirk his responsibilities regarding
crews trained and experienced in the operation.
the manufacturing of the members that will be
Although the responsibility for pre-stressing lies
used on the project being built under his
with the Contractor, it is important that the
direction. He should know everything about the
Resident Engineer and Inspector are familiar
process that the Inspector is expected to know
with the operation. The Resident Engineer
and he should make certain that the Inspector is
should ask for any necessary training and advice
knowledgeable on the subject and that he is
well ahead of the pre-stressing operation so that
applying this knowledge to the extent necessary
to obtain the desired results. Communication
700-4
between the Inspector and the Resident Engineer The stress induced in the pre-stressing steel must
should be sufficiently frequent to keep the be measured both by gauges and by elongation of
Resident Engineer thoroughly informed of the the tendons. Variation in modulus of elasticity in
problems, progress, schedules, etc. the steel or variation in tightness of twist in the
strands will produce variations in elongation for
Transportation and erection are the responsibility the same gauge readings. Conversely, variations
of the Contractor and the manufacturer. Various in friction between the tendons and the supports
kinds of devices are anchored in the concrete for or in the ducts or friction and losses in the jack
the purpose of lifting the members. The members and pumping system will produce different gauge
should not be lifted in any way other than by use readings for the same elongation.
of the devices provided. Members should always
rest in an upright position setting on blocks LOAD MEASURING GUAGE
located near the ends just as they are to be REQUIREMENTS
installed in the structure. The Inspector should
observe the handling of the members; prime
responsibility for proper handling is the • An accuracy within two percent and should be
Contractor's. The Inspector should record and calibrated by an approved laboratory before
report any improper handling or any damage, their use.
known or suspected, to the Resident Engineer. • A certified calibration curve should be
furnished by the laboratory for each gauge or
704.02.01 Forms and Equipment device.
• Gauges should be calibrated for the jacks with
which they are to be used.
Unless otherwise specified, the following lists the
• Gauge dials should be not less that 20 cm in
general guidelines that should be followed
diameter and should be readily legible. Dials
concerning forms and equipment: should read in kilograms or be accompanied by
a chart from which the dial reading can be
Only steel forms, in good condition, may be quickly converted to kilograms.
used. They should be of sufficient thickness, • All gauging devices should be re-calibrated at
braced, stiffened, and anchored so they will least once each year; however, if during the
withstand the forces due to placing and vibrating progress of the work, any gauging system
the concrete without loss of correct alignment. appears to be giving erratic or erroneous
The forms must be thoroughly cleaned and results or if the gauge readings and elongation
coated with a bond breaker before each use. measurements indicate materially different
stresses, the jack and gauges should be re-
Joints must fit tightly to avoid loss of mortar and
calibrated.
to avoid rough blemishes on the concrete.
• Anchorage and gripping devices should be
adequate to hold the tendons secure under the
704.02.02 Construction required loads without appreciable movement
or slippage.
The position of the strands in relation to the form • At least two concrete vibrators, of the proper
soffit and sides should be checked carefully as size and vibration frequency, should be
the strands are being initially tensioned since available.
adjustments of their position is difficult after a • When required, pressure grouting equipment
number of strands are tensioned. Strands should capable of exerting pressures up to 700 kPa
be in correct position as shown on the plans, must be available.
laterally and vertically, with a tolerance of six • If work is to be performed at night, adequate
lighting should be provided.
millimeters being allowed. Post-tensioning ducts
and end bearings should also be checked for
position. The allowable tolerance for positioning
these elements is six millimeters.
700-5
If the difference in indicated stress between the Metal chairs or small precast concrete blocks
jack pressure and the pressure computed from may be used to support the strands and stirrups.
the elongation is less than five percent, the lower
of the two should be brought up to the specified 704.02.03 Reinforcement and Details
value, resulting in there being a possible
overstress rather than an understress. If the The center line of bearings, or the beam center
difference is more than five percent, the entire line, should be marked on the form soffit and
operation shall be carefully checked and the used as a reference for spacing of stirrups, drape
source of error determined and eliminated before supports, bearing devices, diaphragm
proceeding. It may even be necessary to have the connections, etc. Ordinary reinforcing may be
jacks and gauges re-calibrated. The Inspectors prefabricated in cages by wiring or tack welding.
should have available pre-stressing information Each weld should be kept to an absolute
required and should be thoroughly familiar with minimum. No wiring shall be permitted in close
it. proximity to the pre-stressing tendons without
adequate protection to the tendons. Positioning
In central plant manufacturing, long pre- of the reinforcing should be performed with care
tensioning beds are generally used, allowing to make certain that the correct distance from the
several members to be made with one strand. forms is maintained. End bulkheads and
The tension must be the same for each member bearings should be set out far enough to
but if strands are draped, friction at hold-down compensate for elastic shortening of the member
and hold-up points during stressing may reduce when tension is released.
the tension in the members toward the non-
jacking end. This should be checked and 704.02.04 Placing Concrete
corrective measures taken if the condition exists.
Checking may be done by computing the The Inspector should not permit the placing of
elongation of some convenient length, say six to concrete in any member until the forms,
seven meters, which may be measured on a reinforcing steel, and pre-stressing tendons have
straight section of strand between supports. This been checked by him for compliance with the
length is marked on the strand in two or three specifications and the approved working
locations before stressing; then after stressing, drawings and he has given his approval for the
the elongation’s are determined and compared. placing of concrete to continue. When the forms
Corrective measures should be taken if results and the steel are hot, due to rays of the sun, they
indicate non-uniformity of tension in the should be sprayed with water ahead of the
members. placement of concrete. The consistency of the
concrete should be closely controlled through
The usual procedure for stressing is to place a frequent moisture tests of the aggregate and
small initial stress, about five percent of the slump tests of the concrete. No more water
total, into the tendons before marking them for should be used in the mix than necessary for
elongation measurements. This is to take the good placing. Concrete should be deposited as
slack out of the tendons, seat the opposite end nearly as possible in its final position without
anchor, and tighten up the bearing surfaces. The resorting to moving the concrete appreciably in a
initial stress produces some elongation. The longitudinal direction by use of vibrators.
manufacturer's recommended modulus of Concrete should be placed in at least two
elasticity should be used in all elongation continuous horizontal layers for I-shaped beams
computations. One set of stressing calculations of depths not exceeding one meter and at least
may be used for more than one member three such layers for beams of greater depth.
providing the members are identical, but the The first layer of concrete should completely fill
Inspector should satisfy himself that the stressing the bottom flange and extend 5 to 10 cm up into
set-up is the same as that for which the the web. Care should be exercised to see that all
calculations are made. parts of the forms are completely filled with
concrete, that the coarse aggregate is worked
away from the form faces by use of the vibrators
700-6
and by use of spades, and the concrete is worked the curing is not accomplished unless the
under and around the pre-stressing tendons and temperature of the air surrounding the member is
the reinforcing bars without displacing them. above 70°C. The rate of cooling must not
exceed 4°C per hour. Usually 12 to 18 hours at
Vibrators must comply with the specifications a temperature near 70°C will result in the
and there should be at least one spare vibrator to required minimum concrete strength for release
be used in case there is a breakdown. Vibrators of the tendons.
should be inserted into the fresh concrete slowly
and withdrawn slowly. Coverings or hoods over the members should be
at least 15 cm above the concrete surface and be
704.02.05 Concrete Tests tight enough to prevent heat and moisture loss.
Compression tests are important in pre-stressing 704.02.07 Stress Release

because they determine the time of de-tensioning
or post-tensioning and also because they show The required compressive strength for stressing
the ultimate strength of the concrete. In the case the concrete, as indicated by cylinder strength
of Class K415 concrete, the specified strengths tests, must be reached before this operation may
are guaranteed by the Contractor. This makes it be permitted to begin. For members cast end-to-
even more imperative that the sampling, end, on a pre-tensioning bed, the strands should
handling, fabrication, curing, and testing shall be be cut in a pattern and at selected locations along
in strict conformance with the Materials Services the bed so as to keep eccentricity of stress and
Testing Manual. All other concrete testing is longitudinal movement to a minimum. If some of
performed according to the Class K415 concrete the strands are draped, they should be cut first,
specification. then the hold-down apparatus released, and last,
the straight strands should be cut. If the hold-
704.02.06 Curing downs should be released first, the beam may
camber up and crack, due to the end moments. If
Unlike other classes of concrete, samples or the straight strands should be cut first, the
cubes from prestressed members must be cured unbalanced pull on the beam might shear off the
precisely as the members are cured. The hold-down bolts with resulting damage to the
samples or cubes should be placed in areas beam and casting bed.
representing the average curing condition of the
member or members that they represent. All 704.02.08 Final Inspection
other samples or cubes are to be cured and stored
according to standard procedures. The completed prestressed girders shall be
inspected while they are still on the casting bed
Ordinary moist curing methods are satisfactory to determine their acceptability under the
providing they are properly performed. specification requirements. They shall be
Accelerated curing to increase the production is inspected again just before and after placement
often used and steam is the most common agent in the structure for possible damage during
used to accomplish accelerated curing. Steam handling, storing, transporting, and erecting.
curing must be performed properly to accomplish
the desired results. Even under the best control, The Resident Engineer will determine the kind,
however, there is a loss in ultimate strength of 5 type, and extent of cracks and surface defects,
to 15 percent when compared with good moist such as honeycomb and chipped edges or
curing. The rate of rise, maximum temperature, corners, that will be tolerated. All such cracks
and rate of drop in temperature must be carefully and surface defects shall be repaired as directed
controlled to keep the loss to a minimum. The by the Resident Engineer.
rate of rise in temperature of the air surrounding
the concrete member should not exceed 4°C per Members having dimensions outside the
hour. The maximum temperature of the concrete tolerance limits found in the Standard
must not exceed 70°C. Effective acceleration in
700-7
Specifications, Section VIII-2, Subsection stress caused by the weight of the tops of the
802.07.b will be rejected. beams.
Any prestressed girder displaying one of the If the beams tip over or are to be stored upside
following defects shall be rejected and a new down, they will crack. The beams should be
girder is to be cast at the Contractor's expense: stored off the ground and the supports should be
placed where the actual structure support will be
• Any girder represented by samples not located.
meeting the specified strength.
704.02.11 Handling Pre-stressed Concrete
• Any girder that has one tendon exposed for a Beams
length more than 24 diameters, or two or
more exposed tendons. The beams should be picked up and supported
only at the designated pick-up points unless the
• Honeycombing of the girder to such an plans state otherwise. These pick-up points are
extent that chipping away of the loops protruding out of the tops of the beams
honeycombed concrete results in the (one near each end).
conditions above describing exposed pre-
stressing steel. The pick-up cable should maintain a safe slope.
A safe slope would normally be 1½:1. If a
• Any girder that has a stress crack in the area flatter slope is used, the beam may be damaged.
beginning 10 cm from the unit end to the Normally the Contractor will use two cranes,
center line of the unit that is greater than 13 which will not create any problems. If he uses
mm in depth and five thousandths (0.005) of one crane, the Inspector should make sure that
a cm in width. the cables are long enough. In addition, they
must be the same length for proper balance.
704.02.09 Inspecting Beams and Girders
704.02.12 Erection of Pre-stressed Concrete
When the beams or girders arrive, the Inspector Beams
should look for any cracks. Small hairline
cracks are usually due to shrinkage and are not Pre-stressed concrete beams are erected
critical to the strength of the beams. However, according to the framing plans included in the
large cracks indicate that the beams were contract documents and according to the shop
probably dropped, or something dropped on drawings. The framing plans show a plan view
them, or stacked incorrectly. of the beams with their markings. The beams
will have erection marks painted or stamped on
Also check the reinforcing steel that protrudes them to show where each beam is to be placed.
out of the top of the beams. This reinforcing
steel will be used to tie the beams and the deck 704.03 POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE
slab together, so it should not be broken or bent.
Any damage should be reported to the Resident
Engineer. The construction of cast-in-place post-tensioned
concrete bridges requires considerable attention
704.02.10 Storing Pre-stressed Concrete to details of construction by the Contractor and
Beams Inspectors.
The Contractor must store the prestressed Besides the falsework and form plans for the
concrete beams in an upright position. This is structure being approved by the Structural
important because the pre-tensioned cables are Engineer, post-tension detail plans will be
located in the bottom of the beams. This makes submitted for approval. Included in these details
the beams resistant to compression and tensile will be the anchoring details, jacking forces,
tendon profile, elongation of the tendons, and the
700-8
tendon stressing sequence. In many structures, should check the reels of strand intended for use
the dead load of the structure is increased at the and reject those that show damage to the strand
jacking ends during the jacking operation. In or visible rust.
these cases, the falsework at the jacking ends
must be designed to carry the additional load. Some projects may be designed for the use of
high strength steel rods instead of strands. These
The installation of the post-tension system begins rods come in various sizes to give the required
with the placing of assemblies consisting of a steel area for the tendon in one bar instead of
bearing plate, transition cone or trumpet, and bundling several strands in the tendon.
grout inlet. Duct sections consisting of a rigid
conduit are assembled with couplers and are tied Jacking operations are not to be started until the
to the stirrups. Anchorages and bearing plates concrete in the structure has cured for the
are securely fastened to the forms to prevent specified time or reached the specified strength.
movement and loss of mortar during concreting. Jacking will be carried out in the sequence shown
Connections between trumpets and ducts, ducts on the approved post-tension details to reduce the
and couplers, and ducts and vent saddles are amount of eccentric loading on the structure.
taped with a durable and waterproof tape to DURING THE JACKING OPERATIONS,
prevent intrusion of mortar. NO PERSON SHOULD BE DIRECTLY
BEHIND EITHER END OF THE
It is necessary that the ducts be located in the TENDONS.
position shown on the approved post-tension
details in order for the structure to function as Each jack used to stress tendons will be equipped
designed. A misaligned duct will cause increased with either a pressure gauge or load cell along
friction and localized stress that can result in a with certified calibration charts for determining
failure of the member during the stressing the jacking force.
operation. The Inspector must check to see that
the ducts are properly located and securely Gauging devices should be re-calibrated at
fastened in place to prevent movement during intervals of not more than 180 days; however, if
concreting. during the progress of the work any gauging
system appears to be giving erratic results, or if
On continuous structures, vents must be placed gauge readings and elongation measurements
at the high and low points of the tendon and show materially different stresses, the jack and
grout inlets at the end of the tendon. the gauges must be re-calibrated. As per the
Standard Specifications, Section 802.09, an
At the completion of the duct installation and agreement of ±5 percent is satisfactory.
before placement of concrete in the top slab, a
device of smaller diameter than the inside A starting load, usually 20 percent of the jacking
diameter of the duct is blown though the ducts to load, as shown in the approved post-tensioning
ensure no undetected damage or blockage has schedule is applied to the tendons. The purpose
occurred. of this starting load is to take up the slack in the
tendon so that an accurate elongation
The pre-stressing reinforcement strand is measurement may be made. This load is applied
delivered to the site in sealed reel-less packs or by the hydraulic jack and measured by the jack
reels containing desiccant to prevent corrosion. gauges. During the stressing operation, the
It is necessary that the pre-stressing tendons will be jacked to the specified load and
reinforcement is free of rust and kept clean while the jacking load and elongation will be recorded.
it is assembled, stressed, and grouted. Normally Also the elongation after seating must be
the grouting will take place within 10 days of the measured and recorded. The Inspector shall
time the strand is removed from the packs to immediately report to the Resident Engineer any
prevent the accumulation of rust. The Inspector unusual situation related to the gauge and
700-9
POST-TENSIONING JACK
elongation readings. In such situations, the • Performance of a force verification lift-

stressing operations should be stopped until the off, the verification lift-off force is
discrepancies are identified and resolved. between -5 percent and +5 percent of the
approved calculated force.
In case of discrepancies between measured
elongations and the calculated elongations, the 2. STRAND TENDON Lengths greater than
entire operation should be carefully checked and 15 meters but less than 45 meters
the source of error determined and corrected
before continuing further. A discrepancy • If the measured elongation is between -7
between the elongation and the jacking force percent and +7 percent of the approved
usually suggests that the gauge on the jack is not calculated elongation, the tendon can be
correctly calibrated, there is undue friction accepted.
between the duct and the tendon, or the tendons
are not properly anchored. • If the measured elongation exceeds 107
percent of the approved calculated
704.03.01 Stress Acceptance Criteria elongation, confirm the jack/gauge
calibration, and then perform a force
1. STRAND TENDON lengths of 15 meters verification lift-off:
and less
⇒ If a force verification lift-off is done
The tendon may be accepted if: on one end of the tendon only and
the lift-off force is between -1
• The measured elongation is equal to or percent and +5 percent of the
exceeds 93 percent of the approved approved calculated force, the
calculated elongation, and upon tendon can be accepted.
700-10
⇒ If a force verification lift-off is done 5. BAR TENDON

on both ends of the tendon (jacking
end and anchor end) and the lift-off The tendon may be accepted if:
forces are between -5 percent and +5
percent of the approved calculated • The measured elongation is equal to or
force, the tendon can be accepted. exceeds 93 percent of the approved
calculated elongation, and upon
3. STRAND TENDON lengths 45 meters and
greater • Performance of a force verification lift-
off, the verification lift-off force is
• If the measured elongation is between -7 between -5 percent and +5 percent of the
percent and +7 percent of the approved approved calculated force.
calculated elongation, the tendon can be
accepted. If acceptance tolerances are exceeded, notify
the Municipality Project Manager.
• If the measured elongation exceeds 107
percent of the approved calculated ⇒ f’s = Specified minimum ultimate
elongation, confirm the jack/gauge tensile strength of the pre-stressing
calibration, and then perform a force steel.
verification lift-off:
⇒ As = Cross-sectional area of the
⇒ If a force verification lift-off is done tendon.
on one end of the tendon only and
the lift-off force is not less than 99 704.03.02 Grouting Tendons
percent of the approved calculated
force nor more than 0.7 f’s As, the The grout used is fluid and quite different from
tendon can be accepted. the mortar usually associated with the term
grout. The component materials of the approved
⇒ If a force verification lift-off is done grout mix must be accurately measured. The
on both ends of the tendon (jacking maximum amount of water specified must not be
end and anchor end) and the lift-off exceeded. The grout should be screened after it
forces are not less than 95 percent of has been mixed and before it is added to the
the approved calculated force nor grout equipment to remove lumps that might
more than 0. 7 f’s As, the tendon can cause clogging of the ducts.
be accepted.
Immediately before grouting, the ducts will be
4. SINGULARLY JACKED FOUR-STRAND blown out with oil free compressed air. Grout is
TRANSVERSE TENDON applied continuously by pumping under moderate
pressure at the lower end of the duct toward an
The tendon may be accepted if: open vent at the upper end until all entrapped air
is forced out of the open vents. The open vents
• The measured elongation of an are closed under pressure of issuing grout after a
individual strand is between -10 percent steady solid stream of grout is discharging. The
and + 10 percent of the approved grouting pressure is gradually increased to a
calculated elongation. minimum of 700 kPa and held at this pressure
for a minimum of 10 seconds. The grouting
• The average of all four individual strand entrance is then closed.
elongations is between -7 percent and +7
percent of the calculated elongation. After grouting of the tendons, the recesses for the
anchorages are cast solidly with concrete.
700-11
704.04 STRUCTURAL STEEL
STRESSING OPERATION RECORDS

704.04.01 General
• The required jacking force for the tendon as The topic of structural steel, in the
obtained from the approved post-tensioning
specifications, covers the broad field of
details.
furnishing and constructing steel structures.
• The gauge pressure obtained from the certified
calibration chart for the jack to obtain the Steel bridges constitute the most important use of
required jacking force listed above. structural steel in roadway construction;
• The gauge pressure for the initial force to take therefore, the following paragraphs apply
up the slack in the tendon. This is usually 20 primarily to steel bridges. They also apply, in
percent of the force obtained above. part, to most metal structures and metal
• The designed elongation obtained from the components of handrails, catch basins, irrigation
approved post-tensioning details. The stress standpipes, piling, and sign structures. The
strain curves prepared by the steel Resident Engineer will have to exercise some
manufacturer will be used to determine the judgment to determine what portions of the
modulus of elasticity for adjusting the designed
following paragraphs apply to some of the minor
elongation based on the average value of all
structures or structural components.
strands to be incorporated in the tendon.
• The required seating take-up obtained from the
approved post-tensioning details. 704.04.02 Shop Drawings
• The elongation measured at the initial force of
20 percent of the required jacking force, at the The approved fabricator's detailed shop and
specified jacking force, and again at the 20 erection drawings become a part of the project
percent loading. plans and are used in fabrication and erection of
• The difference in the elongation measured at the steel members. During erection, the Resident
full force and the elongation measured at the Engineer should make sure that all members are
initial force of 20 percent. This elongation placed in their proper position in the structure by
should be close (see Stress Acceptance Criteria) checking match marks or identification marks on
to the designed elongation noted above.
the members with the locations shown on the
• The seating take-up which is the difference in
the elongation measured at full force and the
erection drawings.
elongation measured after the tendon has been
seated and the jacking force reduced to the When checking the shop drawings, the goal is to
initial force of 20 percent of full force. This end up with error free drawings.
seating take-up should be the same as the
required take-up listed above. It is important When the shop drawings are approved, they are
that the specified seating take-up obtained at not guaranteed to be free from errors nor are the
full jacking force is not close to the required fabricator and Contractor relieved from the
elongation, or the following conditions are responsibility to furnish material that meets the
usually indicated:
requirements of the plans and specifications.
1. There is more (or less) friction in the
tendon than was anticipated in the
Although the shop drawings are checked and
calculations of the post-tension details. approved, the supervision staff must still be alert
2. The gauging devices on the jack are not to catch fabrication discrepancies.
properly calibrated.
3. The strands of a tendon are not properly
anchored.
700-12
704.04.03 Shop Inspection The temperature of the heated area will not
exceed 620°C (A dull red) and will be controlled
The Resident Engineer shall ask the Contractor by temperature indicating crayons, liquids, or
to give notice at least two weeks in advance of bimetal thermometers.
the beginning of shop work if an inspection is
required. Such an inspection would normally be Following the straightening of a bend or buckle,
conducted by a structural specialist. If the steel is the surface of the metal will be inspected
fabricated out of the country, the shop inspection carefully for evidence of fracture.
will be performed by a third party inspection
firm. The Resident Engineer must receive 705 BEARINGS
documentation that the inspection has been made
705.01 GENERAL
before approval and installation of the steel
members. The Resident Engineer should also
give the steel a visual inspection as it is received Elastomeric (neoprene) bearing pads are
on the project, before unloading from the truck. commonly used for relatively light reactions and
The requirements for shop inspection are moderate superstructure movements. Pot type
specified in the AASHTO Construction Manual bearings are used for heavy reactions and large
for Highway Bridges and Incidental Structures, superstructure movements.
if not otherwise included in the specifications.
705.02 ALIGNMENT
704.04.04 Storage and Handling
Before erection of the superstructure is started,
Upon delivery of the steel, it should be inspected
the center line of bearings should be laid out on
for signs of damage and any such damage should
all substructure units by precise methods, and the
be recorded and reported to the Contractor.
roadway center line (or reference line) and center
line of bearings scratched or otherwise marked
The unloading of the steel must be accomplished
on the concrete. Bearing areas should be
by means of equipment and methods which will
checked to see that a plane surface is provided at
not damage the members. The steel should be
the correct elevation. If the concrete surface that
moved by use of slings and wood blocks to
will be in contact with the bearing pad is rough
prevent damage to flanges. Steel members
or irregular, it should be ground to provide full
should never be dropped. Steel should be stored
and uniform bearing. If a bearing area is low
in a well-drained area which is in no danger of
with respect to other areas on the unit or in
being flooded. All beams and girders should be
relation to other units of the structure, shims of
placed in an upright position, on wooden blocks.
the same size as the masonry plate, and of the
Blocking shall be provided that will keep all
required thickness, should be ordered with the
members off the ground and clear of grass,
approval of the structural specialist. Avoid
brush, or other material. Long members shall be
using a number of thin shims if a single one of
supported in a manner that will prevent injury
the required thickness can be made from
from deflection. The members should also be
standard thickness plates. The shims should be
handled and transported in an upright position.
made from the same type of steel as that
They should be braced to prevent overturning.
specified for the bearings.
704.04.05 Straightening Bent Material
705.03 BEARING PADS
Methods for straightening of plates, angles, or
other shapes and built-up members that will not Preformed fabric or plastic bearing pads are
produce fracture or other injury to the metal will required to conform to the AASHTO
be approved by the Resident Engineer. Distorted Specifications for Highway Bridges. Such pads
members will be straightened by mechanical may be used without testing providing a
means or by the careful planned and supervised certification has been received by the Structural
application of a limited amount of localized heat. Engineer stating that the material proposed for
700-13
use complies with the above specifications. 705.05 FINAL ALIGNMENT

Approval of the bearing pads will not be given
unless such certification is provided.
Due to fabrication tolerances and inaccuracies in
laying out the bearing locations, it is sometimes
705.04 ASSEMBLY
necessary to make slight adjustments in the
position of the bearings, after the erection is
Bearing surfaces and all metal contact surfaces complete, to allow the proper clearance between
must be free of rust, loose mill scale, dirt, oil, the units or at the abutments and to provide the
and grease. In addition, contact surfaces of correct opening at expansion devices. If the
beams and girder splices or main truss expansion bearings are of the rocker type, the
connections, that will be connected by high rockers are adjusted according to the prevailing
strength bolts, must be free of paint or lacquer. temperature so they will be vertical at the
standard temperature shown on the plans
The parts should fit together with very little (usually 20°C). The coefficient of thermal
strain or distortion. If bolt holes are slightly out expansion of steel is 0.0000117/°C.
of alignment, it is permissible to bring the pieces
into their proper position with drift pins. 705.06 SETTING ANCHOR BOLTS AND
However, if the holes fail to line up properly MASONRY PLATES
requiring enlargement of the hole or distortion of
the metal, the hole shall be drilled or reamed.
Anchor bolts are usually plain round bolts with
Any fabrication error that cannot be corrected by
heads and plate washers on the lower ends and
a slight amount of drifting, or by drilling or
threaded for nuts at the top end. These bolts are
reaming, is cause for rejection of the material.
set in the original masonry or in holes drilled
Heavy sledging of the parts to bring them into
after the masonry has set. Pipe sleeves to allow
alignment, or making any cuts or adjustments
room for adjustment of the span are placed
with a burning torch, must not be permitted. The
around the bolts.
entire structure, or an entire unit of continuous
spans, should be assembled, drift pinned, bolted,
Shoes will be set level on the pier copings with
and adjusted to the proper grade and alignment in
temporary steel wedges under the shoes during
accordance with the plans, before permanent
erection. Rocker shoes shall be tilted a sufficient
connections are made.
amount so that they will set vertical at 20°C after
the total load is applied and the span is released.
If high strength bolts are to be used for the
The amount of tilt varies with the length of the
permanent connections, they may also be used
span and the temperature at the time of erection.
for fitting up. Splices and field connections must
Details of the required tilt of rockers are usually
have one half of the holes filled with bolts and
shown on the plans. When details are not shown,
pins before bolting up with high strength bolts.
the Structural Engineer should be requested to
Pilot and driving nuts are required when driving
supply them.
pins. Correction of minor misfits involving
harmless amounts of reaming, cutting, and
At least seven days before the deck is laid,
chipping may be allowed, however, the
anchor bolts and shoes will be grouted in place
Structural Engineer should be consulted before
after all steel is erected and adjusted for length
corrective work is done.
and camber. Portland cement will be used for
grouting and the procedure should be as outlined
Elevations on tops of the erected girders shall be
in the Standard Specifications.
checked and any necessary adjustments made to
the slab build-up shall be noted on the bridge
Do not grout shoes with dry mortar unless
plans.
specifically indicated on the plans. Build forms
around the shoe about 10 cm high and pour grout
in the form from one side until the whole area is
well filled. Use a wire or steel band to keep the
700-14
grout flowing. After the grout has taken its • Unusual problems encountered and their
initial set, remove the form and cut the edges of solutions.
the grout with a trowel to about a 45-degree
bevel from the bottom of the shoe to the top of • Changes, extra work, and time extensions,
the pier coping. Do not allow the finished grout and their justifications.
to extend above the bottom of the shoe.
• Results of materials test reports and
706 EXPANSION JOINTS dimensioned checks.
• Unsatisfactory or questionable materials,

Preformed elastomeric expansion joints are construction, or conditions encountered, and
normally specified for shorter span structures. the corrective actions taken.
Proper installation of the joint material is critical
to the sustained useful life of the joints. • Any situation that shows a non-compliance
Installation of the joint should be carefully with the plans, specifications, contract
scrutinized by the Inspector for conformance conditions, or prescribed policies and
with the contract drawings, approved shop procedures.
drawings, and manufacturer’s recommendations.
• Any controversial matter.
707 ARCHITECTURAL
TREATMENT 709 MEASUREMENT AND
PAYMENT
The bridge design normally incorporates
architectural treatment concepts that may include The quantities of work described in Section 700,
concrete texturing and coloring or use of precast Bridges, will be measured and paid for according
panels. The Contractor’s shop drawings should to the measurement and payment instructions in
fully describe the construction materials and the Standard Specifications. Project records
procedures. Samples of various components, must be kept by the Resident Engineer so that all
colors, and textures should be prepared by the partial progress and final payments can be easily
Contractor and submitted for approval by the and clearly supported by recorded data.
Resident Engineer and the Municipality
Representative. The approved samples will then It is essential that proper controls are exercised
be used as the standard to determine the when measuring items of work. At any stage of
acceptability of the finished work. the work, payment will not be made for any item
that cannot be proved by the project records to
700.08 RECORDS have been acceptably completed. Items paid
based on scale weights or truck volume
measurements require actual measurement of the
An important duty of the Resident Engineer is to appropriate quantities, physical receipt of the
keep accurate field records and documents of materials, and documentation of both operations
construction progress. Matters to be documented by weight tickets and other quantified delivery
should include the following: records.
• Recurring reports.
700-15
SECTION 800
MAINTENANCE AND STAGING TRAFFIC STAGING DRAWING CONTENT
OF TRAFFIC
• Traffic maintained on existing roads
801 GENERAL
• Work areas
For guidance on requirements, the construction • Traffic carried over completed permanent
supervision staff should refer to AASHTO Guide works
Specification, Section 618, the Manual on • Description of work activities for each stage
Uniform Traffic Control Devices, the Standard • Pedestrian accommodations
Specifications, the Particular Specifications, • Maintenance of access to business and
and/or the project maintenance of traffic and residential properties and car parks
• Signs, barricades, and placement details
construction staging drawings.
• Special guide signs
• Maintenance of major utility services and
The control of traffic through construction appurtenances
projects is very important. Construction • Temporary signal control
operations may inconvenience people who live • Typical sections of detours
along the right-of-way as well as those who must • Detour geometrics
travel through a project built under traffic. • Major utilities to be constructed that are
Anything the Inspector can do to minimize this critical to the staging sequence
annoyance will improve public relations. Every
effort should be made to handle traffic through
and around construction with a maximum of The proposed staging plans must be carefully
safety and with as little inconvenience and delay reviewed by the Resident Engineer to satisfy
as possible. The constant watchfulness of the himself that the works can be constructed safely
Resident Engineer and all construction personnel and efficiently. Before the Contractor can receive
is necessary to accomplish this. approval, the proposed staging scheme must be
approved in writing by the Department and the
Often traffic handling is planned prior to the job Traffic Police.
being bid and construction phasing plans are
included in the contract documents. The Resident 802 TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
Engineer must evaluate the traffic planning based (TCDs)
on the conditions found at the site of the work.
Cooperative efforts between the Engineer and the
All traffic control devices (TCDs) and the
Contractor are absolutely necessary and are to be
application of traffic control measures shall
encouraged at all levels of authority. Traffic
conform to the Standard Specifications. The
handling needs will depend on the way the
Resident Engineer’s Inspector should constantly
Contractor chooses to prosecute the job and
evaluate the TCDs in light of the Contractor’s
therefore he is required to prepare and submit
operations. Modifications may be needed to
detailed traffic staging and detour plans for
ensure safety. Knowing when TCDs are not
review and approval by the Resident Engineer.
required is just as important as knowing when
they are required. The effectiveness of all TCDs
The traffic staging plans are directly tied to the
is reduced if one is left in place after the need for
Contractor’s schedule and must be reviewed and
it passes. This leads drivers to believe they can
evaluated together. Drawings prepared for traffic
ignore other TCDs in construction zones. When
staging should clearly indicate the following:
TCDs are no longer required, they should be
removed.
The Contractor should maintain all TCDs in a

satisfactory condition. Cleaning of the TCDs
must be done periodically to improve their
800-1
visibility at night. A night inspection of the applied to keep them in good condition and
TCDs is necessary to evaluate them, as this is visible. Damaged barriers should be rejected.
the period when the traveling public must rely
more heavily on the TCDs. End treatments vary from special terminal
sections to merely flaring the ends. The
The various traffic control devices, typical TCD treatment best suited to the situation should be
installations, and construction details are shown used. The criteria for end treatment is to use that
in the Standard Drawings including barricades, which will give the best protection under the
traffic cones, delineators, drums, and concrete given conditions at the least cost. The first
barriers. criteria for use of an end treatment should never
be the convenience or the least cost to the
803 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Contractor.
805 DETOURS
Unnecessary pavement markings should be
eradicated as soon as possible. Traffic
movement is influenced to a great extent by In a construction zone that carries considerable
pavement markings; therefore, misleading traffic, it is usually preferable to provide a route
markings can be a significant contributing cause which will take the traffic around the
of traffic accidents. construction zone. Detour plans are provided in
the Contract Documents. Should the detour
Temporary pavement markings should be placed plans require modification or a design change,
where the travel path has been changed and the Engineer must follow the review process to
where traffic is to operate on new pavement obtain written approval from the Department and
overlays or where final pavement markings the Traffic Police. When this situation arises, he
cannot be placed immediately or where traffic should be familiar with the considerations and
will be placed on intermediate layers. principles by which detours are designed. It is
desirable, whenever possible, that both ends of
804 TEMPORARY CONCRETE the detour are visible to approaching motorists.
BARRIERS Transitions should not be in close proximity to
horizontal or vertical curves, structures, or any
obstruction which would interfere with the
Construction and installation details for motorists view of the transition. Plans for
temporary concrete barriers are to be shown on detours should be prepared in accordance with
shop drawings and submitted for approval prior the Standard Drawings.
to placement.
Detours should be designed to the highest
In order to function as designed, the barrier must geometric standards relative to the approaching
be a reasonably rigid structure. The foundation facility and physical limitations of the area.
has to be solid and uniform. In some cases Transition lengths, curve radii, and super-
where a barrier is placed close to a vertical drop elevations should be consistent with the design
off, it may be desirable to place steel pins at the standards required for the speed of traffic that
backside of the barrier to prevent movement. If will be entering the detour. This could require an
pins are driven through the holes on the front additional stage in the construction, for example,
face, the pins must not protrude above the the placing of asphalt concrete over Portland
surface of the barrier. The barrier sections need cement concrete pavement to build up
to have full bearing on firm material to function superelevation.
properly. Barriers should be periodically
cleaned, painted, and new reflective panels
800-2
DETOUR ROADWAY
Any sudden major changes in either geometric Barricades are inherently fixed object hazards.
standards or speed limits should be avoided, if Therefore, they should not be used unless the
possible. The element of surprise can be reduced construction hazard the motorist may encounter
by making gradual, step-down reductions. These is greater than the hazard of striking the
reductions should be made in increments of not barricades. They should not be used as primary
more than 15 kilometers per hour. delineation to guide traffic.
When traffic volumes are high and construction Delineation devices must be maintained and kept
periods lengthy, detours should be built to clean. When delineators become covered with
standards consistent with those required for grime or are damaged, they become ineffective.
paved roadways. When warranted, temporary The condition and positioning of these devices
concrete barriers are recommended. Proper end should be checked daily.
protection must be provided.
806 PROCEDURES FOR SHIFTING
Unnecessary traffic stripes or arrows on asphalt TRAFFIC
pavement should never be merely blacked out
with oil or paint. Rather, the striped and
adjacent areas should be sandblasted or ground It shall primarily be the responsibility of the
down in a pattern different from the original Resident Engineer to see that detours and new
marking until the marking is no longer visible. facilities are in proper condition for handling
This change in pattern minimizes the possibility traffic. Before transferring traffic from an
that the original marking will still be visible to existing roadway to a new facility, the following
drivers, especially at night or in rainy weather steps should be taken:
when covered-over stripes have a tendency to
shine in contrast to the pavement.
800-3
1. Complete Detour or New Facility The Good records of traffic control facilities include:
Contractor shall construct detours, in their dates and times of day that inspections were
entirety, before traffic will be permitted to made; statements of conditions found; a complete
use them. New facilities shall be sufficiently listing of type, size, and location of devices;
completed to preclude any hazard to public orders to the Contractor to make changes or
traffic. corrections; time and date that devices are
removed or modified; photographs and comments
2. Inspection by Resident Engineer As soon as explaining any variations from standard
the detour or new facility is completed, the procedures.
Resident Engineer shall conduct an
inspection to determine its adequacy for The Contractor shall designate an individual
accommodating traffic. Special attention acceptable to the Resident Engineer responsible
will be paid to signs, barricades, lighting, for traffic control surveillance so that necessary
and all traffic control devices. Safety action may be taken with the least delay. The
aspects and driver convenience and comfort assigned individual shall complete the Daily
shall have priority. The Resident Engineer Record of Detour Maintenance form on a daily
shall coordinate this inspection the basis and submit one copy to the Resident
Department Representative. If the Engineer. The Inspector is responsible for
Department is not satisfied that the facility is checking the report for accuracy and ensuring
completed, the Contractor shall be instructed that action items identified are promptly followed
accordingly. up.
3. Inspection by Road Section Project Manager
808 MEASUREMENT AND
Unless the Department objects, the Resident
Engineer will submit a formal letter to the
PAYMENT
Department indicating the date a detour or
new facility is to be opened to traffic. The All the items of work are to be measured in
letter will indicate the expected length of accordance with the Standard Specifications or
detour operation and include drawings Particular Specifications. The Resident Engineer
showing the location and the layout of the should examine the payment provisions carefully
detour. because some items of equipment may become
property of the Municipality and, therefore, must
807 RECORDS be accounted for.
Interim payments for various maintenance of

The Resident Engineer or designated
traffic items should be based on the following:
representative should review the condition of the
project at least twice daily, once in the morning
1. Detour Roads
and again before leaving in the evening, to ensure
that barricades, warning lights, signs, barrels, Unless otherwise noted, payment for these
and other traffic control devices are in the proper items shall be made as follows:
location and operating correctly. Any unusual
situation which may require changing, adding, • 75% when the detour is installed
modifying, or deleting TCDs should be brought complete.
to the attention of the Contractor. Any
irregularities in the operation of the detour items • 15% to be paid in equal monthly
or defects in the detour surface should also be installments over the scheduled period of
brought to the Contractor’s attention for prompt required detour maintenance.
correction.
800-4
• 10% when the detour is removed and the • 75% when barricades, temporary lighting,
site is restored to the complete and temporary signals are delivered to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. site.
• No additional quantities will be paid for • 15% prorated over the period of use and
detour lengths exceeding plans as a maintenance.
result of revisions approved for the
Contractor’s benefit. • 10% when the item is removed to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
2. Temporary Barricades, Temporary Lighting,
and Temporary Signals and Controls
Payment shall be made as follows:
800-5
SECTION 900 Project Diary is an important document that

records all contractual and procedural events that
RECORDS AND REPORTS
occur on the project. On larger projects, the diary
presents an overview of the daily activities
901 GENERAL extracted from the individual dairies maintained
The principal objective of this section is to by key supervisory staff. The Resident
provide the project field office with guidelines Engineer's diary is also a personal record of
which will help eliminate common errors in verbal communications and discussions that may
compiling records and reports. It is imperative have contractual implications. The diary is
that documentation be correct and be supported usually compiled by the Resident Engineer from
by written statements, orders, or other evidence the Inspectors’ daily reports and Assistant
to avoid any misinterpretation of the intent of the Resident Engineer’s diary and supplemented with
document. additional entries and comments. The Resident
Engineer certifies these entries with his signature.
All contract pay quantities must be thoroughly
documented as prescribed in this manual and in 903 INSPECTOR'S DAILY REPORT
accordance with sound engineering practices and
Each Inspector is required to prepare an
meet the requirements of the Municipality and
Inspector's Daily Report providing detailed
other concerned parties.
information on the day's activities. Each report is
pertinent to the task or construction operation
At the start of each construction project,
assigned to the individual Inspector. The
preprinted Contract Progress Payment
Inspector's work assignments will be allocated
Certificate forms will be transmitted to the
such that all project activities including
Resident Engineer by the Road Section in
maintenance of traffic items are recorded on a
quantities which are anticipated to be adequate
daily basis. The report form may be
for the duration of the project. These forms will
supplemented by sketches, measurements, or
be utilized in certifying interim and final payment
calculations on additional sheets as necessary to
estimates. An additional supply may be obtained
complete the record of daily work. In practice,
upon request from the Abu Dhabi Municipality
the Inspector should maintain a field diary or
Road Section Site Representative.
bound field note book to record the day’s
activities and make notes, sketches, etc., that
A full set of Contract Documents, including a
may be summarized and neatly transformed to
copy of the signed Contract, will be provided to
the prepared report form at the end of the day.
the Resident Engineer by the Abu Dhabi
The Inspector's reports are reviewed and signed
Municipality Road Section Site Representative.
by the Resident Engineer (or Assistant Resident
The Resident Engineer is responsible for having
Engineer) daily.
Standard Specifications, Standard Drawings,
manuals, and other required publications of the
Specific construction operations require use of
Abu Dhabi Municipality Road Section on hand
special forms or reports. The Inspector assigned
in the project office. Such materials may be
to the task is responsible for completing the
obtained from the Abu Dhabi Municipality Road
forms and submitting the reports as attachments
Section Site Representative.
to his daily report.
902 RESIDENT ENGINEER’S
PROJECT DIARY
The Resident Engineer is required to keep a daily
dairy for each project. The Engineer's Daily
900-1
be a master index of all field books and

RESIDENT ENGINEER’S DIARY computation books on the project.
CHECKLIST
904.02 NEATNESS
9 Site Preparation
9 Weather. Use a sharp pencil of at least 3H hardness.
9 Orders given to the Contractor. Avoid crowding of notes and keep the book as
9 Important discussions with the Contractor or clean as possible. There are to be NO
his representative, such as disputes. ERASURES. If an error is made, cross out the
9 Official visitors and inspections. incorrect work and write in the correct notes, or
9 Work or materials rejected and reasons.
9 Time of shutting down or resuming work and
start with a clean page. Crossed out sheets are
not to be torn from bound books, and corrections
explanations.
9 Work done by the Contractor’s forces during should be initialed.
the day.
9 Account of any time spent by the Contractor’s 904.03 CLARITY
personnel or equipment on disputable items of
work and especially any work which might be
Plan the note keeping so that the data can be
the basis of a claim.
9 Length and cause of any delay. shown clearly. Do not make ambiguous
9 Arrival and departure of major equipment and statements. Line up descriptions and make
work crews. sketches for clarity. Record data in a consistent
9 Record of important telephone calls. way. Assume that the person who will use your
9 Unusual conditions, if any, such as high water, notes has no familiarity with the work.
bridge failures, slides, unsatisfactory subgrade
or foundation conditions, detour conditions, etc. 904.04 COMPLETENESS
Care should be used when explaining hazardous
conditions. Show all pertinent measurements and
9 Progress of staking and surveys. observations. Use a degree of accuracy
9 When appropriate, daily surveillance of traffic consistent with the operation. If in doubt about
control as to effectiveness. the need for the data, record it. Review all data
9 An up-to-date inventory of the Contractor’s before leaving the field.
equipment and a list of the Contractor’s work
force. All entries must include:
• The date
904 FIELD NOTES AND
COMPUTATION BOOKS • Weather conditions
Field notes are the written record of pertinent
• Names of all persons in the party
information, measurements, and observations on
the project prepared by the Surveyors and • Signature of the person making entries
Inspectors. They should be kept according to
uniform practices and conform, at a minimum, to The title page must be completed as the book or
the following general requirements. project is started. The book must be adequately
indexed and cross-referenced as to its contents.
904.01 BOUND BOOKS
904.05 PERMANENCE
All field notes and computations should be
recorded in bound books. Notes should never be All entries should be made directly into bound
made on a set of plans or on loose-leaf pads and books. At completion of the project, they should
then discarded. All pages should be numbered be filed as part of the permanent record of the
and each book should be indexed. There should project.
900-2
904.06 HONESTY 904.11 THEORETICAL COMPUTATIONS

Record exactly what was done at the time it was
done rather than depending on memory at a later Items such as concrete, excavation, embankment,
time. When it is necessary to add data to notes paving, clearing and grubbing are measured and
previously prepared, the additional item should paid to neat lines or other established pay lines.
be dated and initialed. Always enter notes Therefore, the actual pay quantities must be
directly into the record. arithmetically based upon accurate dimensions
determined from the Contract drawings or field
904.07 SELF-CHECKING measurements. The computations must be clear
and legible, prepared in a conventional manner
using standard calculation sheets, dated, signed,
Notes should be kept so that the work can be
and assigned a number and title. Sketches may
checked without returning to the field. Any
be attached to supplement the calculations. All
person familiar with the project should be able to
computations must be independently checked and
verify the accuracy of the work from the
signed by both the calculator and the checker.
information contained in the notes. All
calculations must be independently checked.
When the final total computed quantity for an
item has been determined and agreed by both the
904.08 PRIDE
Resident Engineer and the Contractor, the paid-
to-date quantity will be adjusted accordingly.
Strive to turn in a set of notes of which you can Final quantities will be computed, where
be proud. These records often create an possible, before work commences on the item,
impression on others concerning your ability and thereby enabling realistic progress payments and
integrity. preventing over payment.
904.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND 905 CONTRACTOR REQUEST

VERIFICATION FORMS
These forms are used to document approved
Certain items are required to be measured in quantities of completed work and to initiate field
place. Frequently, the measurement of such testing by the site laboratory at the request of the
items must be made while they are accessible and Contractor.
simultaneously with their installation. Therefore,
to prevent future disagreement, measurement of The forms include:
all such unit price items will be made in
cooperation with the Contractor’s representative • Joint Measurement Sheet
and mutually agreed at that time. Such
measurements will be recorded in bound field • Request for Testing of Construction
survey books with a carbon copy for the
Contractor. These forms are prepared by the Contractor for
specific operations and work areas that are ready
904.10 LUMP SUM PAY ITEMS for checking and inspection or testing by the
Resident Engineer’s staff.. The Contractor,
The substantiation of the final payment of a Resident Engineer, and Municipality Site
lump sum bid item is simple. The needed Representative receive copies of all completed
verification comprises stating for record that all forms. See Contractor’s Daily Work Program
requirements for the item have been completed Flow Diagram, Figure 900.01, Joint
and payment can be made in full as obligated by Measurement Flow Diagram, Figure 900.02, and
the lump sum amount bid. Request for Testing of Construction Flow
Diagram, Figure 900.03.
900-3
The Joint Measurement Sheet details the measured and the work meets the contract
measurement of work for payment. For example, document requirements, including the
a completed section of aggregate subbase will be acceptability of materials and test results from
jointly measured by the Contractor and the materials lab.
Engineer’s Surveyors producing a sketch
complete with stations, offsets, and dimensioning The Request for Testing of Construction forms
necessary to define the measured item. are submitted for work that is ready for materials
Computations to determine the quantity for testing such as compaction tests. These forms
payment are clearly indicated and arranged for provide documentation of the testing of the
ease of checking by the Quantity Surveyor. The works by supervision staff.
signature of the Inspector indicates that he is in
agreement with the limits of work being
Figure 900.01
Contractor’s Daily Work Program Flow Diagram
900-4
Figure 900.02
Joint Measurement Sheet Flow Diagram
Figure 900.03
Request For Testing of Construction Flow Diagram
900-5
906 PAYMENT ESTIMATES AND 906.01 INTERIM AND FINAL PAYMENT

DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURES
The Resident Engineer will require documents to
substantiate acceptance of materials and work 906.01.01 Interim Payment
items for both quality and quantity. The basis of
acceptance for quality, the method of The procedure for documenting, preparing, and
measurement, and the basis of payment are submitting interim payment applications is as
established by the Standard Specifications. follows:
Payment estimates must be supported by 1. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to
documentary evidence that work items paid have the Resident Engineer a daily program of
actually been performed. The Resident Engineer work. See Figure 900.01.
must be sure that all items paid have been
2. The Resident Engineer will provide a copy of
properly inspected and approved. Whenever
the Contractor’s daily program to the
payment is made based on an estimate, the basis
Municipality Site Representative. See Figure
of the estimate must be well defined to assure
900.01.
that over payment to the Contractor is avoided.
3. The Engineer’s Surveyor will verify
The Interim Payment Estimate form is a quantities by field measurements jointly
tabulation of all contract pay items taken directly taken with the Contractor and recorded in the
from the conformed Bill of Quantities (BOQ) survey field book. The Surveyor will allow
including the unit rate and previous period the Contractor to make a copy of the field
quantities which were paid. The estimate form is book and later certify his measurements by
prepared by the Contractor and thoroughly signing the Joint Measurement Sheets.
checked by the Quantity Surveyor before finally
submitting the estimate to the Resident Engineer 4. The Inspector will record construction
for approval. The quantities are cross-checked progress, manpower, and equipment in the
with the Quantity Book maintained by the Inspector’s daily report and later certify that
Quantity Surveyor that details all items of work the work conforms to the Contract
measured and approved for payment tabulated requirements by signing the Joint
from the Joint Measurement Sheets. The Interim Measurement Sheet.
Estimate Bill Summary is used to consolidate the
payment by BOQ numbers or categories such as 5. The Contractor shall submit Joint
“Bill No. 6 Storm Water Drainage Works.” The Measurement Sheets for each completed item
Interim Payment Summary provides a complete of work or portion completed each month.
synopsis of the monetary valuations pertaining to Joint Measurement Sheets shall be submitted
the Contract relevant to the pay estimate and is with a location sketch or drawing, a copy of
signed by all parties. This form is the basis for the relevant Surveyor’s field book page,
the Contract Progress Payment Certificate calculation sheets if required, and any other
submitted to the Municipality for processing of necessary information attached. See Figure
the payment. 900.02.
Computers are increasingly being used for the 6. The Quantity Surveyor will review the Joint
maintenance of these and other project records Measurement Sheets, check the calculations,
and for estimate preparation. In such cases, sign certifying the calculations are correct,
back-up files and computer security is extremely and forward them to the Resident Engineer
important. for approval.
7. The Resident Engineer will review and

finally approve the Joint Measurement
Sheets. After the Resident Engineer’s
approval, copies of the Joint Measurement
900-6
Sheets will be distributed to the Contractor, • Other designated Consultants’ approved

Municipality Site Representative, and the payment documents with quantities and
Resident Engineer. See Figure 900.02. amounts included in the Payment
Certificate.
8. The Quantity Surveyor will record the
approved quantities in the Quantity Book 12. The Interim Payment Summary will be
and file the approved Joint Measurement signed by the Resident Engineer prior to
Sheets. The Quantity Surveyor will also transmitting it to the Municipality with the
maintain As-Built Drawings on which all Contract Progress Payment Certificate.
construction works with approved Joint
Measurement Sheets will be recorded by 906.01.02 Final Payment
highlighting completed portions and listing
the quantities approved for payment. The Procedure for documenting, preparing, and
submitting the Final Payment Certificate is as
9. At the end of each month or beginning of the follows:
next month, the representatives of the
Municipality, Contractor, and the Engineer 1. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to
will jointly verify the quantity of Materials the Resident Engineer a daily program of
On Site for inclusion in the payment work. See Figure 900.01.
certificate.
2. The Resident Engineer will provide a copy
10. Based on the approved Joint Measurement of the Contractor’s daily program to the
Sheets and the Materials On Site, the Municipality Site Representative. See Figure
Contractor will prepare the Interim Payment 900.01.
application and submit it to the Resident
Engineer for checking and onward 3. The Engineer’s Surveyor will verify
transmittal to the Municipality. quantities by field measurements jointly
taken with the Contractor and recorded in the
11. The Engineer will check the Payment survey field book. The Surveyor will allow
application, attach the following documents, the Contractor to make a copy of the field
and forward these to the Municipality for book and later certify his measurements by
further processing. signing the Joint Measurement Sheets.
• Contract Progress Payment Certificate. 4. The Inspector will record construction

progress, manpower, and equipment in the
• Statement of Overrun Quantities. Inspector’s daily report and later certify that
the Works conform to the Contract
• Explanation of Overrun items. requirements by signing the Joint
Measurement Sheet.
• Statement of Underrun Quantities.
5. The Contractor shall submit Joint
• Statement of Change Order Payment. Measurement Sheets for each completed item
Temporary payment will be made for all of work or portion completed each month.
new items which are not included in the The Joint Measurement Sheet shall be
BOQ. Approval of unit rates for the new submitted with a location sketch or drawing,
items will be documented by the a copy of the relevant Surveyor’s field book
Municipality via letters of response to page, calculation sheets if required, and any
Change Orders as prepared and other necessary information attached. See
submitted by the Resident Engineer. Figure 900.02.
• Daywork sheets. 6. The Quantity Surveyor will review the Joint
Measurement Sheets, check the calculations,
• Schedule of Materials on Site. certify the calculations are correct, and
900-7
forward them to the Resident Engineer for • Financial Affairs Report (English and
approval. Arabic).
7. The Resident Engineer will review and • Contractor’s Maintenance Guarantee.

finally approve the Joint Measurement
Sheets. After the Resident Engineer’s • Copy of the Contractor’s Insurance
approval, copies of the Joint Measurement Policies.
Sheets will be distributed to the Contractor,
Municipality Site Representative, and the • Clearance letter from the Water &
Resident Engineer. See Figure 900.02. Electricity Authority.
8. The Quantity Surveyor will record the • Other designated Consultants’ approved
approved quantities in the Quantity Book Final Payment documents.
and file the approved Joint Measurement
Sheets. The Quantity Surveyor will also 906.02 PAYMENT FOR MATERIALS
maintain As-Built Drawings on which all STORED ON SITE
construction works with approved Joint
Measurement Sheets will be recorded by The Resident Engineer must pay particular
highlighting completed portions and listing attention to the Contractor’s request for payment
the quantities approved for payment. of materials stored on site. He must use
discretion as to the percentage of each type of
9. As soon as one work item is completed, all
material he deems appropriate to pay relative to:
the approved Joint Measurement Sheets for
that item will be verified against the As-Built
Drawings. All surface finish work will be • Actual job progress according to the CPM
remeasured if necessary to verify the schedule.
accuracy of the quantities.
• Where the material is stored, the method of
10. When all Joint Measurement Sheets are storage, and any deterioration.
finalized and the quantities are agreed, the
• Length of storage time before the material is
Contractor shall prepare a Final Quantity
scheduled to be incorporated in the final
Book (Summary) sheet which will be signed
product.
by the Quantity Surveyor, Resident
Engineer, and the Contractor’s Project
Proper control of materials on site may be
Manager for final payment purposes.
utilized as an effective tool to control many
11. Based on the agreed quantities, the aspects of the project. In general the Resident
Contractor shall prepare the Final Payment Engineer should be guided by the following:
application and forward it to the Resident
Engineer for checking and onward 1. All quantities shall be physically checked on
transmittal to the Municipality. site and documented in the progress payment
support file.
12. The Engineer will check and certify the final
payment and forward it to the Municipality 2. Where the job site area is too restrictive, the
along with the following documents: Engineer may approve additional storage
areas proposed by the Contractor. In this
• Contract Progress Payment Certificate. case, the Contractor must provide:
• Final BOQ item printout. a. Permission of the landowner.
• Statement of Change Order Payment for b. Approval of the Municipality.

new items of work.
900-8
c. Letter certifying that all materials stored by the Contractor and supervision staff at the
at the additional storage area are the end of each day’s work. A number of
property of the Municipality and will be supplementary forms are used in the
used solely for that specific project. documentation of day works and samples are
included in the appendix.
3. In no instance shall payment be made for
more materials than those required to 908 SAFETY RELATED
complete the project and furnish any required REPORTING
spares.
4. No payment shall be made for materials Although every effort is made to avoid accidents,
which are not approved. each incident must be reported using the
prepared form. The Resident Engineer’s Report
5. No payments shall be made for materials not of Contractor’s Accident is normally initiated by
yet delivered, even on the basis of letters of the Inspector as being the individual that is likely
credit. a witness to the occurrence. When an accident
occurs the Inspector should assert himself at the
6. Unit rates for materials shall be based on the scene to gather all of the information necessary
materials portion of the tender unit rate to complete the report form. He should then
breakdowns or materials invoices, whichever discuss the matter with the Resident Engineer
amount for the specific item is less. and present the completed form for his review
Materials on Site payments are not to exceed and signature. The Project Utility Engineer is
75% of the actual invoice value of the similarly responsible for preparing the Utility
materials. Incident Report.
907 DAYWORKS Traffic accidents on the project are most often

For work that is to be performed under the Daily associated with detours. Daily maintenance of
works schedule, the Contractor shall be barricades, signs, lighting, and removal of debris
instructed to deliver the following to the Resident or potentially hazardous conditions is extremely
Engineer daily: important to protect the traveling public both
motorist and pedestrian. The Daily Report on the
• An exact list of all workmen employed on Detour Maintenance is prepared by the
the work, their trade classification, and Contractor to document detour maintenance
number of hours worked. efforts. It is the Inspector’s responsibility to
ensure that action items are followed up and the
• A description and the quantities of all Contractor is properly attending to that work.
materials and plant used for the work.
909 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor’s statement should be verified
The Contractor is responsible for providing some
and counter signed by the concerned Inspector
of the information necessary to produce As-Built
and the Resident Engineer before inclusion of the
Drawings to form a complete pictorial record of
item in the payment certificate.
the finished works. These requirements are set
forth in Section 102.18 of the Standard
Performance of work on a Dayworks basis
Specifications and a detailed procedure included
requires execution of the Daily Works
in Section 1000 of this manual.
Authorization form signed by the Resident
Engineer and countersigned by the Municipality
The Resident Engineer is obliged to prepare the
representative. The Contractor is required to
As-Built Drawings from the shop drawings and
submit a daily accounting of the labor, materials,
with the aid of other Contractor submittals. The
and equipment used on the work by completing
accuracy and completeness of the As-Built
the Dayworks form. It is important that the daily
Drawings will depend on the quality of the
quantities are recorded on the form and agreed
900-9
information provided by the Contractor and 911 CONSTRUCTION REPORT

checked by the Resident Engineer’s staff. FORMS
The completed works will be handed over to the Samples of the construction report forms are
various Municipality Departments and therefore included in the Appendix and listed as follows:
As-Built Drawings shall meet their individual
requirements. A number of the Utility 1. Engineer’s Daily Project Diary
Departments retain consultants that will establish 2. Inspector’s Daily Report
these requirements. The following Municipality 3. Joint Measurement Sheet
Divisions have review and approval authority 4. Computation Sheet
over the applicable As-Built Drawings: 5. Contract Progress Payment Certificate
6. Interim Payment Summary
• WEA (Electricity Authority) 7. Interim Payment Estimate Bill Summary
8. Interim Payment Estimate
• WEA (Water Authority) [Tebodin] 9. Quantity Book
10. Final Quantity Book (Summary)
• Agriculture Section 11. B.O.Q. Recapitulation
12. Computation of Earthworks Volume by End
• Town Drainage [John Taylor] Area
13. Progress Payment Schedule
• Road Section 14. Furnished Materials Evaluation
15. Statement of Overrun Quantities
910 RETENTION OF RECORDS 16. Statement of Underrun Quantities
17. Schedule of Materials on Site
At completion of a project, all data shall be
18. Request for Testing of Construction
placed in the Abu Dhabi Road Section files for
19. Daily Works Authorization
possible future reference. Items to be retained
20. Dayworks
shall include:
21. Daywork Summary for Authorized Work
22. Schedule No. 1 - Summary of Labor on Site
1. A complete set of final As-Built Drawings.
23. Schedule No. 2 - Summary of Materials on
This will include location sketches, typical
Site
sections, tabulations of quantities, plans and
24. Schedule No. 3 - Summary of Plant on Site
profiles, bridge plans, special layouts, and a
25. Resident Engineer’s Report of Contractor’s
complete set of original Contract Drawings.
Accident
2. All construction project correspondence and 26. Utility Incident Report
payment estimates. 27. Daily Report on Detour Maintenance
28. Letter of Transmittal
3. All of the Resident Engineer’s progress 29. Approval of Sub-Contractors
reports. 30. Site Instruction
31. Shop Drawing Log Book
4. Materials approval and testing
documentation, certifications, and
warranties.
5. Resident Engineer’s and Inspector’s diaries.
6. Construction field notebooks documenting

the roadway alignment, original and final
cross sections, structure staking, etc.
7. Any other records pertaining to pay

quantities.
900-10
SECTION 1000 C-N-24 Report Forms

C-N-25 Accident Reports
CONSTRUCTION
C-N-26 Utility Incident Reports
ADMINISTRATION C-N-27 Contractor’s Insurance
C-N-28 Monthly Reports
1001 GENERAL C-N-29 Quality Assurance
The construction supervision staff organization C-N-30 Notices of Intent
responsibilities and general activities are C-N-31 Addenda
discussed in Section 100. This section deals with C-N-32 Survey Control
the administration of the construction project C-N-33 Telephone Numbers
using uniform procedures for the maintenance of C-N-34 Equipment Inventory
files and lines of communication.
Note: C-N - Designates Contract Number
1-34 - Designates File Number
1002 CONTRACT FILES
The Resident Engineer will maintain a system of All project correspondence is filed
files for the project. An example of such a chronologically in File C-N-1 and should be a
system follows: copy of the original. The original document is
filed under the more specific subject file.
Contract Files: Additional copies may be included in multiple
files as assigned by the Resident Engineer. For
C-N-1 Chronological Correspondence example, the original copy of a letter from the
C-N-2 Correspondence To/From Contractor Municipality providing subcontractor approval
C-N-3 Correspondence with Municipality will be filled under C-N-22, with copies included
C-N-4 Contractor’s Schedule under files C-N-1 and C-N-3.
C-N-5 Contractor’s Progress Reports
C-N-6 Shop Drawings 1003 COMMUNICATIONS
C-N-7 Contractor’s Plan Index - prepared The importance of maintaining communications
plans in accordance with established procedures cannot
C-N-8 Contractor’s Plan Index - shop be over emphasized. Proper written
drawings documentation is required to support all
C-N-9 Materials Test Requests and Results contractual matters relating to the project. In
C-N-10 Policy and Procedure Memos general, action of any kind by the Resident
C-N-11 Intra - Company Memos Engineer should be issued in writing by formal
C-N-12 Document Control letter, including (but not limited to) the
C-N-13 Minutes of Meetings following:
C-N-14 Correspondence with J. Taylor -
Utilities • Materials Approval (or Disapproval)
C-N-15 Correspondence with Etisalat/ Tele-
phone - Utilities • Confirmation of Verbal Instructions
C-N-16 Correspondence with Tebodin -
Utilities • Issues or Concerns related to Schedule
C-N-17 Contractor’s Monthly Pay Estimate
C-N-18 Resident Engineer’s Daily Diary • Unsatisfactory Methods or Failing Test
C-N-19 Claims Results
C-N-20 Variation Orders
C-N-21 Personnel • Final Punch Lists
C-N-22 Subcontractor Approval
C-N-23 WEA Correspondence • Unsatisfactory Workmanship
• Safety Issues
1000-1
1003.01 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN Distribution:

THE RESIDENT ENGINEER
AND MUNICIPALITY Original - Contractor/Resident Engineer
1 Copy - Department Site Representative
1 Copy - Municipality
These letters can be informational, can confirm
instructions, request action, or transmit other 1003.04 MEMORANDA
material. Such correspondence can be prepared
by any member of the staff, but shall be signed These should be addressed to a specific
by the Resident Engineer. individual or to the file with copies to an
individual or individuals as required.
Distribution: Memoranda can be used to convey information,
confirm oral discussions, give instructions and
Original - Municipality recommendations, transmit other material, or
1 Copy - Department Site Representative establish policy.
1 Copy - Staff Members as appropriate
Distribution:
1003.02 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN
THE RESIDENT ENGINEER Original - File or Individual
AND OTHER AGENCIES, 1 Copy - Author and other indicated recipients
LOCAL OR NON LOCAL
1003.05 MINUTES OF MEETING
These letters can be informational, can confirm Minutes shall be taken of official meetings with
instructions, request action, or transmit other the Contractor, the Municipality, and other
material. Such correspondence can be prepared agencies. Included in the minutes shall be:
by any staff member, but shall be signed by the
Resident Engineer. • Date and Time of Meeting
Distribution: • Location of Meeting
Original - Local Agency • Participants

1 Copy - Department Site Representative
1 Copy - Staff Members as appropriate • Purpose of Meeting
1003.03 CORRESPONDENCE WITH THE • Subject Matter --- listed in order, with
CONTRACTOR concise information on decisions reached,
issues discussed, and actions required.
All such correspondence shall be between the Distribution:

Resident Engineer and the Contractor’s
representative. Letters to the Contractor shall be Original - Individual responsible for conducting
used to issue instructions, transmit other the meeting
materials, convey approvals, impart information, 1 Copy - Each Participant
or confirm oral discussions. Responses to the 1 Copy - Department Site Representative
Contractor’s letters should be prompt and should
fully and concisely address themselves to the 1004 PROJECT CLOSING OUT
issue. Whenever possible, clear references
This procedure provides the Resident Engineer
should be made to the Contract Documents. Any
with acceptable standards for closing out and
correspondence of a relatively serious nature,
transferring a project to the Government.
such as that concerning claims and
interpretations of obscure parts of the
specifications and plans, should be discussed
with the Department Representative.
1000-2
1004.01 SCOPE prior to the whole of the Works being

completed.
The closing out of a construction contract will
1004.03 RESPONSIBILITIES
include, but not be limited to, compiling the
project's records and as-built quantities and
documents; scheduling the Contractor's The Resident Engineer shall be responsible for
completion of all unfinished field and the complete and timely closing out of the
administrative matters; arranging for the construction Contract in accordance with the
Government's Preliminary Handing Over Contract Documents and this procedure.
Inspection; transferring the project and its
records to the Government of Abu Dhabi; and 1004.04 PROCEDURE FOR
arranging for the Government’s Final Handing PRELIMINARY HANDING
Over Inspection. OVER
1004.02 DEFINITIONS
1. Project Termination Report. Not less than 60
days prior to the anticipated PHOI, the
• Preliminary Handing Over Inspection Resident Engineer shall submit the Project
(PHOI) Termination Report. Its function is to
The Government's review, with the Engineer, provide a closing out status report while
of the completed Works and all materials simultaneously furnishing a major item
incorporated therein for compliance with the check list to the Resident Engineer. Updates
Contract Documents. The PHOI is held at of the Project Termination Report are to be
the close of the project's construction submitted as required but not less than every
activities and the starting of its maintenance 30 days.
period by members of the Municipality
Projects Committee along with the Engineer 2. Prefinal Inspection. The Contractor shall
and the Contractor. submit a written Notice of Completion of the
Works which shall include, for the approval
• Final Handing Over Inspection (FHOI) of the Resident Engineer, a proposed
The FHOI is held at the end of the project's schedule for completing the below listed
maintenance period (normally one year) by items.
members of the Municipality Projects
Committee along with the Engineer and the • Unfinished items of Contract work.
Contractor. It signifies the project's final
handing over to the Government. • Agreement of final quantities.
• Administrative Check List • Delivery of outstanding supply-only

A check list of administrative items which is materials.
prepared by the Resident Engineer for
With the possible exception of supply-only
presentation to the Municipality Projects
materials, all items shall be completed within
Committee on the day of the Preliminary
one month of the PHOI. In a written reply to
Handing Over Inspection. It becomes part of
the Contractor’s Notice of Completion of the
the Committee's meeting minutes.
Works, the Resident Engineer should record
• Municipality Projects Committee (MPC) the actual status of all unfinished works and
Municipality Projects Committee, chaired by administrative obligations.
the Director of Abu Dhabi Municipality.
3. Recommendation to Hold the PHOI. Upon
approval of the Contractor's Notice of
• Partial Completion
The Government's policy is that NO partial Completion of the Works, the Resident
completion of a project will be recognized Engineer shall submit a letter to the
Government recommending that the PHOI be
1000-3
held. This letter will be discussed by the • Receipts for office facilities, vehicles, or
MPC who will establish the date and time other Contractor-owned property which
for the inspection. Once that schedule is reverts to the Contractor at the
confirmed, the Resident Engineer shall, in completion of the Contract.
turn, provide the Contractor with written
notification of the schedule for the PHOI. • Receipts for the specified number of
warranties, instruction manuals,
4. Agency Notification. Concurrent with the guarantees of installed equipment,
letter recommending the Government certificates, and service manuals.
schedule the PHOI, the Resident Engineer
shall also notify the following agencies of the • A written description of the
PHOI: arrangements which have been made for
the maintenance and reimbursement of
• Sanitary Drainage Network Section ongoing costs for vehicles supplied by
the Contractor to the Government for its
• Agriculture Section use during the project’s maintenance
period.
• Etisalat
6. Final Payment Certificates. The Final
• W.E.A. The Director, Transmission Payment Certificate will normally be
processed upon completion of all works,
• W.E.A. The Director, Distribution
administrative items, the agreement of final
quantities, and the settlement of all disputes.
• Other agencies as designated by the
Engineer or the Department. 7. The Preliminary Handing Over Inspection.
Members of the MPC, the Engineer, and the
5. Required Documents from the Contractor.
Contractor meet at the designated time to
Concurrent with the letter recommending the
conduct the PHOI. Prior to the inspection,
Government schedule the PHOI, the Resident
the Resident Engineer shall prepare the
Engineer shall also direct the Contractor to
Minutes of Inspection of the Works which
submit, no later than ten days after the
should also include the Attendee List.
PHOI, the below listed documents.
8. Minutes of Inspection. A field inspection of
• A statement that all subcontractor and
the project is made and, if accepted by the
supplier accounts have been settled and
MPC, signatures are obtained from all
no outstanding accounts relative to the
attendees. If the Works have been
Contract exist, including any third party
satisfactorily completed, a date is established
claims.
for the Preliminary Handing Over, which
• An inventory, including storage location, then becomes the project's Completion Date
of all spare items and/or surplus material and is so recorded in the Minutes of
which are the property of the Inspection. The Minutes of Inspection are
Government. then forwarded to the Chief of Road Section
establishing the date of Preliminary Handing
• Certification of the receipt of salvable Over and the start of the Maintenance
material which has been delivered to Period.
other Government agencies, i.e., W.E.A.
9. MPC Minutes of Preliminary Handing Over.
This must also include the W.E.A.
A copy of the MPC's Minutes of Preliminary
Materials Balancing Statement.
Handing Over is obtained from the
• Delivery receipts for equipment supplied Municipality which confirms the Preliminary
to the Government in conformance with Handing Over Date of the project.
the Contract Documents.
1000-4
10. As-Built Drawings. The Engineer is • Has the advance payment recovery been
responsible for preparation of the As-Built correctly calculated and at what point are the
Drawings. These drawing must be completed retained amounts recommended to be
before the preliminary handing over, as the released?
various agencies require the as-built
drawings prior to certifying the completion • Have the As-Built Drawings been reviewed,
of their respective works. approved, and signed by the Resident
Engineer prior to the specified number of
11. Final Accounting. The Resident Engineer print's being produced?
must submit all of the project's final
documents to the Chief of Road Section for • Has the Contractor furnished the name,
use in preparing the Final Accounting. The address, fax, and/or telephone number of the
minimum documents to be submitted are: representative to contact during the project's
Maintenance Period?
• Final Payment Certificate
1004.06 DISPOSITION OF DOCUMENTS
• Final BOQ Item Tabulation UPON PRELIMINARY
• Financial Affairs Report HANDING OVER
The production of the Financial Affairs 1. Project Files. The Site office records shall
Report shall utilize data furnished by the be packed in clearly numbered containers
Resident Engineer. and an index of the files giving file numbers,
12. Certificate of Preliminary Handing Over. A descriptions, and dates shall be prepared. A
copy of the Certificate of Preliminary copy of the index shall be furnished together
Handing Over must be issued to the with the storage location of the files.
Contractor for his records.
When activity on the project has ceased, all
13. Resident Engineer's Inventory. Prior to the files relating to the project will be
PHOI, the Resident Engineer's staff shall consolidated.
inventory, catalog, and box the project
The Document Control files contain copies
records in accordance with the Close-out
of the Agreement between the Government
Checklist and the Disposition of Documents
and the Contractor and all subsequent
in sections that follow.
actions by the Government which alter the
1004.05 CLOSE-OUT CHECKLIST FOR time or financial aspects of the project.
USE PRIOR TO PROCESSING
During the consolidation of the permanent
THE FINAL PAYMENT
records, all duplication shall be eliminated.
CERTIFICATE
The storage of unique documents in personal
files will not be permitted.
• Are the Site office files complete and has
duplication been eliminated? 2. As-Built Drawings. As-Built Drawings shall
be prepared by the Engineer as further
• Have the specified number of copies of described in Section 1005.
guarantees, warranties, certificates, and
service manuals been received and then 3. Final Quantity Computations and Completed
forwarded to and receipted by the correct Field Survey Books. The Final Quantity
individuals? Computations and completed field survey
books are not duplicated and should be
• Has the compilation of “Materials Furnished stored in a fire-proof location.
by Others and Incorporated into the Works"
been completed?
1000-5
1004.07 PROCEDURE FOR FINAL 6. Release of Performance Bond. If the project

HANDING OVER is accepted by the Government, the
Contractor requests the Performance Bond
be released by the Government and the
1. Prefinal Inspection. Upon the Contractor's
Engineer prepares a letter recommending the
written notice of the ending of the
Performance Bond be released. Included
Maintenance Period, the Resident Engineer
with this letter is a copy of the Certificate of
shall perform an inspection of the Works to
Final Handing Over.
confirm that all maintenance work has been
performed in conformance with the
1005 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
requirements of Article (31) of the Arabic
Agreement between the Government and the The Engineer is responsible for preparation of
Contractor. If the inspection reveals the As-Built Drawings. This procedure provides the
Works are not ready for the FHOI, the Resident Engineer with standards for the
Resident Engineer shall prepare a letter so preparation and distribution of a project’s
notifying the Contractor. Record Drawings.
2. Recommendation to Hold the FHOI. When 1005.01 GENERAL

the Contractor has completed the outstanding
items from the inspection, a letter shall be
The Engineer shall prepare and furnish the
sent to the Government recommending the
Department with accurate record drawings to full
FHOI be held. This letter will be discussed
size (overall 560 mm x 865 mm with a 17 mm
by the MPC who will establish the date and
margin except the left hand margin shall be 23
time for the inspection. Once the schedule is
mm), to the scales as otherwise stipulated,
confirmed, the Resident Engineer shall, in
showing the Works as executed complete with
turn, provide the Contractor with written
existing and finished levels (top, invert, and
notification of the schedule for the FHOI.
formation levels, plans, cross and longitudinal
3. The Final Handing Over Inspection. sections, locations of all junctions, manholes,
Members of the MPC, the Engineer, and the inlets, the extent of concrete beds, details of
Contractor meet at the designated time to structures, and all things necessary to form a
conduct the FHOI. Prior to the inspection, complete pictorial record of the finished Works).
the Resident Engineer shall prepare the The Engineer shall also submit record drawings
Minutes of the Final Handing Over in digital computer format on either 3½ inch
Inspection which should also include an disks or on CD’s.
Attendee List.
Also to be shown are the exact locations of
4. Minutes of Final Handing Over Inspection. existing utilities as determined by manual
A field inspection of the project is made and, excavation meeting the requirements of Clause
if accepted by the MPC, signatures are 205.04, Manual Excavation, of the Standard
obtained from all attendees. If the Works Specifications, and the locations of new service
have been satisfactorily completed, a date is ducts, cables, pipes, etc., constructed under this
established for the Final Handing Over of the Contract.
project and is so recorded in the Minutes of
the Final Handing Over Inspection which are The Engineer may use 3-mil thickness, polyester
then forwarded to the Chairman, Abu Dhabi film reproducibles of the Contract Drawings on
Municipality. which to prepare record drawings of as-built
conditions. The Engineer will use full-size
5. Certificate of Final Handing Over. Issuance reproducible transparency drawings of all
of the Certificate of Final Handing Over will Contract Drawings in the preparation of
only be made by the Municipality. polyester film reproducibles for record drawings.
The Engineer will use the polyester film
reproducibles and prepare such other record
1000-6
drawings as required to clearly indicate as-built center lines including their positions within
conditions. The Engineer will also obtain the the service reservation.
necessary computer files from the Cotnractor and
other Consultants, if necessary, for preparation • Details of all newly installed ducts,
of the CADD based record drawings. contingency ducts, and other permanent
Works with sufficient dimensions to locate
During the course of the work, the Contractor these with respect to the building lines, road
shall have the right to call for record drawings, center lines, and their positions within the
mylar and digital, at any time so that he may service reservation.
check and update them for accuracy and
completeness. The Contractor should be • Plan details of all existing and new
provided a minimum of two prints of each record protection works installed by the Contractor
drawing for this purpose. to existing utility lines and all protection
works installed for the new utility lines with
All reproducibles of record drawings so prepared sufficient dimensions to locate these.
shall be dated and signed by the Engineer and
countersigned by the Contractor’s • Type and size of the utility lines, existing
Representative. Each record drawing shall be a and installed.
clear and legible reproducible on 3 mil polyester
• Sufficient cross-sectional details to show the
film or similar material. Each drawing set will
depth of the utility lines and details of the
be bound.
protection work installed to both the existing
and newly laid utility lines.
1005.02 RECORD DRAWINGS FOR
UTILITIES • The locations of existing utilities in unaltered
positions that were determined by manual
The Engineer will produce accurate record excavation in accordance with Clause
drawings of utility Works immediately upon 205.04, Manual Excavation, of the Standard
completion of the work covered by one work area Specifications.
as described below. These record drawings shall
be similar in form to the Contract Drawings. One During the course of the work, the Contractor
work area shall comprise the extent of work shall supply to the Engineer accurate working
described in each Contract Drawing as included drawings in stages for a particular section of the
in the Contract Documents and as directed by the utility line installed. Within five days of
Engineer. receiving the written directives from the
Engineer, the Contractor shall immediately
The record drawings shall generally show the produce such working drawings as required by
following: the Engineer, complying with the above details,
and supply to the Engineer sufficient quantities
• The plot boundaries and the plan details of of reproducibles for the Department and each
existing development within these areas. utility agency. In addition, after approval by the
Engineer and as part of the Contractor’s normal
• All existing utilities and ducts which are notice of intent procedures and/or when directed
permanently left in their locations with by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit to
sufficient plan dimensions to locate these. Town Planning Department a minimum of one
full size transparency and one full size print of
• Location and details of all temporary all utilities working drawings, on a stage by
construction such as utility supports, etc., stage basis during the course of work. The
which are permanently left in place. transmittal cover letter and record of transmittals
to Town Planning Department shall be in a
• Details of all newly installed utilities with
format approved by the Engineer. These
adequate dimensions to locate these with
transmittals shall be made on a regular basis,
respect to the building lines and/or road
1000-7
with copies of all transmittal letters copied to the crossing out the original design details which
Engineer. have been changed. Other details may be
drawn on the original Contract Drawings as
1005.03 FINAL COMPILATION AND required and shall be labeled, "AS-BUILT
SUBMITTAL OF RECORD DETAILS," in order to differentiate them
DRAWINGS from original design details.
When the as-built changes are so extensive

In addition to any working drawings required that the original drawing's legibility and
during the course of work by the Engineer or neatness are lost, the sheet shall be
Town Planning Department as described above, completely redrawn. The revised drawing
the Contractor shall submit, to the Engineer, must include the same information and area
working drawings for the complete works of coverage between match marks as the
quantity, scale, type, and schedule as described original Contract Drawing. The revised
below. drawing shall have the same title block as the
original Contract Drawing. However, the
The Contractor shall submit these drawings well General Notes, Amendment Description, and
ahead of the Contract completion date to allow Drawing No. blocks shall be blank.
sufficient time for the Engineer and the Utility
Agencies to review and check the accuracy and The original Contract Drawing shall be
completeness and to allow the Engineer to included in the Record Drawing set
incorporate them into the Record Drawings. The immediately before the redrawn sheet. Its
Engineer shall obtain a concurrence signature on title shall be crossed out with a single fine
Record Drawings from the Contractor prior to line through the lettering and the word,
seeking the respective utility agencies approval "REDRAWN," shall be placed within the
of these drawings. title block. The words, "SEE RECORD
DRAWING NO. X," shall be placed above
1. Description of Drawings. Record Drawings the Amendment Description block.
shall be drawn to scale on 3-mil thick mylar
sheets of the same size and format as Original Contract Drawings not used during
indicated above. The original Contract the project's construction, such as those
Drawings, or the latest revisions thereto, which show Works that were deleted, shall
shall be incorporated into the Record be included in the Record Drawings set.
Drawing sets. Their titles shall be crossed out with a single
line through the lettering and the words,
The following Contract Drawings do not "NOT USED," placed within the title block.
have to be altered and shall be labeled
"TENDER DRAWINGS - NO Shop drawings may be included in the
CORRECTIONS" immediately above the Record Drawing set as supplementary
Amendment Description block: information in order to more accurately
illustrate the as-built conditions. It is not
• Existing Conditions. mandatory to include all shop drawings.
Several shop drawings may be grouped
• Survey Plans. together to form one sheet if they describe a
common work category as detailed in the
• Electrical, Existing Conditions. Contract Drawing. Shop drawing details
may be redrawn on the original Contract
• Existing Water Lines.
Drawing sheets if required for clarity.
• Existing Other Utilities.
When a shop drawing is included in the
As-built information shall be drawn on the Record Drawing set, it may retain its
original Contract Drawing reproducible, original (Contractor's) title block. If
required, these shall be reproduced to the
1000-8
same size as described above. Other the plans if not already provided in the
supplementary drawings shall bear the Contract Drawings.
designer’s title block, with the Drawing No.
block left blank. (c) CCTV System. All pull boxes shall be
numbered on the drawings and tabulated
Each Record Drawing shall incorporate the on separate sheets using the following
below listed information in a separate block format:
of 80mm X 160mm size, preferably located
in the lower right hand corner of each sheet: Pull Box Station/ Reference Pull Box
Number Offset Line Type
Record Drawing No.
Contractor ( ) (d) Roadway Lighting. Each sheet shall
Date: include an identification legend which is
identical to that shown on the Contract
Consultant ( ) Drawings for the roadway lighting poles,
Date: their related appurtenances, and circuits.
If not already provided in the Contract
Municipality Drawings, the poles, control cabinets,
Date: and service turrets shall be assigned
numbers. Roadway lights which have
The supplementary tabulation sheets may been installed by others within the
show the information described above, project limits shall also be shown and
within the designer’s title block in lieu of the shall be so described.
Amendment Description block.
(e) Utilities. Using either the standard
The Record Drawings shall be consecutively legend shown on the Contract Drawings
numbered from No. 001 (the new List of or one preferred by the utility
Drawings) to the final sheet in the set. departments and agencies, the utility
record drawings shall be prepared on
All Record Drawings, except those marked
common as-built base plans and must
"REDRAWN", "NOT USED", or
include the information listed below.
"TENDER DRAWING - NO
The legend shall appear on each as-built
CORRECTIONS," shall be stamped "AS-
utility drawing. All utility works
BUILT" in bold letters within the title block.
constructed by others as well as those in
2. Information on Drawings. The project's existence at the time of the project’s
geometry shall be shown as accurately as tendering, which were not removed, shall
possible and as constructed on site with also be shown and described
particular emphasis on the following: accordingly.
(a) General Plans. All bench marks and • Geometry of the roads and other
other survey monuments shall be shown improvements.
along with a clear description of their
locations. • Plot boundaries and plot numbers.
(b) Storm Water Drainage System. All • Service reservation widths and
usable bench marks, pipe sizes, lengths, distribution as well as their
direction of flow, and levels shall be centerline stationing and offsets or
shown. Each sheet shall include an ties to permanent structures.
identification legend which is identical to
that shown on the Contract Drawings as • Stationing at street intersections and
well as a small-scale location plan. A along the roadway centerlines.
Drainage Schedule should supplement
1000-9
• Bench Marks and other survey drawn on a 3-mil thick mylar that is the
monuments with descriptions. same size as the Contract Drawings.
The tabulation shall describe all usable
• Sector numbers and street names. ducts located within the project’s limits,
regardless of their being in existence at
• Utility name, the type, number of the time of tendering or constructed
ducts, size and location within the during the project.
service reservation, the type of
protective works, and all pertinent (f) Service Reservations. Separate service
utility structures. reservation plans, without the utilities,
shall be provided at a scale of 1:1250.
• Small scale key map. The service reservations shall be fully
described as to location, width, and
Separate Record Drawings shall be distribution.
prepared for each utility and, wherever
feasible, shall be correlated with the (g) Profiles and Cross Sections. In addition
Contract Drawings. Record Drawings to showing the as-built elevations, cross
for utilities which have been combined sections included with the Contract
on the Contract Drawings shall be Drawings shall be revised to show the
prepared on separate Record Drawings existing ground elevations as surveyed
to clarify the as-built conditions by the Contractor prior to the start of
construction. Unless needed to clarify a
When the Contract Drawings are used particular as-built condition, cross
for the base plans, the as-built data is to sections which are additional to those in
be superimposed on the plans using the the Contract Documents are not
as-built symbols with no erasure of the required.
original lines. Pertinent unbuilt
structures and/or unverified existing 3. The Review and Approval of Record
utilities shall be neatly crossed out and Drawings. Proof copies of each Record
an explanatory label added. Notes or Drawing shall be transmitted to the
labels on the original Contract Drawings Contractor for review and concurrence.
which are no longer relevant shall also Each waterworks Record Drawing will then
be neatly crossed out but not deleted. be reviewed and approved by the W.E.A.
Consultant or Representative. Electrical
Record Drawings which illustrate the as- works Record Drawings require prior
built water works must include both the approval of W.E.A. Irrigation Record
standard title blocks and a title block for Drawings require prior approval of the
the W.E.A. Consultant. The W.E.A. Agriculture Section. Telephone works
Consultant's title block shall be 56mm x Record Drawings require approval of
150mm in size, preferably located in the Etisalat.
lower left hand corner of each sheet.
Similarly, Record Drawings for other 4. Distribution. After approval of all Record
utilities, where other specialist Drawings by the Utility Agencies and prior
Consultants/Departments are involved, to the Contract completion date, the Engineer
shall also include both standard title will further distribute Record Drawing sets
blocks and the title block of the as described below.
designated Consultant and/or
Department. (a) For the Department. One (1) complete
set of Record Drawings, full size
Record Drawings for each type of utility reproducibles, and/or a compact disk,
shall be supplemented by a sheet (or two (2) complete sets of Record
sheets) entitled, "TABULATION OF Drawings, full size blue or black line
UTILITY DUCTS," which shall be prints, and one 3.5" computer disk in
1000-10
CADD format for record purposes. In (f) For the Utility Agencies. One (1) full
addition to as-built drawing files, a file size reproducible and one (1) full size
containing the entire project shall be blue or black line print of each selected
archived. The CADD files shall be in sheet that is pertinent to the function of
the project true coordinates and the following agencies; and a 3.5"
containing all works related to the computer disk as described above:
project in a complete form. The CADD
files shall include, but not by way of • Sanitary Drainage Network Section.
limitation, roadway layout; all utility
works, including water, electrical, and • Agriculture Section.
telephone; pavement marking; roadway
signs and traffic signals. Each roadway • WEA Electrical.
feature shall be included in one or more
• WEA Water (Note: Waterworks
layers of the file. Each layer shall not be
specifications may require that
used for more than one feature. If
additional copies be provided.)
necessary, this information can be
included in several files with each file • Etisalat.
including the complete works relating to
one or more roadway aspect. All files (g) For Other Requirements. Five (5)
shall have a common coordinate system. complete sets of Record Drawings, of
half size (A3 size), black line, bound
(b) For the Engineer and the Contractor. prints on quality bond paper.
One (1) complete set of Record
Drawings, full size reproducibles, and a Two (2) complete microfilm sets of
3.5" computer disk as described above. Record Drawings mounted on computer
index cards properly identified with
(c) For Town Planning Department. One (1) labels. Each microfilm set shall include
set of full size reproducibles and one (1) suitable storage containers (with
set of full size blue or black line prints of identification labels).
the Geometric Layout, Service
Reservation Plans, and surface finish General plans and overall service
plans; and a 3.5" computer disk as reservation plans and utility plans
described above. including plans for Storm Water
Drainage works, all full size Record
(d) For Town Planning Department. One (1) Drawings which shall be 1:1250 scale or
set of full size reproducibles and one (1) as needed.
set of full size blue or black line prints of
Record Drawings for utilities, and a Geometric layout plans and surface
3.5" computer disk as described above. finish plans, both full size Record
Drawings which shall be 1:500 scale,
(e) For the Department of Planning. One (1) unless otherwise specified or as needed.
complete set of full size blue or black
line prints and a 3.5" computer disk as Cross-sections, structural, and other
described above. specific detail Record Drawings shall be
of the scale as indicated in the
specifications or as needed.
1000-11
CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION MANUAL Appendix
APPENDIX
CONSTRUCTION REPORT FORMS
LISTING OF CONSTRUCTION REPORT FORMS
Form Title Page
1. Engineer’s Daily Project Diary A-1

2. Inspector’s Daily Report A-2
3. Joint Measurement Sheet A-3
4. Computation Sheet A-4
5. Contract Progress Payment Certificate A-5
6. Interim Payment Summary A-6
7. Interim Payment Estimate Bill Summary A-7
8. Interim Payment Estimate A-8
9. Quantity Book A-9
10. Final Quantity Book (Summary) A-10
11. B.O.Q. Recapitulation A-11
12. Computation of Earthworks Volume by End Area A-12
13. Progress Payment Schedule A-13
14. Furnished Materials Evaluation A-14
15. Statement of Overrun Quantities A-15
16. Statement of Underrun Quantities A-16
17. Schedule of Materials on Site A-17
18. Request for Testing of Construction A-18
19. Daily Works Authorization A-19
20. Dayworks A-20
21. Daywork Summary for Authorized Work A-21
22. Schedule No. 1 - Summary of Labor on Site A-22
23. Schedule No. 2 - Summary of Materials on Site A-23
24. Schedule No. 3 - Summary of Plant on Site A-24
25. Resident Engineer’s Report of Contractor’s Accident A-25
26. Utility Incident Report A-27
27. Daily Report on Detour Maintenance A-28
28. Letter of Transmittal A-29
29. Approval of Sub-Contractors A-30
30. Site Instruction A-31
31. Shop Drawing Log Book A-32
A-0
ROAD SECTION
Contract No. Consultant:
Project: Contractor:
ENGINEER’S DAILY PROJECT DAIRY
Working Day Weather Temperature Date :

Full 1/2 0 High Low Page No. :
MAJOR CONTRACT OPERATIONS

I.R. No. Staff Member Work Assignment and Identification
Work Performed: …………………………………………………………………………….
__________________
Resident Engineer
A-1
ROAD SECTION
INSPECTOR’S DAILY REPORT
Date:
I.R. No.
Weather Temperature
High Low
DESCRIPTION OF WORK PERFORMED AND INSPECTED

Specify: Location, Nature of Work, by Contractor or Sub-Contractor for Each Operation
REPORTING OF QUANTITIES PLACED THIS DATE
JMS No. BOQ Item No. Quantity Location Description
The above described work was incorporated into this project and was inspected by:
Inspector’s Signature
Additional Sheets used ( ) Reviewed by

Reverse Side Used for Additional Remarks & Sketches Resident Engineer Date
A-2
ROAD SECTION
Consultant:
Contract No. JMS No.
Contractor: Date:
JOINT MEASUREMENT SHEET
BOQ Item No. Description Unit Qty. Measured
Contractor Consultant Consultant Consultant Resident

Surveyor Inspector Quantity Engineer
Surveyor
Sketches and Computations:
A-3
ROAD SECTION
COMPUTATION SHEET
Page ……….. of ……….
Subject: By: Date:
Item Description Qty Unit Rate Total
A-4
A-5
ROAD SECTION
INTERIM PAYMENT SUMMARY
Payment No. Period Date:
1. Work Done to Date: Dhs.
2. Materials on Site: Dhs.
3. Sub Total: Dhs.
4. Retention Percent on Work Done: Dhs.
5. Retention Percent on Materials on Site: Dhs.
6. Other Deductions: Dhs.
7. Sub Total: Dhs.
8. Initial Advance Repayment Recovery Percent: Dhs.
9. Total Previous Interim Payment: Dhs.
10. Total Due this Interim Payment: Dhs.
11. Percent Progress this Period: %
12. Total Percent Completed to Date: %
Submitted by: Date

Contractor
Certified by: Date
Resident Engineer
Approved by: Date
Municipality
A-6
ROAD SECTION
INTERIM PAYMENT ESTIMATE BILL SUMMARY
Interim Payment Estimate No:

PERIOD ENDING
Page: …….….of …….... For Complete Description, see the BOQ Description
Bill Percent Completion Gross Contractual Value
No. Description Tender Amount Previous This Month Total Previous This Month Total to Date
TOTALS
A-7
ROAD SECTION
INTERIM PAYMENT ESTIMATE

Interim Payment Estimate No:
PERIOD ENDING
See B.O.Q for Complete Item Description
Item Unit Rate BOQ & V.O. Authorized Amount Quantity To Date Amount %
No. Description Unit Dhs. Authorized Dhs. Previous To Date Dhs. BOQ
Quantity
Resident Engineer SUB TOTAL

Contractor TOTAL
A-8
ROAD SECTION
Contract No.: Consultant:
QUANTITY BOOK
Item No. Page No …..… of ….……

Item Description
Total Authorized Quantity Unit
Total Project Quantity
JMS No. Date Quantity Quantity to Date Remarks
A-9
ROAD SECTION
FINAL QUANTITY BOOK(SUMMARY)
Item No. Page No…..… of ….……

Bill of Quantity V. O. No.
Total Authorized Quantity Unit
By Q. S.
Description Unit Quantity Remarks
Final Pay Quantity
Quantity
Surveyor
(Consultant)
Project Manager
(Contractor)
Resident
Engineer
(Consultant)
A-10
ROAD SECTION
B. O. Q. RECAPITULATION
Date:
Page ……….. of ……….. Latest Update:
Item Unit Rate Authorized Estimated +Over (-)Under

No. Description Unit Dirhams Quantity Dirhams Quantity Dirhams Dirhams %
TOTAL THIS SHEET

CUMULATIVE TOTAL
A-11
ROAD SECTION
COMPUTATION OF EARTHWORKS VOLUME

BY END AREA
B.O.Q No.
Description:
Page of
Location:
Station End Area Average End Distance Volume Remarks

m2 Area m2 m m3
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
Total Volume
This Sheet
A-12
ROAD SECTION
PROGRESS PAYMENTS SCHEDULE
Progress Payment No.

Period Ending Date
Payment Cut-Off Date
Utilities Cut-Off Date
Checked Checked by Initials Position Date Remarks

Quantities
Mathematics
Previous Payment
Format
A-13
ROAD SECTION
FURNISHED MATERIALS EVALUATION

PERIOD ENDING: Date:
Page ………….. of …………
Materials To Date Materials Materials Notes
Item B.O.Q Content Quantity Content Value Source
Description Unit
No. No. Unit Rate
Dhs. Previous To Date Dhs.
Resident Engineer Contractor Municipality Representative
A-14
ROAD SECTION
STATEMENT OF OVERRUN QUANTITIES

Interim Payment No: Date:

Period Ending
Page ……….. of ………. For Complete Description, see the B.O.Q Description
Item Description Unit B.O.Q Unit Rate B.O.Q Amt. Quantity To Date Projected Total Projected Total
No. Quantity Dirhams to Date Dirhams Quantity Dirhams
SUB - TOTAL
A-15
ROAD SECTION
STATEMENT OF UNDERRUN QUANTITIES

Interim Payment No: Date:

Period Ending
Page ……….. of ………. For Complete Description, see the B.O.Q Description
Item Description Unit B.O.Q Unit Rate B.O.Q Amt. Quantity To Date Projected Total Projected Total
No. Quantity Dirhams to Date Dirhams Quantity Dirhams
SUB - TOTAL
A-16
ROAD SECTION
SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS ON SITE

Progress Payment No. Date:
Page ………… of ………..
Item Description Unit Total Total Quantity Required Quantity on Remarks
No. Required in Place to Complete Site
A-17
ROAD SECTION
SM - 23 Consultant: …………………………….
Contract No. ………...
Project: ………………………………………. Contractor: …………………………….
No.
REQUEST FOR TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION
THE FOLLOWING WORKS HAVE BEEN THE AFOREMENTIONED WORKS HAVE

PREPARED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE BEEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
SPECIFICATIONS AND ARE HEREBY THE SPECIFICATIONS AND HAVE BEEN
SUBMITTED FOR TESTING:- APPROVED/NOT APPROVED:-
DATE: …………………………………………. DATE: …………………………………………

…………………………………………………. …………………………………………………
…………………………………………………. …………………………………………………
…………………………………………………. …………………………………………………
…………………………………………………. …………………………………………………
…………………………………………………. …………………………………………………
…………………………………………………. …………………………………………………
…………………………………………………. …………………………………………………
…………………………………………………. …………………………………………………
…………………………………………………. …………………………………………………
…………………………………………………. …………………………………………………
…………………………………………………. …………………………………………………
…………………………………………………. …………………………………………………
…………………………………………………. …………………………………………………
…………………………………………………. …………………………………………………
…………………………………………………. …………………………………………………
…………………………………………………. …………………………………………………
SIGNED (By Contractor) ……………………… SIGNED ………………..(Materials Engineer)
THE ABOVE REQUEST IS APPROVED/ Resident Municipal's Contractor's Central Lab
NOT APPROVED Engineer Rep. Rep. Rep.
COMMENTS: …………………………………
………………………………………………….
………………………………………………….
SIGNED ………………….(Resident Engineer)
A-18
ROAD SECTION
Contract No.: Consultant:

No.
DAILY WORKS AUTHORIZATION
Subject
Location
Works to be Performed
All work shall be performed in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Standard and
Particular Specifications and with the terms of Article (8), Paragraph 12, of the Special
Conditions of Contract
Resident Engineer Municipality Site Representative
Dist:
Original – Contractor
Yellow – Q.S
Blue – Retained
A-19
ROAD SECTION
DAY WORKS

Desc. of Authorized Work JMS No. Date:
Sheet
Labor Materials Equipment

Name Classif- Rate Hours Amount Material Unit Quantity Unit Rate Amount Description Rate Hours Amount
ication
Day’s Total Day’s Day’s Total

Total
Total to Date Total to Total to Date
Date
Description of Work Today Contractor Inspector

Resident Engineer
A-20
ROAD SECTION
DAYWORK SUMMARY
FOR AUTHORIZED WORK
Description of Authorized Work
JMS No.
LABOR MATERIAL PLANT

SHEET NO. SCHEDULE 1 SCHEDULE 2 SCHEDULE 3
AMOUNT AMOUNT AMOUNT
Dirhams Dirhams Dirhams
SUB-TOTAL
PROFIT &
OVERHEAD
TOTAL
GRAND TOTAL
A-21
ROAD SECTION

Daywork Return No.
SCHEDULE No. 1
Bill No. 18 Dayworks: ...……………………...
SUMMARY OF LABOR ON SITE
Valuation:
Period Ending:
Item Labor Description Quantity Unit Rate/Hr. Amount

No. Dhs. Dhs.
SUB-TOTAL
Percentage to be added to sub-total
for profit and overhead ………..
Total for Schedule No. 1
Carry to Summary of Dayworks
Resident Engineer
A-22
ROAD SECTION

Daywork Return No.
SCHEDULE No. 2
Bill No. 18 Dayworks: …………………….
SUMMARY OF MATERIALS ON SITE
Valuation:
Period Ending:
Item Material Description Quantity Unit Rate/Hr. Amount

No. Dhs. Dhs.
Sub-Total
Percentage to be added to sub-total
for profit and overhead ………..
Resident Engineer
A-23
ROAD SECTION

Daywork Return No.
SCHEDULE No. 3
Bill No. 18 Dayworks: ……………..……………
SUMMARY OF PLANT ON SITE
Valuation
Period Ending
Item Plant Description Quantity Unit Rate/Hr. Amount

No. Dhs. Dhs.
Sub-Total
Percentage to be added to sub-total for
profit and overhead ……….……...
Resident Engineer
A-24
ROAD SECTION

Resident Engineer’s Report of Contractor’s Accident
Contract No. Date of Accident
Project Day SA SU MO TU WE TH FRI
Contractor Time AM / PM
Sub-Contractor (if any involved) Weather Bright Clear Fog Rain

Sun
Temperature 10-20 20-30 30-40 40+
Wind Still Mod- High

erate
Description of Accident
Primary Cause
P
Name of Injured Employee Age
E Occupation Nationality
R Nature of Injury
S
O
C N First Aid Doctor Visit Hospital Fatality
N
O E
Type of Equipment
N L
T
R &
/
A o
C r Extent of Damage
T
O E
Q
R U
S I
P
M
E
N
T
A-25
P Name of Injured Party Age
E Sex Nationality
T R Address
H S
O Nature of Injuries
I N
R &
D / Property Description and Location
O Name of Property Owner
R
Address
P
P Nature of & Extent of Damages
A R Estimate of Damaged Property
R O
P
T E
Y R
T
Y
Did the Contractor Report the Accident to:

Police Yes No Project RE Yes No
Labour Dept. Yes No Insurance Co. Yes No
Was Lack of Safety Precautions a Factor in this Accident, if so Explain:
What Corrective Action, if Necessary, has been taken by the Contractor to Prevent Recurrence?
Date RESIDENT ENGINEER
A-26
ROAD SECTION

Date:
Time:
UTILITY INCIDENT REPORT

(Circle One)
Electrical Was Utility Marked by Owner? Yes/No
Water Was Utility Protected? Yes/No
Sewerage Was Utility Owner Indicated? Yes/No
Irrigation Was Owner Present When Incident Yes/No Name:
Occurred?
Telephone Was Owner Notified? Yes/No
Gas Inspector
Oil Type of Equipment Equipment No.
Other……….. Foreman
Abandoned in
Service
INTERNAL USE ONLY
Describe Incident in Detail Including any Resulting Physical Injury or Property Damage
……………………………….
Resident Engineer
A-27
ROAD SECTION

DAILY REPORT ON DETOUR MAINTENANCE
Date:
Detour Location Description Lighting Barricades/Signs Flashing Lights Overall Cleanliness Action
No.
To fill out columns 3 to 6 enter OK if completely functioning or in position.

Otherwise, enter number of lights out, barricades out of position, broken, etc.,
Contractor
or if sand/debris on pavement; then enter in column 7 action to be taken.
A-28
ROAD SECTION

LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
To: Ref. No. …………………….

Date ….…………………….
From: Contract No. …………………….

Resident Engineer
We are sending to you Herewith Delivered by hand
Under Separate Cover/the following items for your review & comments
Shop Drawings Samples Estimates
Plans Prints Specifications
Copy of Letter Material Submittal
No. of Copies Drawing No./Date Description
Remarks Signed:
A-29
ROAD SECTION

APPROVAL OF SUB-CONTRACTORS
Name of Sub Contractor:
Signature: Signature:
Contractor Date Sub-Contractor Date
B.O.Q. Item No. and Description Amount
TOTAL
Percent of total contract approved on this form
Percent of contract previously approved
Percent of total contract approved
Comments: Reasons for non approval
Approved
Stamp Stamp
Resident Engineer Chief of Road Section

Consultant Abu Dhabi Municipality
A-30
ROAD SECTION

SITE INSTRUCTION
No.
Date
Time
Subject:
Location:
Instruction:
Received by
FOR CONTRACTOR
RESIDENT ENGINEER
A-31
ROAD SECTION

SHOP DRAWING LOG BOOK
Sheet No.
Engr.’s Contractor’s DESCRIPTION Sub- Date ASSIGNED Date Disposition FORWARDED Remarks
Dwg. Dwg. No. mittal Received Returned
To/Off Date To Date
No. No.
A-32

Construction Supervision Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Construction Supervision Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CONSTRUCTION

Table of Contents Page No.

SECTION 100: GENERAL INFORMATION

SECTION 200: EARTHWORK

Table of Contents Page No.

202.02 PRESERVATION OF TREES AND GREENERY 200-1

SECTION 300: AGGREGATE SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES

SECTION 400: ASPHALT WORKS

Table of Contents Page No.

401.01.04 Plant Component Descriptions (Batch and Continuous) 400-3

Table of Contents Page No.

405.02.02 New Aggregate 400-23

SECTION 500: CONCRETE WORKS

Table of Contents Page No.

503.03 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 500-9

SECTION 600: STORM WATER DRAINAGE

Table of Contents Page No.

605.02.03 Mud Slab 600-9

SECTION 700: BRIDGES

Table of Contents Page No.

SECTION 800: MAINTENANCE AND STAGING OF TRAFFIC

SECTION 900: RECORDS AND REPORTS

SECTION 1000: CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION

Table of Contents Page No.

1004.05 CLOSE-OUT CHECKLIST FOR USE PRIOR TO PROCESSING THE FINAL

LISTING OF CONSTRUCTION REPORT FORMS A-0

SECTION 100 101.02 GOVERNMENT

101 INTRODUCTION The Abu Dhabi Municipality Road Section is

The purpose of this manual is to guide the 101.03 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS

Bill of Quantities: The prepared schedule, Channel: A natural or artificial watercourse.

Inspectors Survey Party Materials Quantity Utilities

101.04.01 Resident Engineer • Check and certify progress payments to the

• Review all construction activities regarding • General oversight of Inspectors’ daily

• Check and approve “as-built” drawings • Preparation of Meeting Minutes as

101.04.02 Assistant Resident Engineer • Preparation of written and oral reports to

101.04.04 Utility Engineer He is expected to have a thorough knowledge of

• Supervise survey party staff. 101.04.08 Materials Technician

• Report any failing or “borderline” test

101.06.02 Amendments • Additional Time for Completion.

Submit New Proposed New

PROGRESS EVALUATION METHODS

The Contractor’s approved CPM will be annotated to show work

The rate of progress is initially established from the approved

/ The Contractor’s approved schedule will show the procurement

The Contractor is required to report the amount of labor and

To ensure strict Contract compliance, it is • Sufficient samples for testing or

Materials Approval Submittal, should be used. 101.09.03 Restoration of Surfaces Opened

• Stockpile areas • Dust Control

• Staging areas • Dewatering Discharge

• Waste areas • Disposal of Waste Materials

• Borrow sites • Fuel Spillage

• Noise Abatement approved safety program should be strictly

101.10.03 Utilities Meetings

• Expedite resolution of problems according to • Re-establish primary project horizontal and

• Confirm, by correspondence to the • Check the Contractor’s survey layout

101.12 SHOP DRAWINGS • Identification and signature of designer,

The Contractor shall: 4. Shop drawing and document submittals

4. Assign drawings to appropriate reviewers,

The stamp to be used will indicate the following disposition:

Project Name Shop Drawing No.

APPROVED APPROVED AS NOTED

Project Name Shop Drawing No.

NOT APPROVED ITEM INCORRECT